!" "! #$
SAP AG 2008
%
&
© SAP AG 2008
Software components used in the course 2008/Q1 Material number 50088756
© SAP AG
SCM612
0-1
'
!
Copyright 2007 SAP AG. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express permission of SAP AG. The information contained herein may be changed without prior notice.
SAP AG 2007
Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietary software components of other software vendors. Microsoft, Windows, Excel, Outlook, and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. IBM, DB2, DB2 Universal Database, OS/2, Parallel Sysplex, MVS/ESA, AIX, S/390, AS/400, OS/390, OS/400, iSeries, pSeries, xSeries, zSeries, System i, System i5, System p, System p5, System x, System z, System z9, z/OS, AFP, Intelligent Miner, WebSphere, Netfinity, Tivoli, Informix, i5/OS, POWER, POWER5, POWER5+, OpenPower and PowerPC are trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation. Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, PostScript, and Reader are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries. Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation. UNIX, X/Open, OSF/1, and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open Group. Citrix, ICA, Program Neighborhood, MetaFrame, WinFrame, VideoFrame, and MultiWin are trademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems, Inc. HTML, XML, XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3C®, World Wide Web Consortium, Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc. JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems, Inc., used under license for technology invented and implemented by Netscape. MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB, Sweden. © SAP AG
SCM612
0-2
SAP, R/3, mySAP, mySAP.com, xApps, xApp, SAP NetWeaver, and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world. All other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companies. Data contained in this document serves informational purposes only. National product specifications may vary. The information in this document is proprietary to SAP. No part of this document may be reproduced, copied, or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express prior written permission of SAP AG. This document is a preliminary version and not subject to your license agreement or any other agreement with SAP. This document contains only intended strategies, developments, and functionalities of the SAP® product and is not intended to be binding upon SAP to any particular course of business, product strategy, and/or development. Please note that this document is subject to change and may be changed by SAP at any time without notice. SAP assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions in this document. SAP does not warrant the accuracy or completeness of the information, text, graphics, links, or other items contained within this material. This document is provided without a warranty of any kind, either express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose, or non-infringement. SAP shall have no liability for damages of any kind including without limitation direct, special, indirect, or consequential damages that may result from the use of these materials. This limitation shall not apply in cases of intent or gross negligence. The statutory liability for personal injury and defective products is not affected. SAP has no control over the information that you may access through the use of hot links contained in these materials and does not endorse your use of third-party Web pages nor provide any warranty whatsoever relating to third-party Web pages.
© SAP AG
SCM612
0-3
$
($
Required Prerequisites SCM611 Transportation SAPSCM mySAP Supply Chain Management Overview Recommended Knowledge of Supply Chain Theory Knowledge of basic transportation planning and execution processes SCM210 Core Interface APO SCM610 Delivery Processes
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
0-4
$#
"
Participants Project team members responsible for the implementation of APO TP/VS SAP consultants and SAP partners Duration: 5 days
SAP AG 2008
User notes These training materials are not a teach-yourself program. They complement the explanations provided by your course instructor. Space is provided on each page for you to note down additional information. There may not be sufficient time during the course to complete all the exercises. The exercises provide additional examples that are covered during the course. You can also work through these examples in your own time to increase your understanding of the topics.
© SAP AG
SCM612
0-5
© SAP AG
SCM612
0-6
Contents: Course Goals Course Objectives Course Content Main Business Scenario
SAP AG 2005
© SAP AG
SCM612
1-1
This course will provide you with: An understanding of the Master Data requirements and integration between APO TP/VS and an ERP system (or other external system) Detailed knowledge of the Transportation Planning / Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component of APO
SAP AG 2005
© SAP AG
SCM612
1-2
At the conclusion of this course, you will be able to: Use the TP/VS component of APO to plan both inbound and outbound shipments Create the necessary integration models to communicate data between an R/3 system and the APO TP/VS component Make the necessary customizing settings required to perform transportation planning, vehicle scheduling and transportation service provider selection in the TP/VS environment
SAP AG 2005
© SAP AG
SCM612
1-3
Unit 1 Course Overview Unit 2 Transportation Processes Overview
Unit 9 Transportation Service Provider Selection Unit 10 Additional Topics
Unit 3 ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Unit 4 TP/VS Master Data Unit 5 Supply Chain Engineer Unit 6 TP/VS Transaction Data Unit 7 Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Basic Settings Unit 8 Vehicle Scheduling (VS)
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
1-4
As a member of the project team of a company that manufactures and sells computers and related components, you are responsible for the implementation of the APO TP/VS component that is to be interfaced with an SAP ERP System. Your task is to integrate the APO TP/VS environment with your ERP system by making the necessary customizing settings, creating the Integration models to transfer the necessary master and transaction data and establishing the TP/VS models to perform the short to intermediate transportation planning for your company.
SAP AG 2005
© SAP AG
SCM612
1-5
© SAP AG
SCM612
1-6
Contents: The Transportation Management System (TMS) ERP Logistics processes Transportation planning and execution with ERP Transportation planning with TP/VS
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-1
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: Define processes related to transportation planning Identify the ERP documents that are related to transportation planning Understand planning in ERP vs. planning in SCM TP/VS
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-2
It is important to understand the fundamental business processes that are related to transportation planning and execution Example processes: A transportation planner is planning the logistic activities to delivery goods to his customers Another transportation planner is creating planned shipments for the pick-up of purchased items from his vendor. A shipper is contacting a logistic service provider to check availability and price of a certain truck
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-3
The target of the transportation planning process is to optimize the inbound, outbound and intercompany transportation. The Transportation Management scenario comprises the following main processes: Document entry in ERP Dynamic route determination Vehicle Scheduling Carrier Selection Collaborative Transportation Planning Transfer Deliveries and Shipments to ERP Execute Shipment in ERP
SAP AG 2008
The target of the transportation planning process is to optimize the inbound or outbound transportation demand between a plant/DC and different other locations such as suppliers and customers. The optimization covers the own fleet as well as carrier vehicles. Carrier selection can be executed to select carriers based on least cost, business share and/or priority. The Transportation Management scenario comprises the following main processes: •
Document entry
•
Dynamic route determination
•
Vehicle Scheduling
•
Carrier Selection
•
Collaborative Transportation Planning
•
Tendering
•
Transfer Deliveries and Shipments to ERP
•
Execute Shipment in ERP by picking and packing deliveries, goods issue posting, set status shipment end and archive shipments.
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-4
!
! #
! !
$
"# # !
! %& %*
% +
'(% )
,
SAP AG 2008
The ERP (LES) system is used for execution, while the planning of the shipments is performed in the SCM (TP/VS) system. The BW system is used for reporting.
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-5
/ &
,
+ 1
$
0
-.
.
n:n
Order
n:1
Outbound Outbound Delivery Delivery Delivery
Split criteria Copy of transport-relevant information (Means of transport, shipping type …)
1:1
Shipment
Transport-relevant information as selection criteria Grouping of deliveries
Freight Cost Document
Customer Invoice
Calculation of transportation costs
Means of transport, Service agents, … Freight cost simulation Monitoring
SAP AG 2008
The transportation-relevant information is copied from the order item into the outbound delivery header. It can, therefore, be used as the split criteria for outbound deliveries. You cannot, for example, put two order items with different shipping types into one outbound delivery. (set data transfer and split criteria in copying control “order delivery”.) Order relevant transportation data: •
Means of transport: Indicates the specific vehicle type with which the goods are to be transported, such as 20t truck, ship or bulk container. Material master records with a Material Type of Packaging Material are maintained for means of transport.
•
Shipping type: You can use this to define the characteristics of the mode of transport, such as road, rail, or sea.
When creating shipment documents you can use transportation-relevant information as selection criteria. This means that you can, for example, group deliveries with means-of-transport type “truck” and means of transport “small truck” into one shipment. Freight Cost Simulation / Shipment Monitoring When you are planning the shipments, the capacity of the means of transport e.g. truck is checked by the system. If this capacity is exceeded, you will receive a warning. Shipment cost document -> copy into customer invoice
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-6
/ &
+ ,
0
*
1
Shipper do transportation planning on their own n:n
Order
n:1
1:1
Outbound Outbound Delivery Delivery Delivery
Shipment
Information Fax, EDI, Tendering Portal
Freight Cost Document
Customer Invoice Carrier Settlement
Status
Carrier
Shipment
SAP AG 2008
Let’s have a look at the document in a different scenario: Shipper with external Transportation Resources “Carrier” In this scenario the shipper do the transportation planning on their own Shipment Creation
Order
Delivery
These shipments are transferred to the external carrier by Fax, EDI, Internet Tendering And carrier records status information back. In the system of the shipper the cost document is created and for carrier settlement
© SAP AG
SCM612
information copied to customer invoice
2-7
/ &
+ (
0
* 1
Shipper n:n
Order
Outbound Outbound Delivery Delivery Delivery
Customer Invoice
Shipment Status
LSP mySAP ERP of LSP
n:1
Outbound Outbound Delivery Delivery Delivery
1:1
Shipment
Freight Cost Document
Shipper Settlement
LSP = Logistic Service Provider
SAP AG 2008
Let’s have a look at the document in the following scenario: Shipper with external Transportation Resources “Logistics Service Provider” In this scenario the deliveries are transferred to the LSP, who does the transportation planning, shipment creation etc. and sends a customer invoice to the shipper.
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-8
%*
.
Shipment by truck from one plant to one customer
Shipment using several trucks from one plant to several customers
Shipment by rail from the vendor to the plant
Empty return shipment from the customer to the plant Shipments using different modes of transportation from several plants to several customers SAP AG 2008
Direct Shipment = individual shipment Multi Pick and Multi Drop = Collective Shipment Multimodal
Multiple legs, etc. transportation chain
A company can use different Transportation Scenarios with different means of transport Different Shipment Types are: •
individual shipment (one shipment from one single point of departure and one single destination and in most cases one mode of transport)
•
collective shipment (shipment with one or more points of departure and one or more destinations and in most cases, only one mode of transport is used)
•
transportation chain (one or more points of departure and one or more destinations, various modes of transport like road, rail, or sea can be used and various legs). Several shipment documents are created: preliminary legs, main leg, and subsequent legs)
Shipment types are defined in customizing with several parameters e.g. Leg Determination; Copy control etc.
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-9
create
Demands
Freight Units
create
Deliveries
update update create update
checks
Control Rules
checks
Shipment
Planned Shipments - Carrier Selection
Fixed Shipments & Creation of deliveries
Mid- and short-term optimization
Sales Orders
create update
Fixed Shipments
SAP AG 2008
Sales orders, outbound deliveries and shipments can be used to create transportation demand in TP/VS. The TP/VS planning process using sales order data will create the delivery and the shipment documents in the ERP system. The TP/VS planning process does not make any changes to the sales documents that are in the ERP system. Generally, transportation-related changes made to an ERP document is updated in the corresponding TP/VS document.
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-10
-
create
Demands
checks
Freight Units
Purchase Orders
create
checks
Deliveries
checks
create update
Control Rules
update
Planned Shipments - Carrier Selection
Fixed Shipments & Creation of deliveries
Mid- and short-term optimization
Purchase Requisitons
create
Shipment
Send Shipments
update
SAP AG 2008
Purchase Orders, Stock Transport Orders, Inbound Deliveries and Shipment documents can be used to plan inbound transportation demand. When Purchase Orders/Stock Transport Orders are provided to TP/VS for planning, TP/VS will create the Inbound Delivery and Inbound Shipment document data for the ERP System. Transportation demands from Supply Network Planning (SNP) can also be used in TP/VS for planning. Transportation relevant changes made to an ERP document are updated in the corresponding TP/VS document.
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-11
,
Orders
update
Demands
manual changes Deliveries
update
Deliveries
update
manual changes
New optimization run
update
update
Shipment
Shipments
SAP AG 2008
Transportation planning relevant changes made to any ERP document that has a corresponding TP/VS document will be made to those documents. A shipment in the SCM system changes its status if you change documents in the ERP system that are contained in a planned shipment in the SCM system. Note: You can find a process list with the expected behaviour of the SCM system when changing the planning objects in the OLTP system in note 362445.
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-12
$
You are now able to: Describe the processes related to transportation planning in ERP and SCM TP/VS Identify the ERP documents that are related to transportation planning
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-13
Exercises Unit: Transportation Processes Overview
At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Describe the Transportation Management System functions. • List the documents that are used in the TMS components. • Outline the functions provided by the APO TP/VS planning component. The transportation function in a business can be divided into two fundamental steps: Planning and Execution. In an ECC (ERP) and APO environment the planning step is carried out in APO and the execution step is performed in the ECC (ERP) system. To perform these steps it is important to understand the functions provided in each system. 1-1
Select the process(es) that are not part of the Logistics Execution (LE) component of ECC: a
Transportation process
b
Internal warehouse process
c
Material Requirements Planning (MRP)
d
Goods issue process
e
Goods receipt process
f
Production Planning process
1-2
_______________________ shipments are an integral part of the process chain in Procurement and are created from ______________________________________ documents.
1-3
_______________________ shipments are created from ____________________ delivery documents that are generated from sales orders.
1-4
True or False. Delivery documents must be created before shipment documents can be created.
1-5
True or False. Shipment costing is required for each shipment document.
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-14
1-6
ECC transportation and shipment cost processing includes: a
_____________________________________________________
b
_____________________________________________________
c
_____________________________________________________
1-7
True or False. The goal of the transportation planning process is to optimize the inbound and outbound transportation demand between the plant/DC and other locations such as customers, suppliers and other plants/DC’s.
1-8
Which of the following criteria does the TP/VS Optimizer take into account during transportation planning:
1-9
a
Shipment fixed costs
b
Cost minimization of distance
c
Order consolidation
d
Loading and unloading time
e
Goods issue date
f
Costs for non-delivery
g
Distance in the delivery route code
During Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection, TP/VS can select TSP’s based on the following: a
Vehicle capacities (weight, volume, number of pallets,..)
b
Availability and compatibility of products
c
Contract terms
d
Priority of TSP
e
Business share
f
TSP quality / service performance rating
g
Costs
1-10
True or False. Sales order and Purchase order demand must be used for APO TP/VS planning of outbound and inbound shipments, respectively.
1-11
The transfer of planned deliveries and shipments from TP/VS to the SAP ERP system can be triggered by the ________________ function.
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-15
Solutions Unit: Transportation Processes Overview
1-1
Select the process (es) that are not part of the Logistics Execution (LE) component of ECC: Material Requirements Planning (MRP Production Planning process)
1-2
Inbound shipments are an integral part of the process chain in Procurement and are created from Inbound Delivery documents.
1-3
Outbo und shipments are created from Outbound delivery documents that are generated from sales orders.
1-4
True or False. Delivery documents must be created before shipment documents can be created.
1-5
False. Shipment costing is required for each shipment document.
1-6
ECC transportation and shipment cost processing includes:
1-7
a
Transportation processing
b
Shipment cost calculation
c
Shipment cost settlement
True. The goal of the transportation planning process is to optimize the inbound and outbound transportation demand between the plant/DC and other locations such as customers, suppliers and other plants/DCs.
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-16
1-8
Which of the following criteria does the TP/VS Optimizer take into account during transportation planning: Shipment fixed costs Cost minimization of distance Order consolidation Loading and unloading time Costs for non-delivery
1-9
During Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection, TP/VS can select TSP’s based on the following: a
Vehicle capacities (weight, volume, number of pallets, ...)
b
Availability and compatibility of products
c
Priority of TSP
d
Business share
e
Costs
1-10
False. Sales order and Purchase order demand must be used for APO TP/VS planning of outbound and inbound shipments, respectively.
1-11
The transfer of planned deliveries and shipments from TP/VS to the SAP ERP system can be triggered by the GOTO function.
© SAP AG
SCM612
2-17
Contents: Organizational Units in Transportation Shipment document structure and control Basic ERP to TP/VS interface settings
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-1
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: Explain the organizational units related to ERP transportation Describe the structure of the shipment document and its functions Identify and locate important information in the shipment document Make the basic customizing and master data settings to interface an ERP System with an APO TP/VS system
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-2
The computer manufacturer will utilize the APO TP/VS component to plan shipments for goods to be received from suppliers and to be shipped to its customers. Although the planning function will be done using TP/VS, the execution of the shipments will be made using the ERP transportation application. The primary document used in these processes is the shipment document - so project team members have to understand its structure, functions and the information it contains.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-3
ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Lesson 1: Organizational Units in Transportation Lesson 2: Shipment Document Structure and Control Lesson 3: Basic ERP to TP/VS interface Settings
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-4
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: Name the organizational units that are used in ERP transportation processing and execution
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-5
!
Various organizational data play an important role in the transportation planning and execution processes. It is important that the implementation team understand the role that each organizational unit plays in the transportation processes.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-6
Reflects the location or the group of people that is responsible for carrying out the shipping activities. Each delivery is processed by a single shipping point. A shipping point is assigned to one or more plants. A shipping point can be further sub-divided into loading points. Determination of shipping point is via Shipping Condition (customer), Loading group (MM) and plant. Dresden
SAP AG 2008
The shipping point is the part of the company responsible for the type of shipping, the necessary shipping materials and the means of transport. The most important organizational element for shipping is the shipping point. You can define a user-specific default value for the shipping point in the user parameter VST.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-7
Transportation planning points
Company code
Planning and processing shipments
1010 Hamburg International shipment by sea
1011 Hamburg Rail shipments
1200 Dresden Truck Shipments
SAP AG 2008
The transportation planning point is the central point within the company that plans, processes, and monitors shipments. It can be a location or a group of people responsible for processing. Each shipment is created and processed by a single transportation planning point. You can freely define the transportation planning points to meet your corporate requirements, for example, in terms of the location or the mode of transport. The transportation planning point is defined for a specific company code in Customizing. This assignment of the planning point to the company code is important for shipment cost calculation and settlement.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-8
" #
Cologne
Frankfurt
Praha Prague
Trade Tradecenter center
Route Route Stage Stage
Nuremberg
Border Straßbourg Strasbourg
Munich
Vienna
SAP AG 2008
A route is the journey to be covered between a departure point and a destination and is represented by the route code. A route can be defined in great detail and consist of one or more individual stages, but it can also be a general description or even simply a destination area. Like a shipment stage, a stage can be a leg, a load transfer point, or a border crossing point. Example: The above route consists of 5 stages - 3 legs, 1 load transfer point, and 1 border crossing point. The route code is determined for each line item in a sales order and is copied into the header of the outbound delivery document(s) created from the sales order. Inbound delivery documents do not require a route code but one may be entered manually. The route code is not used by APO TP/VS because TP/VS determine the route stages based on the planning criteria associated with transportation lanes. Routes in ERP are only required to identify the transportation documents as relevant for shipment. Multimode APO transports or APO transports with transshipment points are created with several shipment stages in ERP. In ERP they are identified as 'generated manually'. A transfer of the routes from ERP to APO does not occur. Currently a report or something similar is not available.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-9
#
Description Distance
Service agent
Route Transportation relevance
Factory calendar
Transit time
Shipping type Transportation planning lead time
Travel duration
SAP AG 2008
You may define routes in Customizing or in LE master data maintenance. A route code can contain a number of fields of information that are important to the shipment, for example, distance, transportation lead time, travel duration, shipping type, service agent. When TP/VS is used for transportation planning, it will determine the route itinerary; therefore, stages are not necessary to be predefined for the route and should not be copied into the shipment document. You set transportation relevance for the route in Customizing for Transportation. The route must be set for transportation relevance if it will be used in sales orders and deliveries to be planned in TP/VS.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-10
#
%$You set transportation relevance for the route in Customizing for Transportation. The route must be set for transportation relevance if it will be used in sales orders and deliveries to be planned in TP/VS.
SAP AG 2008
ERP IMG: Sales and Distribution and Stages
Basic Functions
Routes
Define Routes
Define Routes
The route code is not used by SCM TP/VS because TP/VS determines the route stages based on the planning criteria associated with transportation lanes. Routes in ERP are only required to identify the transportation documents as relevant for shipment. The Route code is copied to TP/VS and can be used as selection criteria for vehicle scheduling. Multimode SCM transports or SCM transports with transshipment points are created with several shipment stages in ERP. In ERP they are identified as 'generated manually'. A transfer of the routes from ERP to SCM does not occur. Currently a report or something similar is not available.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-11
&
'
You should now be able to: Name the organizational units that are used in ERP transportation processing and execution
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-12
"
(
ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Lesson 1: Organizational Units in Transportation Lesson 2: Shipment Document Structure and Control Lesson 3: Basic ERP to TP/VS interface Settings
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-13
"
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: Define the structure of the shipment document Describe the role of the shipment type List the basic shipment types Identify key information fields in the shipment document Explain the ways a shipment document can be created
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-14
"
!
The shipment document is the central document in transportation planning and execution. It is important for the project team to understand its basic structure and data.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-15
"
) Grouping of inbound or outbound deliveries in shipments
Create output (EDI / documents)
rt p o S er ns v ic a r ea ft o ge de nt Mo
Record shipment characteristics
Shipment document functions Record planned and actual dates/status information Plan
Act.
Determine shipment stages A
C
Packing / loading B
04.06. 12.06.
SAP AG 2008
The shipment document is the central document that is used to model shipments in the ERP System. It contains all information necessary for organizing and carrying out a shipment. The shipment document provides the following functions: •
Combining inbound deliveries to form inbound shipments
•
Combining outbound deliveries to form outbound shipments
•
Assigning service agents, modes of transport, shipment types, and so on
•
Planning and monitoring deadlines
•
Specifying shipment stages
•
Cross-delivery packing and creation of shipping units
•
Creating output and shipping papers
•
Recording shipment-relevant texts
•
Recording partner information
Using TP/VS, shipments are created by combining deliveries within APO. Also carriers and transportation methods are assigned to the shipments. Then they are transferred to ERP. In ERP they contain the data which are maintained in APO.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-16
#
Shipments and deliveries
00001234
"
Service agent
Nordspeed
TPPt:
1000
Shipment header: General data for the Wt/kg entire shipment
ShPt
18,586 0
0080004903
1200
0080004879
1000
0080004905
1000
8,386 Items: 3,200Inbound or outbound deliveries in the 7,000shipment
SAP AG 2008
The shipment document contains general data that applies to the whole document, such as shipment type, transportation planning point, route, deadlines, and status information. This information is displayed in the shipment header. Since the shipment is a collection of inbound or outbound deliveries that are shipped together, the items of the shipment correspond exactly to the inbound deliveries in the case of inbound shipments, and to the outbound deliveries in the case of outbound shipments.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-17
'
Completion type
Leg determination / stage selection
Number assignment
Leg indicator
Texts
Shipping type
Shipment type Output
Copying rule
Update change documents?
Planning Profile Split profile
SAP AG 2008
The shipment type controls elements in the shipment document and therefore represents a particular processing type for a shipment. Shipment type settings include: •
The leg determination type (automatic leg determination, for example)
•
The completion type (loaded outbound shipment, inbound shipment, for example)
•
The processing control (collective shipment using one mode of transport, for example)
•
The service level (general cargo, grouped load, for example)
•
The shipping type (truck, train, mail, for example)
•
The leg indicator (preliminary leg, subsequent leg, direct leg, for example)
•
Copying data from preceding documents (forwarding agent and route, if unique, for example)
•
Output determination and text determination procedure
•
Default values for the shipment document (weight and volume unit, planning profile, for example)
You can define your own shipment types to suit your own shipment requirements. Shipment types created for APO TP/VS use must not have leg determination enabled.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-18
Delivery item category
Delivery type Out. delivery LF Cash sale
X
BV
Inb. delivery EL
Standard item TAN Text item
X
Route of the delivery X
TATX
Inb. delivery ELN
X
Route HH - F
X
Route HH - M
X
Northern route
Out. delivery LF Route HH - F Transportation planning status = A SAP AG 2008
The transportation relevance of the delivery type, the delivery item category, and the route in the delivery controls whether a shipment can be created or not. So that a shipment can be created, the delivery type must be set as relevant for transportation. Similarly, at least one delivery item category in the delivery must be relevant for transportation. The outbound delivery must contain a route code that is relevant for transportation (does not apply to inbound deliveries). A route is defined as the connection between a point of departure and a destination point with several possible points in between. If all three (or two in the case of inbound deliveries) conditions are met, the delivery has transportation planning status A, which means that the delivery document is relevant for transportation. You set transportation relevance in Customizing for Transportation.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-19
#
( Creating shipments
Manually using Create Shipment
Without planning proposal
With planning proposal
Automatically in collective processing using the worklist
Using a transportation planning system
TP/VS Online
B/ground
ERP
SAP AG 2008
The ERP System contains different ways of creating shipments: You can create shipments manually using the Create shipment function. You can select deliveries due for shipping using different selection criteria and create the documents manually. You can also use a planning proposal. This is a pre-defined profile according to whose rules, deliveries are automatically combined into shipments and completed with data. The system can also create shipments automatically. To do this, you use a collective processing run that is executed online or in batch mode. The system creates one or more shipment documents according to different processing rules. If the shipments are created and optimized by an external transportation planning system such as APO TP/VS, you can link to this system with an interface. In the ERP to APO environment this interface is called the “Core Interface” or “CIF”.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-20
#
Processing status of shipment
"
Status information in the shipment document header: Overall status
Check-in
Planned
Completed
Check-in
Completed
Loading start
Not completed
Loading end
Not completed
Shipment completion
Not completed
Shipment start
Not completed
Shipment end
Not completed
SAP AG 2008
When the transportation activities such as planning, checking in, loading, and so on, are finished, you can set a status. As soon as the status is set, the activity is considered completed. Thus you always know the current processing status of a shipment and can quickly provide information. You can set the status by: •
Choosing the corresponding pushbutton; the current date is adopted as the actual date.
•
Entering the actual date; the status is then set by the system.
A traffic light symbol displays the overall status of the shipment. •
Red: Planned status is set.
•
Yellow: Check-in / Loading Start / Loading End status is set
•
Green: Shipment completion / Shipment Start / Shipment End status is set
Note: For shipment cost calculation, however, status Planned must be set as a minimum. Note: The planned status is automatically set if you transfer shipments from TP/VS to ERP.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-21
"
&
'
You should now be able to: Define the structure of the shipment document Describe the role of the shipment type List the basic shipment types Identify key information fields in the shipment document Explain the ways a shipment document can be created
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-22
%$#
ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Lesson 1: Organizational Units in Transportation Lesson 2: Shipment Document Structure and Control Lesson 3: Basic ERP to TP/VS interface Settings
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-23
%$#
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: Make the necessary customizing settings in the ERP System to interface the ERP transportation application with the TP/VS component. Create the necessary material master data in the ERP System for the TP/VS integration
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-24
%$#
!
To link the ERP system to the SCM TP/VS environment certain settings are required in the ERP system.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-25
(
*
"
+
Customizing Activities Transportation relevance of orders and deliveries Definition of Shipment Document Number Ranges Definition of Shipment Types Transportation Planning Point Determination Shipment Costing Settings related to TSP selection
Material Master Requirements Check ATP-Category Create Packaging Materials needed in TP/VS Check Strategy Group
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-26
ERP: Transportation relevance of deliveries Route
Delivery Type
Item Category
SAP AG 2008
ERP IMG: Logistics Execution Relevance
Transportation
Shipments
Maintain Transportation
Only transport relevant deliveries can be assigned to shipments. For outbound deliveries route determination has to be maintained, because outbound deliveries without an assigned route are not transportation relevant. For Inbound deliveries, relevance is determined from the Item Category and Delivery Document Type.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-27
'
SAP AG 2008
ERP IMG: Logistics Execution Transportation Define Routes Define Shipping Types
Basic Transportation Functions
Routes
The Shipping Type code can be assigned to Routes and they are assigned to Shipment Document Types. They are used in the Transportation Planning Point Determination table to assign a Transportation Planning Point to a Shipment document that has been transferred from APO TP/VS to ERP. The “STPG” (Shipping Type Procedure Group) code from this table is used to determine pricing procedures in shipment costing.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-28
"
,
ERP and SCM: Definition of Number Ranges must be consistent
ERP
External number range in ERP has to correspond with internal number range in SCM.
SCM
SAP AG 2008
ERP IMG: Logistics Execution Shipments
Transportation
Shipments
Define Number Ranges for
SCM IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer (SCM) Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings Define Number Range for Temporary Shipments SCM IMG: ...
© SAP AG
Define Number Range for Shipments
SCM612
3-29
'
-
ERP: Definition of Shipment Types Example for outbound shipments:
SAP AG 2008
IMG: Logistics Execution
Transportation
Shipments
Define Shipment Types
Note: Maintain "Do not adopt stages" and "No legs to be determined"!
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-30
#
%$ERP: Transportation Planning Point Determination:
Definition
Determination
SAP AG 2008
ERP IMG: Enterprise Structure Planning Point
Definition
Logistics Execution
ERP IMG: Logistics Execution Determination
Transportation
Interfaces
Maintain Transportation
Transportation Planning Point
You must update the Transportation Planning Point determination table so that TP/VS can determine the Transportation Planning point to be assigned to the shipment documents that are created in TP/VS planning. A default transportation planning point should also be maintained.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-31
.
/
Transportation Group An indicator that summarizes the characteristics of a material that are relevant for transportation. Used for automatic route determination during sales order and delivery creation. Each material is assigned to a transportation group. For example, a transportation group can use characteristics such as "bulky goods" or "must be refrigerated." Transportation Zone A Transportation Zone where the ship-to party is located and that is used by the system as a factor for determining the route. Grouping of ship-from locations or ship-to locations from or to which goods are delivered. In sales and distribution it represents the regional zone of the goods recipient, in purchasing the regional zone of the supplier.
SAP AG 2008
For example, transportation zones can be defined according to postal code areas. If a transportation zone is assigned to a customer e.g. the system automatically proposes a suitable route by using the transportation zone of the goods recipient in combination with other information, such as the Countries of origin and destination, shipping conditions, transportation group.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-32
.
#
%$ERP Manual maintenance in both systems
SCM
SAP AG 2008
The transportation Group is used to categorize materials according to their transportation requirements. Like materials in ERP, each APO Product is assigned to a Transportation Group code. A product attribute for grouping could be 'refrigerated transportation required' or 'dangerous goods'. The Transportation Group codes in APO should match the R/3 Transportation Group codes. SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings Maintain Transportation Group ERP IMG: Logistics Execution Transportation Basic Transportation Functions Routes Route Determination Define Transportation Groups The setup of the transportation groups in SCM is necessary for correct master data transfer.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-33
0
12
APO planned shipment can have a TOP HU automatically assigned, based on the Means of Transport used in APO
SAP AG 2008
Usage of Handling Units is optional hence the following settings are optional. See the next slide for the necessary settings.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-34
3
*
,
#
%$*
TP/VS
SAP AG 2008
Create materials of material type "VERP" (naming should be the same as that used in the APO Transport Methods). Note: In material master view "Sales: General/Plant Data" a packaging material type "means of transport" e.g. like “Trucks" has to be maintained. See Packaging Material Types in ERP IMG: Logistics General Handling Unit Management Basics Define Packaging Material Types TP/VS: Mapping Table for Vehicles IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Interfaces Maintain Mapping Table for Vehicles Note: The APO Mapping Table for Vehicles is case sensitive. Maintain the column for external vehicle description only by using upper cases.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-35
*
*
"
)
(
3
SAP AG 2008
SAP-Menu: Immediately
Logistics
Materials Management
Material Master
Material
Change
ATP-Category in Material Master View: MRP 3: See ‘Availability Check’ field Checking Group for Availability Check: 02 (Individual rqmt) This field must be set for ‘individual requirements’ for sales requirement data to be transferred to APO. •
Strategy Group
•
There are four ERP strategy groups that are not supported in APO:
•
11 – Gross requirements
•
59 – Phantom Assembly
•
52 – Future Use
•
62 – Future Use
•
In addition, some strategy groups are configured such that requirements are not transferred to APO. If requirements are not transferred to APO transportation planning will not occur for the material.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-36
( If “External”/Actual freight rates are going to be used in Transportation Service Provider selection, the following configuration and master data settings must be made: 1.
Assign Shipment Types to Cost Types.
2.
Update Tariff Zone Determination to include new Transportation Planning Points.
3.
Create Shipment Costing Pricing Procedure and update Pricing Procedure Determination.
4.
Update Purchasing Data determination table in Shipment Costing.
5.
Update Shipping Point Determination.
6.
Enter Freight Rates in ERP Transportation Master Data.
SAP AG 2008
If actual freight rates are going to be used to determine Transportation Service Providers in TP/VS, shipment costing related configuration settings must be made in the ERP system. These settings must be made and the corresponding freight rates must be entered because TP/VS does not maintain any freight costing data or configuration. When TSP’s are to be selected based on “external”/actual freight rates, TP/VS send a request to ERP to perform a simulated shipment costing calculation for the freight units. ERP will create a simulated shipment document and a corresponding shipment cost document that contains the values computed based on the freight rating and shipment costing pricing procedure settings.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-37
%$#
&
'
You should now be able to: Make the necessary customizing settings in the ERP System to interface the ERP transportation application with the TP/VS component. Create the necessary material master data in the ERP System for the TP/VS integration
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-38
0
'
You are now able to: Explain the organizational units related to ERP transportation Describe the structure of the shipment document and its functions Identify and locate important information in the shipment document Make the necessary setting to interface an ERP System with a TP/VS system
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-39
Exercises Unit: ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Topic: Transportation Planning Point At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: •
Understand the organizational units relevant for transportation processing in Customizing
• Create a Transportation Planning Point to be used for shipment documents created by APO TP/VS planning. As an employee in transportation planning and processing, you are also a member of the APO implementation team in the transportation area. Before you begin setting up the system and trying out its shipment processes, you familiarize yourself with ERP transportation processing in general. You examine the structure of the shipment documents and identify what information they contain and create two new shipment types to facilitate the creation of ERP shipment documents from planned shipments in TP/VS. Since you also need to familiarize yourself with the organizational structures, you learn how they are defined and assigned. You will create a new Transportation Planning Point to be used when creating ERP shipment documents from the APO TP/VS component. 1-1
True or false? 1-1-1 A company code is an independent, accounting unit. 1-1-2 Each plant has exactly one shipping point. 1-1-3 Shipments are processed at a transportation planning point. 1-1-4 Each transportation planning point must be assigned to a plant. 1-1-5 Each transportation planning point must be assigned to a warehouse number.
1-2
Which transportation planning points are defined for company code 1000? ____________________________________________________________ Go to the address screen for transportation planning point 1000. In which street is it located? ______________________________________________________
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-40
1-3
Create a new Transportation Planning Point to be used for shipments created from the APO TP/VS component. Identify the Transportation Planning Point as AP##. Assign it to Company Code 1000. Description:
TP/VS Group ##
In the Edit Address fields: APO TP/VS GR ##
Name:
Search Term: AP##
1-4
1-5
Country:
DE
Language:
English
You must create and entry in the Assign Goods Receiving Points for Inbound Deliveries table in Customizing to enable the System to create Inbound Delivery documents from TP/VS planning of purchasing documents. APO TP/VS will be used to plan inbound shipments to your Hamburg plant, 10##. Update the customizing table with the following entry: Plant
St. Loc
10##
0001
Shipping Point
Sequence Number
Z0##
1
When shipment documents are created from the APO TP/VS system, the Transportation Planning Point must be determined for each shipment document. In this step you will update the interface table that is used to determine the Transportation Planning Point. Shipments will be planned for Shipping Point X0## Dresden and Z0## Hamburg. Create the following entries in the 'Determination of Transportation Planning Point’ table. Shipping Point Shipping Type
TrspPlanPt
X0##
Blank
AP##
X0##
01
AP##
Z0##
Blank
AP##
Z0##
01
AP##
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-41
Exercises Unit: ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Topic: Shipment Document Type At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create Shipment document types used for APO planning
Shipment document types must exist for shipment documents created in APO TP/VS planning. You will create a shipment document type for inbound shipments created in TP/VS and a shipment document type for outbound shipment documents created in TP/VS planning. In addition, you will update the Transportation Planning point interface table for the ERP to APO TP/VS environment.
2-1
An outbound shipment for your group has been created in the system as an example. Display the outbound shipment. Search for the document using the F4 help. Use the External ID 1 field as a search term. External ID 1: GR##-2. (Note: This search is case-sensitive, enter the External Identification EXACTLY as shown.) 2-1-1
Which outbound deliveries does this shipment contain? _____________________________________________________
2-1-2
Find the following information in the shipment document: Shipment type: ________________________________________ Ship-to address: _______________________________________ Shipping point: _________________________________________ Shipment weight: _____________________________________
2-1-3
Display the corresponding document flow. What order initiated this document flow? What is its status? ______________________________________________________
2-1-4
Check whether the shipment costs have already been calculated for this shipment. To do this, check the overall status of shipment cost calculation in the shipment header. Overall status of shipment cost calculation: ________________________________
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-42
Number of the shipment cost document: ________________________________ 2-2
To facilitate creation of inbound shipment documents in the ECC system corresponding to planned inbound shipments in APO TP/VS, create a new shipment type, AI##, using existing Shipment Type 0010 as a template. In the new shipment type you need to make the following settings: Field Name Shipment Type Description No. Range Ext. Adopt Route Determine Legs Pick Check* Weight Unit Volume Unit Copy Routine
Data APO Inbound GR## 02 2-Do Not Adopt stages blank (No legs to be determined) B – No Check regarding full picking KG (Kilograms) M3 (Cubic Meters) 11 (Route/Deadlines)
* This setting is for the class only, it is not required to be set this way for TP/VS. Do not change any other settings. 2-3
To enable creation of outbound shipment documents in the ECC system corresponding to planned outbound shipments in APO TP/VS, create a new shipment type, AO##, using existing Shipment Type 0002 as a template. In the new shipment type you need to make the following settings: Field Name Shipment Type Description No. Range Ext. Adopt Route Determine Legs Pick Check* SplProfBefPlng SplProfAfterPlg Weight Unit Volume Unit
Data APO Outbound GR## 02 2-Do Not Adopt stages blank (No legs to be determined) B – No check regarding picking blank blanl KG (Kilograms) M3 (Cubic Meters)
Planning prof.
blank
Copy Routine
11 (Route/Deadlines)
* This setting is for the class only; it is not required to be set this way for TP/VS. Do not change any other settings.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-43
Exercises Unit: ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Topic: Shipment Costing and TP/VS-related customizing At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Make the customizing settings necessary to assign your APO shipment types to a shipment cost type. • Make the relevant customizing settings necessary to perform shipment costing for shipments planned in APO TP/VS and provide the ability to perform Transportation Service Provider (TSP) selection in TP/VS using freight rates established in the ERP System. • Set up Pricing Procedure determination in Shipment Costing. The ability to perform shipment costing for both inbound and outbound shipments and to provide the ability to influence TSP selection based on actual freight rates are significant benefits of using the ERP Transportation application combined with the APO TP/VS component. As a member of the TP/VS project team you will need make the required customizing settings in the ERP System to facilitate these functions. 3-1
Assign your two new Shipment Types AI## and AO## to Shipment Cost Type 0001 in ECC Customizing. 3-1-1
Set the Shipment Header, Leg, Load Transfer Point and Border Crossing Cost Types as Relevant for shipment costs for each assignment.
3-2
Because you will be using tariff zone codes in your freight rates for shipment costing, you must update the tariff zone determination table to include your new Transportation Planning Point for each of your TSP’s. You have three TSP’s that have rate established for shipment costing and TSP determination in TP/VS: 1058, 1925 and 1930. These TSP’s are also used for shipments created for Transportation Planning Point 1000, so you can "copy as" the existing entries to your Transportation Planning Point AP##. You should also copy all sub-items in the entry.
3-3
Update the shipment costing pricing procedure determination table to reflect your new Transportation Planning Point. Use Transportation Planning Point 1000 as a reference for the “copy as” process.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-44
3-4
Make the required setting in the Purchasing Data determination table for your new Transportation Planning Point, AP##. Use the same purchasing organizational data as Transportation Planning Point 1000.
3-5
To satisfy a requirement for TP/VS Transportation Service Provider Selection when external costs are used as a criteria for selection, make sure an entry exists in the LES Shipping Point Determination table for your plants and their corresponding shipping points. Change the table entries corresponding to your group number (##) to appear as follows: Shipping Condition
© SAP AG
Loading Group
SCM612
Plant
Shipping Point(PrShP)
10##
Z0##
12##
X0##
3-45
Exercises Unit: ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Topic: Stock Transport-related customizing At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Make the required, basic customizing settings required for stock transport processing. When a new plant (s) is/are established in ERP, there are some fundamental settings required to facilitate the processing of stock transports both inter- and intra-company. These settings are independent of TP/VS. You must make these settings before stock transport orders are created in the ERP System.
4-1
To complete the required customizing settings, perform the following steps: 4-1-1
Copy the customer master record (1187) representing Plant 1000, to a new customer master record, T-S090##. You must copy all views (General, Company and Sales Area) to your new customer master.
4-1-2
Copy the customer master record (22000) representing Plant 2200, to a new customer master record, T-S200##. You must copy all views (General, Company and Sales Area) to your new customer master.
4-1-3
Update the vendor master record for vendor T-S100## that represents plant 12## for intercompany stock transport orders. The Plant code for plant 12## must be entered in the Additional Purchasing Data view.
4-1-4
Update the Plant table in Stock Transport customizing with your new customer master for Plant 12##. Also, update the Plant table for Plant 22## with the customer account number you just created for the plant, T-S200##.
4-1-5
Check and make any required assignments in the Assign delivery type/checking table in Stock Transport customizing. The following assignments must exist:
4-1-6
Type: NB SPlt:
12##
UB
10##
DlvTy: NLCC C: B NL
RP
Check and make any required assignments in the Purchasing document type table in the Stock Transport customizing area. The table must include the following combinations of allowed stock transports and corresponding Purchase Order Document Types: 10## to 12## UB No one-step processing 12## to 22## NB No one-step processing
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-46
4-1-7
© SAP AG
Verify and make any necessary changes to the Transportation Relevancy tables. In this step you will make sure that delivery document types NL and NLCC are set as relevant for transportation processing. In addition, you must verify that all relevant item categories for these document types are set as "relevant" for transportation processing. Unless these objects are set as "relevant" for transportation processing you will not get shipment documents created when TP/VS planned shipments are "published".
SCM612
3-47
Exercises Unit: ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Topic: Settings Necessary for Integration At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create the Packaging Materials needed for APO TP/VS planning and integration with the ERP System. When APO TP/VS creates shipment documents and they are subsequently transferred to the ERP System for execution, the Transportation Methods codes from TP/VS are translated into corresponding ERP packaging materials in the shipment document. These packaging materials must exist in the ERP Material Master. 5-1
You can have a handling unit representing the shipment created automatically in the shipments that are published to the ERP system by TP/VS. To facilitate this you must have the packaging materials representing the means of transport created in the ERP material master. You have decided to do this for your implementation of TP/VS. Create three packaging material master records, based on information in the following table: Material Number
Copy from… material
Description
FTL-##
TRUCK-04
FTL Group ##
LTL-##
TRUCK-05
LTL Group ##
SHIP-##
TM-110
SHIP Group ##
These materials should have Material Type of ‘VERP’ and Industry Sector of ‘Mechanical Engineering’. The following views should be created: Basic Data 1, Sales: Sales Org. Data 1, Sales: Sales Org. Data 2, Sales: General/Plant Data and Accounting 1. In the Organizational Data enter only your Plant 12## but "copy from" Plant 1200 of the reference material. All other data fields should remain the same as the reference material.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-48
Solutions Unit: ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Topic: Transportation Planning Point
1-1
1-2
True or false? 1-1-1
True
1-1-2
False A plant can have more than one shipping point.
1-1-3
True
1-1-4
False A transportation planning point is only defined for a particular company code and is not linked to other organizational units.
1-1-5
False A transportation planning point is only defined for a particular company code and is not linked to other organizational units.
Which transportation planning points are defined for company code 1000? _ _________________________________________________________ Choose ERP IMG: Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics Execution → Maintain Transportation Planning Point Note the transportation planning points that have a company code of 1000. 0001, 0007, 1000, 1010, 1011, 1200 Go to the address screen for transportation planning point 1000. In which street is it located? ______________________________________________________ Select Transportation Planning Point 1000. Choose → Goto → Address Note the Street/House number: Altersdorferstr. 13
1-3
Create a new Transportation Planning Point to be used for shipments created from the APO TP/VS component. Identify the Transportation Planning Point as AP##. Assign it to Company Code 1000. Description: TP/VS Group ## Go to ERP IMG: Enterprise Structure → Definition → Logistics Execution → Maintain Transportation Planning Point Select the New Entries button
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-49
Enter the data from the table below TPPt
Description
CoCd
AP##
TP/VS Group ##
1000
Choose Enter
.
Enter the Address data: Name
TP/VS GR ##
Search Term
AP##
Country
DE
Language
Language of the Course
Choose Copy
.
Choose Save Select Exit 1-4
. .
You must create and entry in the Assign Goods Receiving Points for Inbound Deliveries table in Customizing to enable the System to create Inbound Delivery documents from TP/VS planning of purchasing documents. APO TP/VS will be used to plan inbound shipments to your Hamburg plant, 10##. Update the customizing table with the following entry: Plant
St. Loc.
Shipping Point
Sequence Number
10## 0001 Z0## 1 Go to ERP IMG: Logistics Execution → Shipping → Basic Shipping Functions → Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination → Assign Goods Receiving Points for Inbound Deliveries Select the New entries button. Enter the following data: Plant
Stor. Loc.
Shipping Point
Sequence Number
10##
0001
Z0##
1
Choose Save Select Exit
© SAP AG
. .
SCM612
3-50
1-5
When shipment documents are created from the APO TP/VS system, the Transportation Planning Point must be determined for each shipment document. In this step you will update the interface table that is used to determine the Transportation Planning Point. Shipments will be planned for Shipping Point X0## Dresden and Z0## Hamburg. Create the following entries in the 'Determination of Transportation Planning Point’ table. Shipping Point
Shipping Type
TrspPlanPt
X0##
Blank
AP##
X0##
01
AP##
Z0##
Blank
AP##
Z0##
01
AP##
Go to ERP IMG: Logistics Execution → Transportation → Interfaces → Transportation Planning Point Determination Select the New entries button. Make the following entries: Shipping Pt.
Ship. type
X0##
AP##
X0##
01
Z0## 01
Choose Save
© SAP AG
AP## AP##
Z0##
Select Exit
TrspPlanPt
AP##
. .
SCM612
3-51
Solutions Unit: ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Topic: Shipment Document Type
2-1
An outbound shipment for your group has been created in the system as an example. Display the outbound shipment. Search for the document using the F4 help. Use the External ID 1 field as a search term. External ID 1: GR##-2. (Note: This search is case-sensitive, enter the External Identification EXACTLY as shown.) Go to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Logistics Execution → Transportation → Transportation Planning → Display Press F4 key. Enter ‘GR##-2’ in the External ID 1 field. Choose Execute . Select the line with your shipment. 2-1-1 Which outbound deliveries does this shipment contain? _____________________________________________________
2-1-2
Choose the Shipments and deliveries icon On the Shipments and deliveries overview screen: One outbound delivery is involved in this shipment. Record the delivery document number Find the following information in the shipment document: Ship-to address: _____________________________________________ Shipping point: _____________________________________________ Shipment weight: _____________________________________________ Shipment type: _____________________________________________ From the Shipments and Deliveries screen note the Ship-to Address on the line with the delivery document number. From the Shipments and Deliveries screen note the Shipping point on the line with the delivery document number. From the Shipments and Deliveries screen note the Shipment weight from the line with the delivery document number. Choose the Overview of current shipment icon
.
Note the Shipment type under the Processing tab.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-52
2-1-3 Display the corresponding document flow. What order initiated this document flow? What is its status?______________________________________________________ Choose Environment → Document flow Note the StandardOrder number: Document numbers will vary Note the the Status of the order is completed. Choose Back 2-1-4
Check whether the shipment costs have already been calculated for this shipment. To do this, check the overall status of shipment cost calculation in the shipment header. Overall status of shipment cost calculation: ________________________________ Number of the shipment cost document: ________________________________ Select the Shipment cst cal tab Note the Overall status of shipment cost calculation: Completely processed Choose the Shpmnt cost doc button. Note the Shipmt Cost No.
2-2
To facilitate creation of inbound shipment documents in the ECC system corresponding to planned inbound shipments in APO TP/VS, create a new shipment type, AI##, using existing Shipment Type 0010 as a template. In the new shipment type you need to make the following settings: Field Name
Data
Shipment Type Description
APO Inbound GR##
No. Range Ext.
02
Adopt Route
2-Do Not Adopt stages
Determine Legs
blank (No legs to be determined)
Pick Check*
B – No Check regarding full picking
Weight Unit
KG (Kilograms)
Volume Unit
M3 (Cubic Meters)
Copy Routine
11 (Route/Deadlines)
* This setting is for the class only, it is not required to be set this way for TP/VS. Do not change any other settings.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-53
Go to ERP IMG: Logistics Execution → Transportation → Shipments Define Shipment Types Select Shipment Type 0010 Choose Copy As . Overtype the Shipment Type with AI##. Enter the remainder of the settings from the table above. Choose Enter Choose Save 2-3
. .
To enable creation of outbound shipment documents in the ECC system corresponding to planned outbound shipments in APO TP/VS, create a new shipment type, AO##, using existing Shipment Type 0002 as a template. In the new shipment type you need to make the following settings: Field Name Shipment Type Description
Data
No. Range Ext.
02
Adopt Route
2-Do Not Adopt stages
Determine Legs
blank (No legs to be determined)
Pick Check*
B – No check regarding picking
SplProfBefPlng
blank
SplProfAfterPlg
blank
Weight Unit
KG (Kilograms)
Volume Unit
M3 (Cubic Meters)
Planning prof.
blank
Copy Routine
11 (Route/Deadlines)
APO Outbound GR##
* This setting is for the class only, it is not required to be set this way for TP/VS. Do not change any other settings. Go to ERP IMG: Logistics Execution → Transportation → Shipments → Define Shipment Types Select Shipment Type 0002. Choose Copy As . Overtype the Shipment Type with AO## and the remainder of the settings from the table above. Choose Enter Choose Save
© SAP AG
. .
SCM612
3-54
Solutions Unit: ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Topic: Shipment Costing and TP/VS-Related
3-1
Customizing
Assign your two new Shipment Types AI## and AO## to Shipment Cost Type 0001 in ECC Customizing. 3-1-1
Set the Shipment Header, Leg, Load Transfer Point and Border Crossing Cost Types as Relevant for shipment costs for each assignment. Go to ERP IMG: Logistics Execution→ →Transportation→ →Shipment Costs→ →Shipment Cost Document→ → Shipment Cost Relevance and Default for Shipment Cost Type Find your shipment types, AI## and AO## and enter 0001 in the SCTy column. Choose Save
.
Under Dialog Structure, select: Define shipment cost relevance fo shipment type. For your shipment types, select the Header, Leg, Load Transfer Point, and Border Crossing boxes. Choose Save. Choose Exit 3-2
Because you will be using tariff zone codes in your freight rates for shipment costing, you must update the tariff zone determination table to include your new Transportation Planning Point for each of your TSP’s. You have three TSP’s that have rates established for shipment costing and TSP determination in TP/VS: 1058, 1925 and 1930. These TSP’s are also used for shipments created for Transportation Planning Point 1000, so you can "copy as" the existing entries to your Transportation Planning Point AP##. You should also copy all sub-items in the entry. Go to ERP IMG: Logistics Execution → Transportation → Shipment Costs → Basic Functions → Define and Assign Tariff Zones Under the Dialog Structure select the line: Define organizational key for tariff zone assigs Select the records in TPPt 1000 for Service Agents: 1058, 1925 and 1930. Select Copy as
© SAP AG
. SCM612
3-55
Type your Transportation Planning Point, AP##, over the TPPt 1000 and select Enter. When the Specify object to be copied dialogs appear, select Copy all, and continue for the information boxes. Note: You will get the message three times.
3-3
Choose Save
.
Choose Exit
.
Update the shipment costing pricing procedure determination table to reflect your new Transportation Planning Point. Use Transportation Planning Point 1000 as a reference for the “copy as” process. Go to ERP IMG: Logistics Execution → Transportation → Shipment Costs → Pricing → Pricing Control → Define And Assign Pricing Procedures → Define pricing procedure determination for shipment costs You will create the pricing procedure determination data for your Transportation Planning Point by copying the records from Transportation Planning Point 1000 to the clipboard, then “paste-ing” the records in your Transportation Planning Point, Select Transportation Planning Point 1000. Select the → Determine pricing procedure path under the Dialog Structure. After the table is displayed, press Cntl + Y (Mark). The cursor should turn into the “cross-hair” symbol. Place the cross-hair in the upper left-hand corner of the first record, drag the cursor across the first record and then at the end of the first record, at the vertical scroll bar, drag the cursor down the screen to the line below the last determination record (the line with ‘It.Det.Grp’ of 0006). Release the left mouse button and press Cntl + C to copy the block to the clipboard. Select Transportation Planning Point under the Dialog Structure to return to the list of Transportation Planning Points. Select your Transporation Planning Point from this table. Select the → Determine pricing procedure path under the Dialog Structure. Select New Entries. Place the cursor in the It.Det.Grp. field on the first line of the table. Press Cntl + V to copy the clipboard to the records in your Transportation Planning Point. Select Save
.
Choose Exit Choose Cancel © SAP AG
SCM612
3-56
3-4
Make the required setting in the Purchasing Data determination table for your new Transportation Planning Point, AP##. Use the same purchasing organizational data as Transportation Planning Point 1000. Navigate to ERP IMG: Logistics Execution → Transportation → Shipment Costs → Settlement → Assign Purchasing Data Select the line with TPPt 1000 and SCTy 0001 Choose Copy As
.
Enter your TPPt. AP##. Select Enter Select Save Choose Exit 3-5
. . .
To satisfy a requirement for TP/VS Transportation Service Provider Selection when external costs are used as a criteria for selection, make sure an entry exists in the LES Shipping Point Determination table for your plants and their corresponding shipping points. Change the table entries corresponding to your group number (##) to appear as follows: Shipping Condition
Loading Group
Plant
Shipping Point(PrShP)
10##
Z0##
12##
X0##
Navigate to ERP IMG: Logistics Execution → Shipping → Basic Shipping Functions → Shipping Point and Goods Receiving Point Determination → Assign Shipping Points Find your plants in the Shipping Point Determination table that match the entries in the exercise. Change the default shipping point to match your shipping points in the exercise. Choose Enter Choose Save
.
Choose Exit
.
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-57
Solutions Unit: ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Topic: Stock Transport-related customizing
4-1
Perform the following steps to customize the Stock Transport environment: 4-1-1
Copy the customer master record (1187) representing Plant 1000, to a new customer master record, T-S090##. You must copy all views (General, Company and Sales Area) to your new customer master. Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Logistics Execution → Master Data → Partner → Customer → Create → Total Enter the data from the following table in the Customer Create Initial Screen: Customer Account Group
0001 – Sold to Party
Customer
T-S090##
Company Code
1000
Sales Organization
1000
Distribution Channel
12
Division
00
Reference Customer
1187
Refernce Company
1000
Reference Sales Organization
1000
Reference Distribution Channel
12
Reference Division
00
Choose Enter
.
Enter the General Data from the table below:
© SAP AG
Name
Plant 10##
Search term
Plant 10##
Postal code
01069
City
Hamburg
Transportation zone
D000000000
Language
Select the language of the course
SCM612
3-58
Select the Control data tab, and enter the data from the table below: Trading partner
1000
VAT Registration
DE123456789
Choose Enter . Select Company code data button. Select Sales area data button. Select the Shipping tab. Enter the data from the table below: Shipping Condition
Enter the sum of 50 plus your group number ##
Select the Billing tab. Enter the data from the following table: Tax classification Choose Save 4-1-2
0 – non taxable for country DE
.
Choose Cancel . Copy the customer master record (22000) representing Plant 2200, to a new customer master record, T-S200##. You must copy all views (General, Company and Sales Area) to your new customer master. Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Logistics Execution → Master Data → Partner → Customer → Create → Total Enter the data from the following table in the Customer Create Initial Screen.:
© SAP AG
Customer Account Group
0001 – Sold to Party
Customer
T-S200##
Company Code
1000
Sales Organization
1000
Distribution Channel
12
Division
00
Reference Customer
22000
Refernce Company
1000
Reference Sales Organization
1000
Reference Distribution Channel
12
Reference Division
00
SCM612
3-59
Choose Enter
.
Enter the General Data from the table below: Name
Plant 22##
Search term
Plant 22##
Postal code
75015
City
Paris
Region
75
Transportation zone
F000010000
Language
Select the language of the course
Select the Control data tab, and enter the data from the table below: Trading partner
2200
VAT Registration
FR93341612695
Choose Enter
.
Select Company code data button. Select Sales area data button. Select the Shipping tab. Enter the data from the table below: Shipping Condition
Enter the sum of 50 plus your group number ##
Select the Billing tab. Enter the data from the following table: Tax classification Choose Save
.
Choose Cancel 4-1-3
0 – non taxable for country DE
.
Update the vendor master record for vendor T-S100## that represents plant 12## for intercompany stock transport orders. The Plant code for plant 12## must be entered in the Additional Purchasing Data view. Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Logistics Execution → Master Data → Partner →Vendor → Change Enter the following data field from the table below:
© SAP AG
Vendor
T-S100##
Company Code
2200
Purchasing Organization
2200
SCM612
3-60
Select: Purchasing Data Choose Enter
.
Choose Extras → Add. purchasing data Enter 12## in the Plant field Choose Save 4-1-4
.
Update the Plant table in Stock Transport customizing with your new customer master for Plant 10##. Also, update the Plant table for Plant 22## with the customer account number you just created for the plant, T-S200##. ERP IMG: Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Set up Stock Transport Order → Define Shipping Data for Plants Select Plant 10##. Select Details . Enter your customer: T-S090## in the Customer no. – plant field. Choose Save
.
Choose Back . Select Plant 22##. Select Details . Enter your customer: T-S200## in the Customer no. – plant field. Choose Save
.
Choose Exit 4-1-5
back to the Stock Transport Order customizing list.
Check and make any required assignments in the Assign delivery type/checking table in Stock Transport customizing. The following assignments must exist: Ty.
SPl
DlTy.
CRI
NB
12##
NLCC
B
UB
10##
NL
RP
Navigate to ERP IMG: Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Set up Stock Transport Order → Assign Delivery Type and Checking Rule Update the table, if necessary, with the information in the table above. Choose Save Choose Back
© SAP AG
. .
SCM612
3-61
4-1-6
Check and make any required assignments in the Purchasing document type table in the Stock Transport customizing area. The table must include the following combinations of allowed stock transports and corresponding Purchase Order Document Types: SPl
Plnt
Type
One step
10##
12##
UB
Not checked
12##
22##
NB
Not checked
Navigate to ERP IMG: Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Set up Stock Transport Order → Assign Document Type, One-Step procedure, Underdelivery Tolerance Make sure that there are two entries in the table that match the data in the table above. Choose Enter Choose Save
. , if necessary.
Choose Back 4-1-7
Verify and make any necessary changes to the Transportation Relevancy tables. In this step you will make sure that delivery document types NL and NLCC are set as relevant for transportation processing. In addition, you must verify that all relevant item categories for these document types are set as "relevant" for transportation processing. Unless these objects are set as "relevant" for transportation processing you will not get shipment documents created when TP/VS planned shipments are "published". Navigate to ERP IMG: Logistics Execution → Transportation → Shipments → Maintain Transportation Relevance Select Maintain transportation relevance for delivery types. Verify that delivery types: NL and NLCC are "checked" for transportation relevance. Select Back
to the Activity box.
Select Maintain transportation relevance for delivery item types, Verify that Item Categories: ELN, NLC and NLN are "checked" for transportation relevance. Choose Back
to the Activity box.
Select Maintain transportation relevance for routes. Select the Position button. Enter “FR0007”. © SAP AG
SCM612
3-62
Verify that this route is relevant for transportation. If the “Rel. for transport” check box is blank, select the box and then choose Save. Choose Exit
.
Choose Cancel
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-63
Solutions Unit: ERP Organizational Units, Shipments and Integration Topic: Settings Necessary for Integration
5-1
You can have a handling unit representing the shipment created automatically in the shipments that are published to the ERP system by TP/VS. To facilitate this you must have the packaging materials representing the means of transport created in the ERP material master. You have decided to do this for your implementation of TP/VS. Create three packaging material master records, based on information in the following table: Material Number
Copy from… material
Description
FTL-##
TRUCK-04
FTL Group ##
LTL-##
TRUCK-05
LTL Group ##
SHIP-##
TM-110
SHIP Group ##
These materials should have Material Type of ‘VERP’ and Industry Sector of ‘Mechanical Engineering’. The following views should be created: Basic Data 1, Sales: Sales Org. Data 1, Sales: Sales Org. Data 2, Sales: General/Plant Data and Accounting 1. In the Organizational Data enter only your Plant 12## but "copy from" Plant 1200 of the reference material. All other data fields should remain the same as the reference material. Navigate to SAP Menu: Logistics→ → Materials Management → Material Master → Material → Create (Special) → Packagin Enter the following on the Create Packaging (Initial Screen): Material Number
From the table above
Industry Sector
M - Mechanical Enginering
Copy From Material
From the table above
Select Select Views button. Select the following views: Basic Data 1 Sales: Sales Org. Data 1 Sales: Sales Org. Data 2 Sales: General/Plant Data Accounting 1
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-64
Choose Continue Enter the following in the Organizational Levels dialog: Choose Continue
.
On the Basic data 1 screen, enter the Description as indicated in the table. Choose Enter
on all remaining screens.
NOTE: When creating the SHIP-## packaging material: if necessary, in the Sales: General/Plant view, enter ‘KP’ (no ATP Check’ and Loading group ‘0001’. In the Accounting 1 view enter a Moving price of 1.00 Choose Save
on the Accounting 1 screen.
Enter the remaining materials using steps b. thru i. Choose Exit Organizational levels Plant
Copy from 12##
Plant
1200
Sales Organization Distribution Channel
© SAP AG
SCM612
3-65
Contents: SCM TP/VS-related ERP Master Data TP/VS Means of Transport TP/VS Resources Transportation Lanes Hierarchies
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-1
SCM TP/VS Master Data Lesson 1: SCM TP/VS-related ERP Master Data Lesson 2: TP/VS Means of Transport Lesson 3: TP/VS Resources Lesson 4: Transportation Lanes Lesson 5: Hierarchies
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-2
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: Describe the result of the transfer of ERP TP/VS relevant Master Data into SCM Explain the function of the individual Master Data Types in SCM Specify where in the APO System it may be necessary to add to the Master Data transferred from ERP Define TP/VS Means of Transport Define TP/VS Resources Create Transportation Lanes Create Transportation Zone and TSP Hierarchies
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-3
In preparation for transportation planning using the APO TP/VS component, master data must be transferred to the APO system using the CIF. The PC electronics manufacturer must set up one or more integration models to transfer TP/VS relevant master data to APO.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-4
SCM TP/VS Master Data Lesson 1: SCM TP/VS-related ERP Master Data Lesson 2: TP/VS Means of Transport Lesson 3: TP/VS Resources Lesson 4: Transportation Lanes Lesson 5: Hierarchies
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-5
!"
#
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the ERP master data that is required for TP/VS planning. Create an APO Core Interface model to transfer the required data from the ERP system to the SCM APO system.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-6
!"
!$ %
To start the TP/VS planning process the required master data must be present in the SCM APO system. This include product and location master data among others. The implementation team must establish CIF models in the ERP system to transfer this data to the TP/VS environment.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-7
&
'
() *
+
ERP
SCM SCM Master Data
ERP Master Data Plant Shipping Point Customer
Location
CIF (real time or batch)
Vendor Trp.zone
Product
Material Master
SCM Transaction Data
ERP Transaction Data
Planned Sales Orders
Sales Orders Purchase Orders Production Orders
Planned Purchase Orders
CIF (real time)
Planned Production Orders Planned Deliveries
Deliveries
Planned Shipments
Shipments
SAP AG 2008
Batch transfer of master data: The transfer of master data changes can be scheduled periodically as a job. A variant has to be defined (containing the target system and the selection of master data objects) for the RCPTRAN4 report (hidden behind transaction CFP1)
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-8
#
,
ERP
Location type
SCM
1001
Production Plant
1002
Distribution Center
1003
Shipping Point
1007
Storage Location MRP Area
1010
Customer
1005
Transportation zone
1011
Vendor
1020
Transportation Service Provider
Plant Distribution Center Shipping Point Storage Location MRP Area Customer
CIF
Transportation zone Vendor
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-9
-
(
.
Name + application = unique definition of integration model Name
PC
Target sys.
SCMCLNT800
Application
TP01
SCM System
Material master Customers
Vendors
Plants
Work centers
Sales orders
...
Selection of master and transaction data types
Relevant materials
Material Plant MRP type
1000
Selection criteria for the relevant data
...
Execute
+
Save
SAP AG 2008
Recommendation: One integration model per object type. The master data that the system will transfer for the first time (initial transfer), from the ERP System into the SCM System, is defined in an integration model. The ERP System generates this integration model (transaction CFM1). An integration model is uniquely defined by its name and application. It is useful to create several integration models with the same name but as different applications. Ensure that the data pools of your integration models are generally not too big. This enables you to handle errors more easily. The target system that you specify in the integration model determines the SCM System that the master data is transferred into. The target system is a logical (SCM) system that must have a RFC connection. Finally, you use a particular integration model to specify which master data you want the system to transfer. To do so, you first specify the master data types that flow into the integration model. In the second step, you specify the selection criteria to be used for the selection of the individual master data documents in the ERP System. You complete the generation of the integration model by "executing" the model (this means that the data objects of the model are compiled) and then you save it.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-10
#
,
Data transfer from the ERP plant Customizing: Plant
Master data: Location
Plant
1000
Location
1000
Plant Hamburg
Name
Plant Hamburg
Loc.type
1001
Production plant
Street
Alsterstr. 13
Town
22222 Hamburg
General
Address
Street
Alsterstr. 13
Country DE Germany
Town
22222 Hamburg
Region 02
Country DE Germany
Hamburg
Time zone
CET
Language
German
SCM
Region 02
Hamburg
Time zone
CET
Language
German
SAP AG 2008
The system transfers a plant into the APO System as a location with location type 1001 (production plant). The system also copies these basic settings for the plant: Description, address data, time zone and regional assignment.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-11
#
SCM
Master data: Location Location
1000
Loc.type
1001
General
Production plant
Address
TP/VS
...
Street Alsterstr. 13 Town
Plant Hamburg
EN
Plant Hamburg
Short description of the location in several languages
22222 Hamburg
Country DE Germany Region
DE
APO-specific planning parameters
02 Hamburg
Time zone
CET
Language
German
SAP AG 2008
For APO locations, you can maintain the short text in several languages (in contrast with the plant in ERP, for example), so that after logon in a certain language, this language will appear. As a rule, APO locations contain many additional planning parameters that have no equivalents in ERP. You can then maintain these parameters in APO. The system cannot transfer them from the ERP. Enhanced For Transportation Specific Data: •
Address/Postal Code Information
•
Lead-Time for Document Creation (Picking, Shipment Creation)
•
Loading/Unloading Resources for Inbound/Outbound Shipping
•
Location Availability / Dock Hours
•
Transportation Zone Relationship
In order to get distance and time proposals, you should maintain the coordinates of a location. The tab ‘TP/VS’ specifies for each location: •
Tansportation Zone
•
Lead-Time for Document Creation (Picking, Shipment Creation) (For Plants/DC’s)
•
first or last point to be delivered
For capacity restrictions under ‘Resources’ tab, define the resources used for loading and unloading a vehicle, or the opening hours of the resource of this location, or whether no resources are used for loading and unloading. © SAP AG
SCM612
4-12
#
,
Data transfer from ERP distribution center (from Rel. 4.0) Customizing: Plant Plant
2400
Name
DC Milano
Street
Via Castaldi 1
Town
20100 Milano
Country
...
IT Italy
Master data: Location Location 2400
DC Milano
Loc.type 1002
Distribution center
General
SCM
Address
Street
Via Castaldi 1
Town
20100 Milano
Country IT Italy
...
Definition as DC Customizing: DRP Plant Node type Name 1000 2400
Hamburg plant DC
DC Milano
SAP AG 2008
As of Release 4.0, the ERP system can define plants as distribution centers, within the frames of the DRP functionality (DRP: Distribution Resource Planning) in ERP. For this, you use the corresponding entry in the Customizing table (Customizing step Assign Node Type - Maintain Plant in the settings of DRP Customizing). When you transfer plants into APO that are defined in the ERP as distribution centers, the system transfers them to location type 1002 (distribution center). The transfer of the individual ERP plant settings (in ERP, a DC is a plant) takes place in exactly the same way as it does for production plants.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-13
'
.
Shipping points can be used for the planning in TP/VS and Dynamic Route Determination (DRD) instead of plants or DC’s Shipping points are included in integration model and are transferred to SCM as location Shipping points may be used as source location for shipments (controllable in customizing) Selection of orders for planning may be done based on shipping points Transportation lanes need to be maintained for these shipping point
SAP AG 2008
From SCM 5.0 on, shipping points can be used in TP/VS for planning. The decision to work on shipping point or plant/DCs is global. Activate shipping points in the TP/VS global customizing: APO Settings for Vehicle Settings
TP/VS
Basic Settings
Basic
NOTE: Using the BAdIs /SAPAPOZ_VS_INB_PROC and the enhancement spot /SAPAPO/VS_ATP also other partners such as Sold to party can be used as the source location.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-14
#
,
%
Data transfer from the ERP customer
SCM
Master data: Customer
Master data: Location
Customer 1000
Location
1000
Becker Berlin
Name
Loc.type
1010
Customer
Becker Berlin
Street
Calvinstr. 36
Town
13467 Berlin
General
Address
Street
Calvinstr. 36
Country DE Germany
Town
13467 Berlin
Region
Country DE Germany
11
Berlin
Language
German
Time zone
CET
Control data
Transportation zone D10000
Berlin region
Region
11
Language
Berlin German
Master data: Location Location D10000 Loc.type
1005
Berlin region Transport.zone
SAP AG 2008
The system transfers customers from the ERP as locations with type 1010 (Customer). The system creates sales orders in the ERP and transfers them as transaction data into APO. When the system transfers a customer master from the ERP into APO, the actual customer location is transferred, as is the transportation zone that is assigned to a customer in the ERP, as location type 1005 (transportation zone). You then enter the missing data for use with this transportation zone in the APO planning. You also need a transportation relevant hierarchy. You can maintain the hierarchy in two ways: •
Implement it manually in APO by attaching the relevant locations in the APO system to the hierarchy,
•
or you assign the customers in ERP to a transportation zone and transfer the customers to APO: the transportation zones are then created automatically in APO and the corresponding hierarchy entries are created.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-15
%
'
*/+
Temporary location is created in SCM based on one-time address data and is automatically assigned to transportation zone Target location of order is replaced by this temporary location Shipments are planned using temporary location as target Re-usage of existing location with the same address is possible (controllable in customizing) OSTA locations are identified with a special flag Can be reorganized after execution of shipments / orders have finished
SAP AG 2008
The deletion of one-time ship-to locations is included in the reorganization job for locations. This batch job checks for the existence of orders for this location. Only if no orders, e.g. sales orders, deliveries, shipments, exists anymore this location is deleted. Report to delete locations /SAPAPO/DELETE_LOCATIONS. OSTA: Override ship to address (sometimes also called One time Ship to Address.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-16
%
'
*0+
The name of the OSTA locations could come from Concatenation of source system name, document type + document number From a number range From a time stamp + random number Using the address search allows to prevent the creation of locations with addresses, that already exist in the system
SAP AG 2008
These setting are in in the TP/VS basic settings in the SCM IMG: APO Basic Settings for Vehicle Scheduling
© SAP AG
SCM612
TP/VS
Basic Settings
4-17
#
,
Data transfer from the ERP vendor
SCM
Master data: Vendor
Master data: Location
Vendor
L1000
Location
L1000 C.E.B. Berlin
Name
C.E.B. Berlin
Loc.type
1011
Street
Kolpingstr. 1
Town
12001 Berlin
General
Vendor
Address
Street
Kolpingstr. 1
Country DE Germany
Town
12001 Berlin
Region
Country DE Germany
11
Language
Berlin German
Region
11
Language
Berlin German
SAP AG 2008
The system transfers vendors from the ERP as locations with type 1011 (vendor). Note: If the vendor and the customer have the same number in the ERP System (for example, customer and vendor 1000), then you must rename one of them in the APO inbox, using the customer exit for the vendor master. (For example, rename the vendor in V1000). Otherwise, you cannot distinguish between the two locations. The vendor must be known in APO in order for the vendor selection to take place in APO. In the ERP System, you must specify which account groups from the ERP vendor master become the carrier in the APO System. •
To do this, choose the CIFVENTYPE table in the data browser (transaction SE16) and confirm with Enter. You branch to the corresponding selection screen.
•
You can use the input help to choose an account group for the ERP System and a location type for the APO System so that data can be transferred between these two systems.
Account group 0005 (carrier) appears as a fixed value, however, you can define other account groups in ERP Customizing. For the location type on the APO side, the carrier (1020) or supplier (1011) appear.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-18
-
. #
A geocoder determines the geographical coordinates (longitude and latitude, altitude) from a given address In SCM three geocoding-levels possible: 1. Standard (SAP0) (no extra license) 2. Zip-Code (RFCG) comes from PTV (no extra license) 3. Full addresses (IGS) (add. license) These coordinates are used to determine distances between locations The geocoding program supplied by SAP determines the longitude and latitude based on the country and region Codes
SAP AG 2008
PTV (Karlsruhe, Germany) Prerequisites for level 2 and 3: •
Install the geocoding program on a WINDOWS Server
•
Establish an RFC-Connection to the geocoder
See note 433785 for explanation about installing a third party geocoder
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-19
#
-
.
.
Prerequisites for all levels: Register Geo-Coding Program in the System
Assigning Geo-Coding Program to Countries.
Assign Relevant Address Fields for Geo-Coding
To test the geocoder run report GEOCODING_FIRST SAP AG 2008
It is possible to use more than one geo-coding program. It is possible to set up the system for using specific geo-coding programs for specific countries.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-20
#
-
.
-
.
Geocoding Table (SCM IMG)
SCM Location Master Record
SAP AG 2008
Geocoding enables the system to assign longitude and latitude coordinates to the various locations in APO. These coordinates are used to determine estimated distances between locations. The geocoding program supplied by SAP determines the longitude and latitude based on the Country and Region codes. SCM IMG: General Setting Regions
Setup Geocode
Process Geographical Data for Countries and
Included in the APO IMG customizing activities are the steps required to install third-party geocoding programs. Customizing settings allow the geocoding program(s) to be assigned at the Country code level.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-21
Views of the SCM product master Administration
Pkg Data
Demand
Properties
Lot size
Units of measure Classification
SNP2
ERP Material
SNP1
PP/DS
Procurement
ATP
GR/GI
SAP AG 2008
The product master in APO is divided into different views according to topic. The header data (tab pages characteristics, units of measure, classification) is general and valid for more than one location. You can specify the planning of a product in APO, according to the location. Locations can come from plant type or MRP area (according to the ERP storage location MRP areas). Many of the fields for the product are automatically filled when the system transfers a material master from the ERP. To guarantee the consistency of the data in the ERP and APO Systems, only maintain these fields in the ERP System. The system then only changes the data during a transfer (from the ERP) of the master data changes. You can define the length of the APO product master number in APO Customizing (process step: Determine Output Display Of Product Number). As is standard in ERP, an 18 digit product number is used.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-22
)
Transportation Group =
Used to Group Products According to Vehicle Type (Ex - Products Requiring Refrigeration)
Loading Group
The Loading Group is a key that identifies the equipment required to load the goods.
=
SAP AG 2008
The Transportation Group is entered in the General Data section under the ‘Attributes’ tab. The Loading Group is a key that identifies the equipment required to load the goods. For example, a crane or fork lift truck. The Loading Group is entered in the Shipping Section under the ‘GR/GI’ tab.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-23
!"
#
%%
,
You should now be able to: Describe the ERP master data that is required for TP/VS planning. Create an APO Core Interface model to transfer the required data from the ERP system to the SCM APO system.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-24
SCM TP/VS Master Data Lesson 1: SCM TP/VS-related ERP Master Data Lesson 2: TP/VS Means of Transport Lesson 3: TP/VS Resources Lesson 4: Transportation Lanes Lesson 5: Hierarchies
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-25
&
#
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the use of the means of transport master data in TP/VS. Create means of transport master records in TP/VS.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-26
&
!$ %
Generally, in TP/VS planning there are various classes of vehicles used to transport goods that have a common set of physical characteristics that must be taken into account during the planning process. These physical characteristics include the mode of transportation such as air, rail, surface and sea. Also, characteristics such as speed, whether there is a company-owned fleet, temperature controlled, and others must be defined for the optimizer.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-27
& Definition means of transport (MOT): Class of a vehicle Groups similar resources Example for MOT: ship, aircraft, truck15to, truck25to On the MOT level the costs structures and geographical availability is maintained
SAP AG 2008
Example: A MOT represents refrigerated trucks with a specific cost structure and geographic availability. Within this group several vehicle resources exists: •
3 trucks with capacity of 3500 KG
•
2 trucks with capacity of 3600 KG
All trucks does have the same geographical availability and the same cost structure.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-28
&
*/+
Means of transport Basis for a Group of Resources Created in Master Data or IMG
SAP AG 2008
Path: SAP menu -> Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Master data -> Transportation Lane -> Maintain Means of Transport or Path: IMG -> Advanced Planning and Optimization -> Master Data -> Transportation Lane -> Maintain Means of Transport The Means of Transport is an attribute used to classify vehicles that you assign in APO resource master data. You also assign the Means of Transport to the transportation lane. Relevant Settings: •
Average Speed: Indicates the average speed (kph) of a vehicle. TP/VS uses the average speed together with the distance between two locations to calculate the duration of the shipment.
•
Factor: This factor establishes the proportion between the linear distance between two locations and the actual distance covered by the vehicle transporting goods between them. Based on the linear distance, you can use this factor to estimate the actual travel distance for a vehicle between two locations, and together with the average vehicle speed, you can estimate the transportation time.
•
Setup time: The setup time refers to the minimum time spent by a vehicle at a location in between two trips.
•
Work time: The average vehicle working time defines the average amount of time a vehicle is available on a working day.
•
Transportation Mode: Specifies how a product is transported, for example, by road, rail, sea, or air. You use the transportation mode to select the vehicle resources that are to execute the transportation.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-29
&
SAP AG 2008
If you set the flag 'Own means of transport' the following applies to vehicles of the means of transport in the optimization : •
You start at the beginning of the optimization run with the last location
•
On completion of the route planned by the optimizer, you must return to the depot location provided that a depot location is maintained (resource master data).
•
In particular there must be a transport link from the last unloading location back to the depot. Otherwise the optimizer cannot carry out these return journeys, and no transport is generated.
•
The entire vehicle route generated by the optimizer generates a single transport. Example: you want to transport two orders from A to B using one vehicle; every order fills the vehicle. The vehicle is assigned to the depot location A. The optimizer plans a route A-B > AB A. The transport includes the sections A-B A-B. With a third-party means of transport you would get 2 transports, A-B in each case.
In the Means of Transport entry you set the Schedule indicator if the vehicles assigned to the Means of transport are scheduled using the TP/VS Scheduling function.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-30
&
!$
"
SAP AG 2008
External Means of Transport: If you set this indicator, the system assumes that it can take into account as many vehicle resources in planning as you have specified in the Number of External Vehicle Resources field, irrespective of the number of defined vehicle resources. •
Example: As a shipper, you have an unlimited number of vehicles of a certain means of transport. However, you only want to define the settings for the vehicles once.
Number of External Vehicle Resources: Specifies the number of available vehicle resources for this means of transport. During planning, the system assumes that the number of external vehicle resources that you define here is actually available. This is irrespective of the number of individual vehicle resources that you have defined.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-31
&
-(
.
SAP AG 2008
GIS Qlty setting: Set this indicator for a means of transport if you want to make a more precise calculation of durations and distances using the Geographic Information System (GIS) together with the Internet Graphic Server (IGS) within a transportation lane. Low Average Speed: If you are working with the geographic information system (GIS) and the internet graphic server (IGS) to calculate durations and distance and you set the indicator for Distance and Duration Calculation in GIS Quality, you can enter a value for the low speed of the means of transport in this field. •
Example: The GIS tool you are using is able to work with at least three different speeds. In that case, the value in this field would typically be for the average speed in built-up areas.
Medium Average Speed: You set the indicator for Distance and Duration Calculation in IGS Quality, you can enter a value for the medium speed of the means of transport in this field. The system then uses this value when calculating the duration and distance for the relevant means of transport and stage. Example The GIS tool you are using is able to work with at least three different speeds. In that case, the value in this field would typically be for the average speed on ordinary roads. High Average Speed: You set the indicator for Distance and Duration Calculation in IGS Quality, you can enter a value for the high speed of the means of transport in this field. The system then uses this value when calculating the duration and distance for the relevant means of transport and stage. Example The GIS tool you are using is able to work with at least three different speeds. In that case, the value in this field would typically be for the average speed on a highway. © SAP AG
SCM612
4-32
&
-
.
',
Geographically the following data is maintained on MOT level: Where is the MOT available (from where to where) What are the costs for the MOT in this region/connection Which carriers are available for the MOT in this region/connection How should the carrier selection be performed for this MOT in this region/connection
SAP AG 2008
For more details see the slides about transportation lanes following later in this chapter.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-33
& Vehicles belonging to a MOT which has the flag ' Own means of transport’ can have a depot location. Depending on customizing setting the optimizer will make sure the Resource starts start and end at this depot location within one optimization run. For planning: A planned shipment always starts at the depot location On completion of the shipment planned by the optimizer, the vehicle must always return to the depot location
+ SAP AG 2008
A depot location has to be assigned to the resource in the resource master data. In particular there must be a transport link from the last unloading location back to the depot. Otherwise the optimizer can not carry out these return journeys, and no transport is generated. The entire vehicle route generated by the optimizer generates a single transport. Example: you want to transport 2 orders from A to B using one vehicle; every order fills the vehicle. The vehicle is assigned to the depot location A. The optimizer plans a route A-B A-B A. The transport includes the sections A-B A-B. With a third-party means of transport you would get 2 transports, A-B in each case.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-34
&
%
' %
,
ERP Shipment Type
SAP AG 2008
SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Interfaces Determine Shipment Type This customizing activity is used to map the Transportation Method and Inbound /Outbound Shipment to the corresponding Shipment Type in the specified Logical System where the planned shipment documents are to be transferred. The Shipment Types(Vehicle Column) must be defined in the ERP System for the transfer of the shipment to take place. ERP Shipment Type can be found here: ERP IMG: Logistics Execution Transportation
© SAP AG
Shipments
SCM612
Define Shipment Types
4-35
&
1
'
SCM allows to define a Means of Transport Hierarchy Note: The MOT hierarchy is only used in some areas!
Truck Temp. Controlled Truck
Cooled
Chilled
Normal
SAP AG 2008
To define a means of transport hierarchy go to SCM IMG Maintain Means of Transport
APO
TP/VS
Basic Settings
Create a main MOT and then assign this to the sub-MOT in the field “Sup. MTr” Field MOT Hierarchy is used in the following areas: •
Transportation Service Provider Selection: -
Carrier Capacity checks
-
Definition of Business Shares
-
The Hierarchy is NOT used for the selection of potential carriers
•
Means of Transport specific un-/ loading resource
•
Wait Time
•
Maximum Length of Stay
•
MOT-specific cost factors
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-36
&
Transportation Mode
Means of Transport
2
'
"
For example, Air, Truck, Rail, Sea
For example, FTL, LTL, Parcel Service, Barge, Refrigerated,...
For example, Maintenance of capacities, depot locations, and so on, for individual resources
Vehicle / Resources
SAP AG 2008
A means of transport can be assigned to a transportation mode (see maintenance of MOT) but it is not required: Transportation Mode SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings Maintain Transportation Mode The Transportation Mode is a code defined to indicate the actual ‘mode’ of transportation. This code is assigned to the Means of Transport. The Transportation Mode in TP/VS should correspond to the Transportation Mode used in the ERP System (ERP IMG: Logistics Execution Transportation Basic Transportation Functions Routes Define Routes Define Modes of Transport). Means of Transport SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Master Data Transportation Lane Means of Transport The Means of Transport is used to represent a ‘method’ of transportation such as a 48’ truck with full truck load capacity or refrigerated truck. The Means of Transport are assigned to Vehicle Resources in APO master data. In addition, the Means of Transport will be assigned to Transportation Lanes. Vehicle Resources SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization
Master Data
Resource
Vehicle Resources are used to represent a unit of transportation and its capacity and planning parameters. A Vehicle Resource is independent of a particular carrier. © SAP AG
SCM612
4-37
&
#
%%
,
You should now be able to: Describe the use of the means of transport master data in TP/VS. Create means of transport master records in TP/VS.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-38
SCM TP/VS Master Data Lesson 1: SCM TP/VS-related ERP Master Data Lesson 2: TP/VS Means of Transport Lesson 3: TP/VS Resources Lesson 4: Transportation Lanes Lesson 5: Hierarchies
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-39
"
#
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand the purpose and use of TP/VS resources. Create and use TP/VS resource master data in the planning process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-40
"
!$ %
It is important for the project team to understand the use of TP/VS resources as constraints in the planning process. The number of vehicles and capacities of each vehicle available to be assigned to the transportation demands is central to the optimization process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-41
"
&
Resources are objects which transport or handles goods. Must be created in SCM Cannot be transferred from ERP via CIF Specify the available capacity Specify the hours on which they can be operated Are assigned to a MOT Can be linked to a schedule Can have up to 8 different dimensions Can contain shifts
SAP AG 2008
Path: SAP menu
APO
Master Data
Resource
A resource always represents a specific vehicle, for example: •
Double-axis truck with maximal number of pallets 20, 12 tons weight capacity, 37 m3.
•
Unloading forklift with a capacity of 100 tons per hour.
In TP/VS you can plan with schedule vehicles, in other words, vehicle resources with a schedule. To do this, you must set the Schedule indicator for the means of transport that you want to assign to the vehicle resource. You can then assign this vehicle resource to a schedule.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-42
"
Transport resource
Calendar resource for Opening times
Vehicle resource
Single- or multi-resource for Loading/Unloading resources
SAP AG 2008
Transportation planning relevant resources are the four shown above. TP/VS uses vehicle resources, calendar resources and single – or multi-resources. Transport resources are only used by the SCM application Supply Network Planning (SNP) which is used for rough-cut planning. Vehicle resources are used to transport orders or freight units. Vehicle resources are used by TP/VS. A vehicle resource can be defined for each trailer, rail car, barge, ship, etc. that is available for a unit load during TP/VS planning. Each Vehicle resource represents a single fixed capacity of transportation. Calendar resources are used to model when a plant is available for loading/unloading. They are assigned to a location. Single- or Multi-resources are used to model loading and unloading resources (inbound/outbound). They are assigned to a location. Possible loading/unloading resources: •
Forklift
•
A plant with a certain number of docks
•
Workers
Shipments can also be created without resource, if created manually or with the dynamic route determination. TP/VS resources must be created manually.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-43
"
'
"
Vehicle resource Represents one vehicle that can transport goods Assigned to one MOT (group of resources)
SAP AG 2008
Vehicle Resource (TP/VS) •
Individual or Single Capacity (by weight/volume)
•
A full load equals the maximum capacity of the resource
The vehicle resource is a multidimensional resource. It can have 8 dimensions in maximum. The available capacity of this resource type cannot be maintained on a time-dependent basis. If you do need to maintain limited availability, you can do so by means of shift sequences.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-44
"
.
"
Single or multi-resources: capacity for loading/unloading
SAP AG 2008
A single resource allows one parallel loading / unloading activities while a multi resource models several loading / unloading activities. A single resource upon which only one activity can be executed at a time has a dimension-free capacity of one. For single resources the capacity value is fixed in the system. A single resource can only have two different situations: Either it is loaded with an activity or it is not loaded at all. Multi resources are used to map resources on which several activities can be carried out at a time. The maximum number of activities that can be scheduled at the same time depends on the organizational or technical conditions for the resource. A Handling Resource (Resource Type H) is an example of a single- or multi-resource that is used in TP/VS. Loading and unloading equipment such as fork-lifts are examples of this type of resource. Capacities in the form of available working hours including downtimes are specified for the handling resource. TP/VS supports single / single mixed / multi / multi mixed resources
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-45
"
" Calendar resource for the opening times at a location
SAP AG 2008
A calendar resource specifies only the opening hours of a location. It has no capacity restrictions.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-46
"
' Using Schedules Fixed, periodically recurring departure times can be defined Data is used in planning and is taken into account by the optimizer Steps: Define the MOT as a scheduled one Define an itinerary choose MOT Locations and sequence of locations
Define validity period for the schedule Define the schedule connection Assign itinerary Assign validity Assign vehicle Define Departure day and time or a periodical departure time SAP AG 2008
The means of transport has to be flagged to be a scheduled one. This can be done in Customizing: SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling Basic Settings Maintain Means of Transport An itinerary has to be defined. The means of transport that will be used to transport the product has to be chosen and then the locations and the sequence in which they should be visited have to be defined. The validity period has to be selected, (the period for which the schedule is valid). The period has to be restricted to particular valid days by assigning it to a calendar. The actual schedule connection has to be defined. The previously defined data (itinerary, validity) has to be assigned to the schedule and then assigned a vehicle has to be assigned to it. The exact data of the schedule connection has to be defined, that is, a departure day and a departure time or a periodical departure time. The departure times relate to the start location of the selected itinerary.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-47
&
&
.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-48
"
#
%%
,
You should now be able to: Understand the purpose and use of TP/VS resources. Create and use TP/VS resource master data in the planning process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-49
SCM TP/VS Master Data Lesson 1: SCM TP/VS-related ERP Master Data Lesson 2: TP/VS Means of Transport Lesson 3: TP/VS Resources Lesson 4: Transportation Lanes Lesson 5: Hierarchies
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-50
#
#
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand the importance and role that transportation lane master data plays in the TP/VS planning process. Create transportation lanes that describe to TP/VS the direction and permissible transportation paths that can be used to transport materials in inbound and outbound transportation scenarios.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-51
#
!$ %
When the TP/VS system is called upon to create shipments that call for goods to be moved from a source location to a destination location it must be aware of the permissible transportation paths that are available. This is the central role of the transportation lane master data.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-52
# Represents a direct route between two locations in order to transport products from one location to another Transportation Lanes are typically maintained on Transportation Zone level Defined by: Start and destination locations Direction Available MOT TSP per MOT Maintenance: Individual Mass maintenance
SAP AG 2008
Maintenance: •
Individual: transaction /SAPAPO/SCC_TL5
•
Mass: transaction /SAPAPO/SCC_TL2
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-53
#
!$ %
Transportation Lanes Distr.Center
Customer
Plant
Supplier
Transportation Zone
SAP AG 2008
A transportation lane represents a direct route between two locations that can be used to source and transport products between them. Each lane is defined by its start and destination locations, depending on the direction of and its assigned products to be transported along the lane. Each lane is also assigned available means of transport. Transportation lanes can be maintained individually or in groups. Mass maintenance of transportation lanes facilitate the generation and maintenance of large quantities of transportation supply chain data. The supply chain network is represented by the locations and their connected transportation lanes. Considered part of SCM master data, transportation lanes usually remain unchanged over an extended period of time.
•
The following SCM components make use of transportation lanes:
•
Supply Network Planning
•
- Production Planning
•
- TP/VS
The supply chain network is represented by the locations and their connected transportation lanes. Considered part of SCM master data, transportation lanes usually remain unchanged over an extended period of time. A transportation lane can be maintained between •
Two locations
•
A location and a transportation zone
•
Two transportation zones
•
A transportation zone itself
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-54
#
"
Information Assigned to a Lane: Start and Destination location Means of Transport Validity Distance / Duration Costs TSP-selection settings TSP TSP location Transportation costs Share of business Priority Continuous Move
SAP AG 2008
The information in the ‘Product-Specific Transportation Lane’ section are not used in TP/VS. Details of the Means of Transport: •
Choose the ‘Det. Planning’.
•
If you want to use SNP, check ‘Aggr. Planning’.
•
Discrete transportation method is used in SNP.
•
The system proposes time and distance of transportation based on the coordinates of the locations.
•
You can maintain real data and set the flag for 'Fixed Transport Duration' and 'Fixed Transport Distance'.
A transportation service provider can be assigned in a lane by selecting the icon: ‘Assignment of Transportation Service Provider'. Beforehand, the Transportation Service Provider has to be defined as a location (location type 1020). To do this, an additional tab 'Carrier' is available.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-55
Without GIS
Runtime Lane Calculated Distance 104 Runtime Lane Geo Distance 80
Maintained Master Lane Distance: 130 Master Lane Geo Distance: 100 Runtime Geo Distance 80 X Distance Factor* 1.300 = Runtime Calculated Distance 104 Distance / Average Speed Per Unit = Duration
With GIS By connecting the GIS to the IGS, distance and duration time can be calculated for each means of transport within a transportation lane using exact road details SAP AG 2008
TP/VS will compute the runtime lanes during optimization. Corresponding transportation lanes will be generated between all locations assigned to the transportation zones. In the process, the cost information is taken from the transportation lanes maintained. The distance/duration is calculated according to the settings or taken from the transportation lane maintained. The maintained distance in the Master Lane includes a factor for road/street map variability. The Factor is obtained from the “Means of Transport” table. This factor establishes the proportion between the linear distance between two locations and the actual distance covered by the vehicle transporting goods between them. Included in the “Maintain Transport Method” table is the Average Speed of the transport method. The Runtime distance is divided by the average speed to calculate the estimated Duration. NOTE: If an external Geographical Information System is used to calculate the distances, these distances are stored in a separate Table (/SAPAPO/TRDIDUPS) and is NOT calculated at runtime.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-56
.
-
&-(
Displays the GIS quality of the calculated proposals. 0 = Aerial distance 1000 = Manually maintained Any other entries represent specific GIS providers Determines distance and duration according to the GIS mode as specified in the means of transport. Duration is determined according to the velocities maintained for the means of transport.
100 = e.g. PTV 110 = e.g. ESRI
SAP AG 2008
Transaction: /SAPAPO/SCC_TL5
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-57
-
&-(
Distances and durations are calculated in a job using the GIS server They are stored in table /SAPAPO/TRDIDUPS If a location is added or modified this transaction needs to be executed again to update the GIS information
SAP AG 2008
Transaction /SAPAPO/TR_IGS_BPSEL This transaction obtains distance and duration information for the specified scope (lanes and means of transport) from the connected GIS server and stores the results in table SAPAPO/TRDIDUPS. When runtime lanes are created later on during an optimization run, the distance and duration are obtained from this table. Note: The job cannot be terminated without losing the data. Once the job is started all old records are deleted, if the job is started with this setting.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-58
#
#
%%
,
You should now be able to: Understand the importance and role that transportation lane master data plays in the TP/VS planning process. Create transportation lanes that describe to TP/VS the direction and permissible transportation paths that can be used to transport materials in inbound and outbound transportation scenarios.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-59
SCM TP/VS Master Data Lesson 1: SCM TP/VS-related ERP Master Data Lesson 2: TP/VS Means of Transport Lesson 3: TP/VS Resources Lesson 4: Transportation Lanes Lesson 5: Hierarchies
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-60
1
'
#
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Outline and describe the use of hierarchy structures in TP/VS to represent transportation zones into which shipments can be made and the role that hierarchies play in describing to the TP/VS system the use of multi-modal transportation. Create hierarchy structures in TP/VS customizing. Create entries in the hierarchy structures to represent transportation zones. Create entries in a hierarchy structure (TSP hierarchy) that represent valid legs of a transportation scenario in which different modes of transportation can be used.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-61
1
'
!$ %
To reduce the number of transportation lanes required in transportation planning it is possible to define “zones” in which shipments are delivered. In most cases these transportation zones represent the “real world” transportation environment in which a group of customers are physically close such that the TP/VS system can consider building consolidated shipments. In transportation planning it is also necessary in many cases to use multiple modes of transportation (truck, rail, ocean, etc.) in moving goods from a source to a destination location. The use of hierarchy structures is required to provide this capability by TP/VS.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-62
1
'
Types of hierarchies used in TP/VS: Transportation zone hierarchy: Used to model transportation zones Locations e.g. customers/plants/DC’s are assigned to transportation zones The usage of transportation zones reduces the number of transportation lanes that need to be processed Are created automatically via CIF for plants, customers and vendors if the transportation zone is maintained in the plant, customer or vendor address
Transshipment hierarchy / TSP Hierarchy Used to create multimodal shipments Has to be defined manually in SCM Hubs are defined and locations are assigned to them
SAP AG 2008
Transportation zone hierarchies: Used to group ship-from and ship-to locations to reduce the number of transportation lanes Transshipment hierarchies: Used to maintain the locations in which a vehicle can be changed. For example a truck might drive to a harbor, the truck is unloaded and the goods are loaded on the ship. The shipment has then two modes (Truck and Ship) -> Multimodal shipments.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-63
3
1
'
Outbound
Transportation Zone Hierarchies
Replenishment
Inbound
Master Transportation Lanes Runtime Lane
SAP AG 2008
You need a transportation zone hierarchy to model transportation zones. In the transportation zone hierarchy, you assign several locations, for example customers, to a transportation zone. Using transportation zones has the advantage that you can reduce the number of transportation lanes that need to be processed. For each transportation zone, you have to create the following two transportation lanes: •
A transportation lane between the start location and the transportation zone (reference transportation lane)
•
A transportation lane for transportation zone to itself, that is, you enter the same transportation zone as both the start and destination location (intra-zone lane) The optimizer creates all of the other transportation lanes during the optimization run (runtime lanes):
•
All of the transportation lanes between the start location and every customer within the transportation zone (based on the reference transportation lane)
•
All of the transportation lanes between the individual customers within the transportation zone (based on the inter-zone lane)
You can maintain the transportation zone hierarchy in two ways Implement it manually in SCM by attaching the relevant locations in the SCM system to the hierarchy (transportation zones as 'level 1 node, customers as subordinated level 2 node), •
Or you assign the customers in ERP to a transportation zone and transfer the customers to SCM: the transportation zones are then created automatically in SCM and the corresponding hierarchy entries are created.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-64
, '
. 1
'
SAP AG 2008
The optimizer creates all of the other transportation lanes during the optimization run (runtime lanes): •
All of the transportation lanes between the start location and every customer within the transportation zone (based on the reference transportation lane)
•
All of the transportation lanes between the individual customers within the transportation zone (based on the inter-zone lane)
The costs that the optimizer takes into account depend on the settings you make in the cost profile. If you enter in the cost profile that the system should use the costs defined for the transportation lane, the optimizer takes into account the costs defined for the reference transportation lane or inter-zone lane. The optimizer also calculates the actual distance and duration of runtime generated transportation lanes on the basis of the values that you define for the reference transportation lane or inter-zone lane. Reference transportation lane: The calculation is either based on the "actual distance to aerial distance" defined for the means of transport (the factor), or the manually defined distance and duration. Inter-zone lane: The calculation is based on the "actual distance to aerial distance" factor for the means of transport.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-65
' %
Plant
1
', */+
DC Transportation Zone
Plant
Structure of a hierarchy with one unloading point
SAP AG 2008
Transshipment hierarchies are used to map interlinked shipments in which one or more orders are transferred from on vehicle to another on the way from the source location to the target location. The used vehicles can be assigned to different means of transport, for example transfer from a truck to a ship. These shipments are described as multimodal shipments. In this scenario, the DC represents a load transfer/consolidation point or cross-docking location. Example: •
Several orders are transported from a plant by vessel to a DC and then they are distributed to several customers by using trucks and to another plant by train.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-66
' %
1
', *0+
DC1
DC2
Plant
Customer
Structure of a hierarchy with two unloading points
SAP AG 2008
In this example, a customer shipment is made using multiple modes of transportation: Rail, Vessel and Truck. The DC’s represent load transfer points such as rail yards and ports. Between a plant/DC and a customer (Outbound shipments) or Vendor and Plant/DC (Inbound shipments) there cannot be more than two stock transfer points. If unloading points are used, there can be one alternative direct lane between a plant/DC and customer for outbound shipments or vendor and plant/DC for inbound shipments. Which lane is chosen depends on the maintained costs per transportation lane. Note: Parallel / Alternative Transshipment locations can be used with limitation. Please contact the development to check the feasibility. •
More than 2 transshipment locations within one transportation chain are not supported by TP/VS in SCM 5.0.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-67
3
' %
1
',
SAP AG 2008
To create Hierarchies for TP/VS the following steps are necessary: Create a Hierarchy Structure in Customizing: SCM Structure
Master Data
Hierarchy
Define Hierarchy
Use the Hierarchy Type “Extended Hierarchy”. This will allow you to assign the same location on the same hierarchy level multiple times. Assign the Hierarchy Structure to the TP/VS Application in Customizing: SCM Settings Maintain Transportation-Relevant Hierarchy
TP/VS
Basic
Create a hierarchy with the created Hierarchy Structure. This is part of Master Data in SCM Assign the hierarchy to the active model
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-68
1
. %
Location TP-CUST5 is assigned to 2500 ... and 2505.
SAP AG 2008
Use this feature to maintain more options in terms of assigning customers and plants to hubs and ports. Note: You may assign a location to 2 hubs in master data maintenance. But for optimization, the assignment must be restricted to 1:1 by defining proper incompatibilities. (See example). Note: Hierarchy Type must be ‘Extended Hierarchy’.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-69
1
'
#
%%
,
You should now be able to: Outline and describe the use of hierarchy structures in TP/VS to represent transportation zones into which shipments can be made and the role that hierarchies play in describing to the TP/VS system the use of multi-modal transportation. Create hierarchy structures in TP/VS customizing. Create entries in the hierarchy structures to represent transportation zones. Create entries in a hierarchy structure (TSP hierarchy) that represent valid legs of a transportation scenario in which different modes of transportation can be used.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-70
%%
,
You should now be able to: Describe the result of the transfer of ERP TP/VS relevant Master Data into SCM Explain the function of the individual Master Data Types in SCM Specify where in the APO System it may be necessary to add to the Master Data transferred from ERP Define TP/VS Means of Transport Define TP/VS Resources Create Transportation Lanes Create Transportation Zone and TSP Hierarchies
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-71
Exercises Unit: APO TP/VS master Data Topic: Master Data Integration Model At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create, generate and activate an ERP Integration Model to transfer, via the CIF, the master data needed in the TP/VS component of the APO system. • Check the master data transfer settings in ERP • Create transportation lanes in APO Master data. • Display APO master data Before setting up the optimization and planning environment in TP/VS the pertinent master and organizational data must exist in APO. Most of this master data will come from the ERP (OLTP) System. Relevant Customer, Vendor/Carrier and Material master data must be transferred and maintained via the CIF. In addition, organizational data such as Plants and Transportation Planning Points must be transferred also. It is your job as a member of the TP/VS implementation team to set up the integration model to perform this initial transfer and any subsequent transfer that will be required. 1-1
Create, generate and activate an integration model, GR##, in ERP to transfer the following master and organizational data to the target APO system: Material masters Plants Customers Vendors Transportation Planning Point 1-1-1
© SAP AG
Create the integration model: GR##. Use MD as your Application code. Restrict your master data selection to that data that belongs to your group number. Use the following table as a basis for creating your model: Select the Plants Selection Box in the Material Dependent Objects section
SCM612
4-72
Master Data Object
Data to Select
Material master records
T-ATC1-## T-ATD2-## T-ATD3-## T-S11A##
Customer master records
T-S22A## T-S33A## T-S44A## T-S11B## T-S11C## T-S090## T-S200## T-S100##
Vendor Master records
T-S11F## T-S11H## TPPt: AP##, TAPO
Shipments*
*Note: You must select Shipments to get your Transportation Planning Points transferred to APO. Restrict Selection of Material Master records to the following plants: 10##, 12##, 13##, 22##, 25##,30##, 35##,38## Save the settings as a variant: GR##-MD
1-2
1-1-2
Generate the model.
1-1-3
Activate the model.
In the APO system, using the master data displays, verify that the following master data was transferred: Location Master Data: T-S11A## : What is the Transportation Zone: _______________________________ T-S11C##: What is the Transportation Zone: _______________________________ T-S11F##:
What is the Transportation Zone:
_______________________________ Product Master Data: © SAP AG
SCM612
4-73
T-ATC1-##: What is the Transportation Group? _________ What is the Gross Wgt?: _________________ What is the Volume?: ___________________ T-ATD2-##: What is the Transportation Group? _________ What is the Gross Wgt?: _________________ What is the Volume?: ___________________
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-74
Exercises Unit: APO TP/VS Master Data Topic: Means of Transport At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create Means of Transport entries in TP/VS.
Before TP/VS can be used for planning, various customizing settings must be completed to create the entries that relate the speed and working time availability of a given Means of Transport and the Transportation Lanes where they are used.
2-1 You will need several Means of Transport to represent your various transportation scenarios. Create the new means of transports that you will use in your TP/VS environment from the table below: MOT
Description
Avg Factor Speed
Work Time
Transp Mode
Ext Mtr
ExtVehRes
FTL##
FTL – Gr. ##
80
1.000
24:00
FTL
blank
blank
LTL##
LTL – Gr. ##
60
1.000
24:00
LTL
blank
blank
TRK##
TRK – Gr. ##
60
1.000
24:00
LTL
Select
5
RAIL## RAIL – Gr. ##
50
1.000
24:00
blank
Select
5
SHIP##
40
1.000
24:00
SHIP
Select
5
© SAP AG
SHIP – Gr. ##
SCM612
4-75
Exercises Unit: APO TP/VS Master Data Topic: Transportation Lane Creation At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create and maintain transportation lanes individually and using the mass maintenance function. • Assign transportation Means of Transport to transportation lanes. The transportation lane represents the path that transportation shipments follow to move merchandise between a source (plant/DC, Vendor) and a target location (customer, plant/DC). Associated with the transportation lanes are the Means of Transport. A critical step in establishing the necessary master data for TP/VS planning is creation of the transportation lanes. In the diagram below is the supply chain model you will set up in the SCM612 exercises to use in performing VS Optimization.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-76
3-1
Now that you have your locations defined in APO master data, you will establish the transportation lanes between your plants/DC’s and your customers, vendors and other plants/DC’s. In this exercise we will not create all of the transportation lanes. You will create some additional lanes later in the course to model additional scenarios 3-1-1
Create a pair of transportation lanes between plants 10## and 12##. These lanes can be used in STO processes to transfer stock berween the plants and in a multi-stop shipping scenario where some of the goods from a customer order can be shipped from one plant and the remainder can be picked up from the other plant. Use the planning costs below when assigning the MOT’s to the lanes.
Means of Transport
Means of Transport Cost
FTL##
0.800 per KM
LTL##
1.000 per KM
The transportation lane between plants 10## and 12## will serve as a model in using the mass creation of transportation lanes between plant 12## and several customers. 3-1-2
Create a transportation lane between the STO vendor T-S100## that represents the Dresden plant in intercompany stock transfers and the Paris plant 22##. The Paris subsidiary of your company doesn’t have a large warehouse so they depend on stock transfers from the Dresden plant, so you need to establish a transportation lane to facilitate the transportation planning for these transfers. Assign the means of transports, FTL## and LTL##, to the transportation lane.
3-1-3
You must also set up the transportation lanes to facilitate a multimode transportation scenario between your Dallas plant, 35##, in the U.S. and customers in Europe. The merchandise will be transported by rail from Dallas to the Port of New York, represented by your New York plant 30##. From the port of New York the goods will travel by ship to the Port of Rotterdam represented in your model by DC 25##. From the Port of Rotterdam the goods will travel by truck to their final destination.
3-1-4
In your TP/VS implementation you also want to model a pool distribution scenario when you move goods from your Dresden plant 12## to customers in transportation zones DE-D000070000 and DE-D000060000. To do this you must create a transportation lane from your Dresden Plant, 12##, to transportation lane DE-D000070000. The transportation lane from transportation zone DE-D000070000 to DE-D000060000 has already been created in the system.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-77
3-1-5
Create the transportation lanes between the source Dresden plant 12## and customers in the table below using the mass creation of transportation lanes. Customer T-S11A## T-S22A## T-S33A## T-S11C##
3-1-6
© SAP AG
Using the mass creation of transportation lanes, create the transportation lanes between the source vendors: T-S11F## and T-S11H## and your Hamburg receiving plant 10##. You should use the transportation lane from 10## to 12## as the model for the new lanes. You should copy the means of transports in the model lane to the new lanes.
SCM612
4-78
Exercises Unit: APO TP/VS Master Data Topic: Vehicle Resources At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Navigate to the Transportation Mode and Group customizing tables in the APO IMG • Create Vehicle Resources in APO Master data and assign them to your supply chain network using the Supply Chain Engineer Before TP/VS can be used for planning, various customizing settings must be completed to create the relationship between the various modes of transportation that will be used to transport shipments, the means of transport that relate the speed and working time availability of a given type of vehicle and the capacity constraints of individual vehicle resources. 4-1
Review the settings in the Transportation Mode table in APO Customizing. 4-1-1
List the Transportation Modes that exist in the table: ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-79
4-2
Create five Vehicle Resources with the following characteristics: Resources: G##-FTRK01 G##-FTRK02 G##-FTRK03 G##-FTRK04 G##-FTRK05 Location: (The resources will be valid for all locations) Planner: leave blank Resource Category: T The following values are to be entered for each of these resources:
4-3
Location
Leave blank
Means of Tr(ansport)
FTL##
Time Zone
CET
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Factory Calendar
W8
Start:
00:00:00
End:
23:59:00
Capacity
18000
Unit(ofMeasure)
KG
Finite Scheduling
Select
Short Description
Full Truck Load
Additional Dimension:
Volume
Capacity
150
Unit(of measure)
M3
Create five Vehicle Resources: G##-LTRK01, G##-LTRK02 G##-LTRK03 G##-LTRK04 G##-LTRK05 with the following characteristics: Resource: G##-LTRK01 Location: (This resource will be valid for all locations) Planner: leave blank Resource Category: T
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-80
The following values are to be entered for each resource:
4-4
Location
Leave blank
Means of transport
LTL##
Time Zone
CET
Factory Calendar
W8
Start:
00:00:00
End:
23:59:00
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Capacity
9000
Unit(ofMeasure)
KG
Finite Scheduling
Select
Short Description
Less Than Truck Load
Additional Dimension:
Volume
Capacity
75
Unit(of measure)
M3
Create one vehicle resource for each of the means of transports that will be used in the multi-modal transportation scenario. Because the means of transport are set up as “external’ with a maximum of five resources each, you only have to create one resource per means of transport. The tables below lists the resources to be created: 4-4-1
Create a Vehicle Resource: G##-RAIL01 with the following characteristics: Resource: Location: Planner: Resource Category:
G##-RAIL01 (This resource will be valid for all locations) leave blank T
The following values are to be entered for each resource:
© SAP AG
Location
Leave blank
Means of transport
RAIL##
Time Zone
CET
Factory Calendar
W8
Start:
00:00:00
End:
23:59:00
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Capacity
54000
Unit(ofMeasure)
KG
Finite Scheduling
Select
Short Description
Railcar
SCM612
4-81
4-4-2
Create a Vehicle Resource: G##-SHIP01 with the following characteristics: Resource: G##-SHIP01 Location: (This resource will be valid for all locations) Planner: leave blank Resource Category: T The following values are to be entered for each resource:
4-4-3
Location
Leave blank
Means of transport
SHIP##
Time Zone
CET
Factory Calendar
W8
Start:
00:00:00
End:
23:59:00
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Capacity
108000
Unit(ofMeasure)
KG
Finite Scheduling
Select
Short Description
Ship
Create a Vehicle Resource: G##-TRK01 with the following characteristics: Resource: G##-TRK01 Location: (This resource will be valid for all locations) Planner: leave blank Resource Category: T The following values are to be entered for each resource:
© SAP AG
Location
Leave blank
Means of transport
TRK##
Time Zone
CET
Factory Calendar
W8
Start:
00:00:00
End:
23:59:00
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Capacity
18000
Unit(ofMeasure)
KG
Finite Scheduling
Select
Short Description
Truck
Additional Dimension:
Volume
Capacity
150
Unit(of measure)
M3 SCM612
4-82
Exercises Unit: APO TP/VS Master Data Topic: TSP Hierarchies At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a TSP Hierarchy Structure that will be used in multimodal transportation planning. To be able to perform multi-modal transportation planning in which each leg of a transportation shipment has a different physical mode of transportation, a TSP hierarchy must be established. This hierarchy structure indicates the relationships of the source and destination locations in the multi-modal scenario. 5-1
5-2
Create the TSP hierarchy to enable your Dallas plant 35## to ship goods to a customer in Germany via rail, sea and surface trucking. In this scenario the products are transported by rail from the Dallas plant (35##) to the Port of New York (30##). From the Port of New York the goods move by ship to the Port of Rotterdam (25##). The products are offloaded at the Port of Rotterdam and are shipped by truck to the customer (T-S44A##). A transportation hierarchy structure, TSP_HIER, has previously been created in the system for setting up TSP hierarchical relationships. Update the TSP_HIER structure with your plants and the customer to be used to test the mult-modal scenario. Node
Relationship
30##
Root
25##
Root
35##
Child to 30##
T-S44A##
Child to 25##
Review the customizing setting that assigns the TSP hierarchy structure to the VS Optimizer.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-83
Solutions Unit: APO TP/VS Master Data Topic: Master Data Integration Model
1-1
Create, generate and activate an integration model, GR##, in ERP to transfer the following master and organizational data to the target APO system: Material masters Plants Customers Vendors Transportation Planning Point 1-1-1
Create the integration model: GR##. Use MD as your Application code. Restrict your master data selection to that data that belongs to your group number. Use the following table as a basis for creating your model: Select the Plants Selection Box in the Material Dependent Objects section Master Data Object
Data to Select
Material master records
T-ATC1-## T-ATD2-## T-ATD3-##
Customer master records
T-S11A## T-S22A## T-S33A## T-S44A## T-S11B## T-S11C## T-S090## T-S200##
Vendor Master records
T-S100## T-S11F## T-S11H##
Shipments*
TPPt: AP##, TAPO
*Note: You must select Shipments to get your Transportation Planning Points transferred to APO. Restrict Selection of Material Master records to the following plants: 10##, 12##, 13##, 22##, 25##,30##, 35##,38## Save the settings as a variant: GR##-MD © SAP AG
SCM612
4-84
a
Navigate to ECC SAP Menu: Logistics → Central Functions → Supply Chain Planning Interface → Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer → Integration Model → Create
b
Enter the following from the table:
c
Model Name
GR##
Logical System
Your APO logical system
APO Application
MD
In the sections Material Dependent Objects and Material Independent Objects areas, set the following by selecting the corresponding checkboxes: Materials Plants Customers Vendors Shipments
d In the General Selection Options for Materials selection box, enter your material numbers by first selecting the Multiple selection Material line.
button on the
Then, in the Single vals tab enter your material numbers. e
Choose Copy
f
In the Plants line, choose Multiple selection the table below in the Single vals tab.
g
.
10##
Hamburg Plant
12##
Dresden Plant
13##
Frankfurt Hub
22##
Paris Plant
25##
Rotterdam DC/Port
30##
New York Plant/Port
35##
Dallas DC
38##
Denver DC
Choose Copy
.
h Select the Special Restrictions
© SAP AG
and enter the plants from
icon beside the Customers selection box.
i
Select the Multiple Selection icon and enter your Customer numbers from the table above in the Customers section that opens up using the same method as that used in Material Master selection.
j
Choose Copy
. SCM612
4-85
k
Select the Special Restrictions
l
Select the Multiple Selection
icon beside the Vendors selection box. icon.
m Enter your Vendor numbers in the Vendors section that opens up using the same method as that used for Customer Master selection. n Select Copy
.
o Select the Special Restrictions p Select the Multiple Selection
icon beside the Shipments selection box. icon in the Shipments box.
q Enter your Transportation Planning Points, AP## and TAPO, in the Shipments section that opens up. r
Choose Copy
.
Before the model is generated, you will now create a Variant of the model. This variant is necessary if you want to run the model in a background process later. s
Choose Save
t
In the ABAP Variant screen, enter your variant name: GR##-MD and a description of your own choosing.
u Choose Save 1-1-2
1-1-3
© SAP AG
.
Generate the model. a
Choose Execute . The system will display a screen with the number of objects found for each type of master data. You can drill down on each object by clicking on the number of records found display.
b
Select the Generate IM button. You will get a message dialog that informs you that the model has been generated.
c
Select Continue
d
Select Exit
e
Select Exit
.
Activate the Model. a
Navigate to ECC SAP Menu: Logistics → Central Functions → Supply Chain Planning Interface → Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer → Integration Model → Activate
b
Enter your Model, Logical System and APO Application code if not present in the fields.
c
Choose Execute
d
Select the line in the left column with the ‘MD’.
e
Place your cursor on the line with the Date, Time and User-id.
.
SCM612
4-86
f
Select the Active/Inactive
button.
A green check mark should appear next to the line indicating that the model has been made active. g Select the Start system.
button to do the actual transfer of data to the APO
After the transfer has been activated, you will get a message confirming the transfer.
1-2
h
Choose Continue
i
Select Exit
j
Select Exit
In the APO system, using the master data displays, verify that the following master data was transferred: Location Master Data: T-S11A## : What is the Transportation Zone? _______________________________ T-S11C##: What is the Transportation Zone? _______________________________ T-S11F##:
What is the Transportation Zone?
_______________________________ a
Navigate to SCM SAP MENU: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Location → Location
b Enter the Location Number from the question above in the Location field. c
Select the Display button.
d For the Transportation Zone code, Select the TP/VS tab. e
Repeat steps b. thru d. for the remaining Location questions.
f
Select Exit
.
g
Select Exit
.
Product Master Data: T-ATC1-##: What is the Transportation Group? _________ What is the Gross Wgt?: _________________ What is the Volume?: ___________________ T-ATD2-##: What is the Transportation Group? _________ © SAP AG
SCM612
4-87
What is the Gross Wgt?: _________________ What is the Volume?: ___________________ a Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Product → Product b Enter the Material Number in the Product field . c In the View box set the Global Data radio button. d Select the Display button. e Answer the questions above from the data in the Properties tab. .
f Choose Back
g Repeat steps b. thru f. for the remaining Product. h Choose Exit
© SAP AG
.
SCM612
4-88
Solutions Unit: APO TP/VS Master Data Topic: Means of Transport At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create Means of Transport entries in TP/VS.
Before TP/VS can be used for planning, various customizing settings must be completed to create the entries that relate the speed and working time availability of a given Means of Transport and the Transportation Lanes where they are used.
2-1
You will need several Means of Transport to represent your various transportation scenarios. Create the new means of transports that you will use in your TP/VS environment from the table below:
MOT
Description
Avg Speed
Factor
Work Time
Transp Mode
Ext Mtr
ExtVehRes
FTL##
FTL – Gr. ##
80
1.000
24:00
FTL
blank
blank
LTL##
LTL – Gr. ##
60
1.000
24:00
LTL
blank
blank
TRK##
TRK – Gr. ##
60
1.000
24:00
LTL
Select
5
RAIL## RAIL – Gr. ##
50
1.000
24:00
blank
Select
5
SHIP##
40
1.000
24:00
SHIP
Select
5
SHIP – Gr. ##
a Navigate to SCM SAP menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Transportation Lane → Maintain Means of Transport b Create the first Means of Transport by selecting the "New Entries" button c Enter the MOT from the table above in the MTr field. d Enter the Description from the table above in the Description field.. e Enter the Average Speed from the table above in the Average Speed field. f
Enter the Factor from the table above in the Factor field.
g Enter the Work Time from the table above in the Work Time field. h Enter the Transp. Mode from the table above in the Transport..(ation Mode) field. © SAP AG
SCM612
4-89
i
Select the Ext Mtr indicator if indicated in the table above.
j
Enter the Ext VehRes from the table above, if present.
k Repeat steps c. thru j. for all MOT’s in the table above. l
Choose Enter
. Disregard the messages about the “SAP namespace…”.
m Choose Save
.
n Choose Exit
.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-90
Solutions Unit: APO TP/VS Master Data Topic: Transportation Lane Creation
3-1
Now that you have your locations defined in APO master data, you will establish the transportation lanes between your plants/DC’s and your customers, vendors and other plants/DC’s. In this exercise we will not create all of the transportation lanes. You will create some additional lanes later in the course to model additional scenarios 3-1-1
Create a pair of transportation lanes between plants 10## and 12##. These lanes can be used in STO processes to transfer stock between the plants and in a multi-stop shipping scenario where some of the goods from a customer order can be shipped from one plant and the remainder can be picked up from the other plant. Use the planning costs below when assigning the MOT’s to the lanes.
Means of Transport
Means of Transport Cost
FTL##
0.800 per KM
LTL##
1.000 per KM
The transportation lane between plants 10## and 12## will serve as a model in using the mass creation of transportation lanes between plant 12## and several customers. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data→ Transportation Lane → Transportation Lane
b Enter the following:
c
Model Name
000
Start Location
10##
Dest. Location
12##
Select the
d Select the e
button. button.
In the General Data dialog screen that appears on the right side of the screen, enter the following: Gr. ##
Description
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-91
f
Select Copy and close
.
g
In the Means of Transport section, select Creation of a new entry
h
Enter the following in the Means of Transport screen on the right side:
.
Validity: Means of Trans.
FTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .800
Mns of Trsp.Costs i
Choose Generate Proposal
j
Select Copy
.
.
k Enter the second Means of Transport from the table below: Validity: Means of Trans.
LTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: 1.000
Mns of Trsp.Costs l
Choose Generate Proposal
m Select Copy and Close n Choose Save
.
.
.
o Choose Exit
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-92
Create a transportation lane between the STO vendor T-S100## that represents the Dresden plant in intercompany stock transfers and the Paris plant 22##. The Paris subsidiary of your company doesn’t have a large warehouse so they depend on stock transfers from the Dresden plant, so you need to establish a transportation lane to facilitate the transportation planning for these transfers. Assign the means of transports, FTL## and LTL##, to the transportation lane.
3-1-2
a
Enter the following: Model Name
000
Start Location
T-S100##
Dest. Location
22##
b
Select the
c
Select the
button. button.
d In the General Data dialog screen that appears on the right side of the screen, enter the following: Gr. ##
Description e
Select Copy and close
f
In the Means of Transport section, select Creation of a new entry
. .
g Enter the following in the Means of Transport screen on the right side: Validity: Means of Trans.
FTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .800
Mns of Trsp.Costs
© SAP AG
h
Choose Generate Proposal
i
Select Copy
.
.
SCM612
4-93
j
Enter the second Means of Transport from the table below: Validity: Means of Trans.
LTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: 1.000
Mns of Trsp.Costs k
Choose Generate Proposal
l
Select Copy and Close
m Choose Save
.
.
.
n Choose Exit 3-1-3
You must also set up the transportation lanes to facilitate a multimode transportation scenario between your Dallas plant, 35##, in the U.S. and customers in Europe. The merchandise will be transported by rail from Dallas to the Port of New York, represented by your New York plant 30##. From the port of New York the goods will travel by ship to the Port of Rotterdam represented in your model by DC 25##. From the Port of Rotterdam the goods will travel by truck to their final destination. a
Create a transportation lane from the Dallas plant 35## to the Port of New York 30## using the data from the table below. Enter the following: Model Name
000
Start Location
35##
Dest. Location
30##
b
Select the
c
Select the
button. button.
d In the General Data dialog screen that appears on the right side of the screen, enter the following: Gr. ##
Description
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-94
e f
Select Copy and close
.
In the Means of Transport section, select Creation of a new entry
.
g Enter the following in the Means of Transport screen on the right side: Validity: Means of Trans.
RAIL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .600
Mns of Trsp.Costs h
Choose Generate Proposal
i
Select Copy and Close
j
Choose Save
.
.
.
k Choose Exit Create the transportation lane from the Port of New York to the Port of Rotterdam. a
Create a transportation lane from the Port of New York 30## to the Port of Rotterdam 25## using the data from the table below. Enter the following: Model Name
000
Start Location
30##
Dest. Location
25##
b
Select the
c
Select the
button. button.
d In the General Data dialog screen that appears on the right side of the screen, enter the following: Gr. ##
Description e. Select Copy and close f © SAP AG
.
In the Means of Transport section, select Creation of a new entry SCM612
. 4-95
g
Enter the following in the Means of Transport screen on the right side: Validity: Means of Trans.
SHIP##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .650
Mns of Trsp.Costs h
Choose Generate Proposal
i
Select Copy and Close
j
Choose Save
.
.
.
k Choose Exit Now, create the transportation lane from the Port of Rotterdam to the customer T-S44A##. a
Create a transportation lane from the Port of Rotterdam, 25##, to the Customer, T-S44A## using the data from the table below. Enter the following: Model Name
000
Start Location
25##
Dest. Location
T-S44A##
b
Select the
c
Select the
button. button.
d In the General Data dialog screen that appears on the right side of the screen, enter the following: Gr. ##
Description
© SAP AG
.
e
Select Copy and close
f
In the Means of Transport section, select Creation of a new entry
SCM612
.
4-96
g
Enter the following in the Means of Transport screen on the right side: Validity: Means of Trans.
TRK##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .750
Mns of Trsp.Costs h
Choose Generate Proposal
i
Select Copy and Close
j
Choose Save
.
.
.
k Choose Exit 3-1-4
In your TP/VS implementation you also want to model a pool distribution scenario when you move goods from your Dresden plant 12## to customers in transportation zones DE-D000070000 and DE-D000060000. To do this you must create a transportation lane from your Dresden Plant, 12##, to transportation lane DE-D000070000. The transportation lane from transportation zone DE-D000070000 to DE-D000060000 has already been created in the system. a
Create a transportation lane from the Dresden plant, 12##, to the transportation zone, DE-D000070000 using the data from the table below. Enter the following: Model Name
000
Start Location
12##
Dest. Location
DE-D000070000
b
Select the
c
Select the
button. button.
d In the General Data dialog screen that appears on the right side of the screen, enter the following: Gr. ##
Description
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-97
e
Select Copy and close
.
f
In the Means of Transport section, select Creation of a new entry
.
g Enter the following in the Means of Transport screen on the right side: Validity: Means of Trans.
FTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .250
Mns of Trsp.Costs
3-1-5
h
Choose Generate Proposal
i
Select Copy and Close
j
Choose Save
.
k Choose Exit
.
l
.
Choose Exit
.
.
Create the transportation lanes between the source Dresden plant 12## and customers in the table below using the mass creation of transportation lanes. Customer T-S11A## T-S22A## T-S33A## T-S11C##
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-98
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Transportation Lane → Mass Creation of Transportation Lanes
b
On the Mass Creation of Transportation Lanes with Reference screen enter the following from the table: Copy From Model Name
000
Start Location
10##
Destination Location
12##
Creation of Transportation Lanes Between…..
c
Model Name
000
Start Location
12##
In the Destination Location line, choose Multiple Selection
.
d Enter the customers from the table below in the Select Single Values column: Customer T-S11A## T-S22A## T-S33A## T-S11C## e
Select Copy
.
f
Choose Execute
to create the lanes.
g You should get a message that 4 transportation lanes will be created. Respond by choosing Yes. h Four transportation lanes are created.
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-99
3-1-6
Using the mass creation of transportation lanes, create the transportation lanes between the source vendors: T-S11F## and T-S11H## and your Hamburg receiving plant 10##. You should use the transportation lane from 10## to 12## as the model for the new lanes. You should copy the means of transports in the model lane to the new lanes. a
On the Mass Creation of Transportation Lanes with Reference screen enter the following from the table: Copy From Model Name
000
Start Location
10##
Destination Location
12##
Creation of Transportation Lanes Between Locations 000
Model Name b
In the Start Location line in the Creation of Transportation Lanes Between Locations box, choose Multiple Selection
c
.
Enter the vendors from the table below in the Select Single Values column: Vendor T-S11F## T-S11H##
d
Choose Copy
.
e
In the Destination Location line in the Creation of Transportation Lanes Between Locations box, choose Multiple Selection
© SAP AG
.
f
Choose Delete all
. to delete the previous customer locations.
g
Choose Copy
h
Enter Plant 10## in the Destination Location.
i
Choose Execute
j
You should get a message that 2 transportation lanes will be created. Respond by choosing Yes.
k
Two transportation lanes are created.
l
Choose Exit
. to create the lanes.
.
SCM612
4-100
Solutions Unit: APO TP/VS Master Data Topic: Vehicle Resources
4-1
Review the settings in the Transportation Mode table in APO Customizing. 4-1-1 List some of the Transportation Modes that exist in the table: ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________ ______________________
4-2
a
Navigate to SCM IMG: → Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) → Basic Settings → Maintain Transportation Mode
b
List the transportation modes shown in the table.
Create five Vehicle Resources with the following characteristics: Resources:
a
© SAP AG
G##-FTRK01 G##-FTRK02 G##-FTRK03 G##-FTRK04 G##-FTRK05
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Resource → Resource
SCM612
4-101
b On the Resources screen in the Resources Selectn section enter the fields below:
c
Resource
G##-FTRK01
Location
Leave blank
Planner
Leave blank
Resource
T
Planning Version
000
Choose the Create Resources
button.
d In the Create Resources Header Data screen, select the Vehicle e
f
tab
Enter the data on the line as indicated in the table below. REMAIN ON THE Create Resources Header screen. Location
Leave blank
Means of Tr(ansport)
FTL##
Time Zone
CET
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Factory Calendar
W8
Start:
00:00:00
End:
23:59:00
Capacity
18000
Unit(ofMeasure)
KG
Finite Scheduling
Select
Short Description
Full Truck Load
Select the Time-Contin. Capacity
tab.
g Enter the following data: Additional Dimension:
Volume
Capacity
150
Unit(of measure)
M3
h Choose Save
. REMAIN ON THE SCREEN.
Create four additional Vehicle Resources using the Copy function: a
Select the Resource line with G##-FTRK01.
b Select Copy Resources c © SAP AG
.
In the Copy Resources dialog pop-up, in the Copy Mode field, select B - Make Multiple Copies of Resources SCM612
4-102
d Enter 2 in the Start Number field.
4-3
e
Enter 4 in the Number of Resources field.
f
Change the New Resource Entry field by removing the last digit of the resource. It should look like G##-FTRK0 after the change.
g
Select Copy Object
h
Choose Save
i
Choose Back
at the bottom of the Copy Resources dialog box.
. .
Create five Vehicle Resources with the following characteristics: Resources:
G##-LTRK01 G##-LTRK02 G##-LTRK03 G##-LTRK04 G##-LTRK05
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Resource → Resource
b
On the Resources screen in the Resources Selectn section enter the fields below: Resource
G##-LTRK01
Location
Leave blank
Planner
Leave blank
Resource
T
Planning Version
000
c
Choose the Create Resources
d
In the Create Resources Header Data screen, select the Vehicle
© SAP AG
button.
SCM612
tab
4-103
e
Enter the data on the line as indicated in the table below. REMAIN ON THE Create Resources Header screen. Location
Leave blank
Means of Tr(ansport)
LTL##
Time Zone
CET
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Factory Calendar
W8
Start:
00:00:00
End:
23:59:00
Capacity
9000
Unit(ofMeasure)
KG
Finite Scheduling
Select
Short Description
Less Than Truck Load
f
Select the Time-Contin. Capacity
g
Enter the following data:
h
tab.
Additional Dimension:
Volume
Capacity
75
Unit(of measure)
M3
Choose Save
. REMAIN ON THE SCREEN.
Create four additional Vehicle Resources using the Copy function: a
Select the Resource line with G##-LTRK01.
b
Select Copy Resources
c
In the Copy Resources dialog pop-up, in the Copy Mode field, select ‘B - Make Multiple Copies of Resources’
d
Enter 2 in the Start Number field.
e
Enter 4 in the Number of Resources field.
f
Change the New Resource Entry field by removing the last digit of the resource. It should look like G##-LTRK0 after the change.
g
Select Copy Object
h
Choose Save
i
Choose Back
© SAP AG
.
at the bottom of the Copy Resources dialog box.
. .
SCM612
4-104
4-4
Create one vehicle resource for each of the means of transports that will be used in the multi-modal transportation scenario. Because the means of transport are set up as “external’ with a maximum of five resources each, you only have to create one resource per means of transport. The tables below lists the resources to be created: 4-4-1
Create a Vehicle Resource: G##-RAIL01 with the following characteristics: a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Resource → Resource
b
On the Resources screen in the Resources Selectn section enter the fields below:
c
Resource
G##-RAIL01
Location
Leave blank
Planner
Leave blank
Resource
T
Planning Version
000
Choose the Create Resources
button.
d In the Create Resources Header Data screen, select the Vehicle tab e
f
Enter the data on the line as indicated in the table below. REMAIN ON THE Create Resources Header screen. Location
Leave blank
Means of Tr(ansport)
RAIL##
Time Zone
CET
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Factory Calendar
W8
Start:
00:00:00
End:
23:59:00
Capacity
54000
Unit(ofMeasure)
KG
Finite Scheduling
Select
Short Description
Railcar
Choose Save
g Select Back
© SAP AG
. .
SCM612
4-105
4-4-2
Create a Vehicle Resource: G##-SHIP01 with the following characteristics: a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Resource → Resource
b On the Resources screen in the Resources Selectn section enter the fields below:
c
Resource
G##-SHIP01
Location
Leave blank
Planner
Leave blank
Resource
T
Planning Version
000
Choose the Create Resources
button.
d In the Create Resources Header Data screen, select the Vehicle tab e
f
Enter the data on the line as indicated in the table below. REMAIN ON THE Create Resources Header screen. Location
Leave blank
Means of Tr(ansport)
SHIP##
Time Zone
CET
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Factory Calendar
W8
Start:
00:00:00
End:
23:59:00
Capacity
108000
Unit(ofMeasure)
KG
Finite Scheduling
Select
Short Description
Ship
Choose Save
g Select Back 4-4-3
.
Create a Vehicle Resource: G##-TRK01 with the following characteristics: a
© SAP AG
.
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Resource → Resource
SCM612
4-106
b On the Resources screen in the Resources Selectn section enter the fields below:
c
Resource
G##-TRK01
Location
Leave blank
Planner
Leave blank
Resource
T
Planning Version
000
Choose the Create Resources
button.
d In the Create Resources Header Data screen, select the Vehicle tab e Enter the data on the line as indicated in the table below. REMAIN ON THE Create Resources Header screen.
© SAP AG
Location
Leave blank
Means of Tr(ansport)
TRK##
Time Zone
CET
Continuous Dimension
Mass
Factory Calendar
W8
Start:
00:00:00
End:
23:59:00
Capacity
18000
Unit(ofMeasure)
KG
Finite Scheduling
Select
Short Description
Truck
f
Choose Save
.
g
Select Back
.
h
Choose Exit
.
SCM612
4-107
Solutions Unit: APO TP/VS Master Data Topic: TSP Hierarchies At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a TSP Hierarchy Structure that will be used in multimodal transportation planning. To be able to perform multi-modal transportation planning in which each leg of a transportation shipment has a different physical mode of transportation, a TSP hierarchy must be established. This hierarchy structure indicates the relationships of the source and destination locations in the multi-modal scenario. 5-1
Create the TSP hierarchy to enable your Dallas plant 35## to ship goods to a customer in Germany via rail, sea and surface trucking. In this scenario the products are transported by rail from the Dallas plant (35##) to the Port of New York (30##). From the Port of New York the goods move by ship to the Port of Rotterdam (25##). The products are offloaded at the Port of Rotterdam and are shipped by truck to the customer (T-S44A##). A transportation hierarchy structure, TSP_HIER, has previously been created in the system for setting up TSP hierarchical relationships. Update the TSP_HIER structure with your plants and the customer to be used to test the mult-modal scenario. Node
Relationship
30##
Root
25##
Root
35##
Child to 30##
T-S44A##
Child to 25##
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu Advanced Planning and Optimization Data Hierarchy Maintain Hierarchy
Master
b Enter the following: Hierarchy Name
TSP_HIER
c
Select Enter
d
Select Change
e
In the hierarchy display on the bottom portion of the screen, select the top line with the TSP_HIER node.
f
Choose the Add Objects
© SAP AG
. .
button. SCM612
4-108
g In the Select Work Area dialog that appears, enter your “Root” nodes, 30## and 25##. h
Choose Adopt
.
i
Select your plant 30## root node in the hierarchy display at the bottom of the screen by double-clicking. The node will appear in the Hierarchy Fast Entry area at the top of the screen.
j
Enter your plant 35## in the Location field in the Hierarchy Fast Entry area. Choose Enter .
k
Select Transfer
l
Select your DC 25## root node in the hierarchy display at the bottom of the screen by double-clicking. The node will appear in the Hierarchy Fast Entry area at the top of the screen.
.
m Enter your customer T-S44A## in the Location field in the Hierarchy Fast Entry area. Choose Enter .
5-2
n
Select Transfer
.
o
Choose Save
.
p
Choose Exit
.
q
Choose Exit
.
Review the customizing setting that assigns the TSP hierarchy structure to the VS Optimizer. a
Navigate to SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings Maintain Transportation-Relevant Hierarchy
b
See the TSP_HIER structure assigned to the Vehicle Scheduling application and the Transship.Hr.Str.
c
Choose Exit
© SAP AG
.
SCM612
4-109
© SAP AG
SCM612
4-110
Contents: Maintaining Models via the Supply Chain Engineer
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
5-1
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: Maintain Models via the Supply Chain Engineer
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
5-2
The PC electronics manufacturer can create multiple models for transportation planning and each can have multiple versions.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
5-3
! Header
Graphical Network Display
Planning objects
SAP AG 2008
Use: The Supply Chain Engineer screen provides an overview of your model. Here you perform the following tasks: •
Supply chain model maintenance
•
Transportation lane maintenance
•
Launching of queries
•
Viewing quota arrangements (Not relevant for TP/VS)
Structure: The layout of the SCE screen is as follows: •
The upper section is a graphical representation of your current model.
•
The mid-section has a number of pushbuttons that you can use to select objects for the work area.
•
The lower section is a tree structure containing all the objects in the work area.
You maintain the supply chain network in the Supply Chain Engineer (SCE), by placing locations on the map and create a network by adding transportation lanes. The lane direction shows the direction of the product transportation flow. The SCE enables you to look at the data that belongs to particular elements in your supply chain. In addition, it allows you to maintain the model objects simultaneously. You can make queries about information via individual or combined elements in your supply chain. For example, you can query a list of all the products belonging to a specific location in your model. At the same time, you can add products to this location or make changes in the location master. © SAP AG
SCM612
5-4
" SCE Menu Toolbar
Object Selection
SAP AG 2008
Header: The SCE menu toolbar contains the following function icons:· •
Toggle between display and change mode·
•
Go to model/version management
•
Display a list of all objects in the model·
•
Reset display to previous view
•
Access user settings maintenance
Object Selection: •
Tree structure with a number of pushbuttons for locations, products, resources, PPMs, and transportation lanes. Context menus on nodes and links (use right-hand mouse button) allow you to: -
Add or delete objects
-
Launch queries
-
Display and change master data
-
Display supply chain data
© SAP AG
SCM612
5-5
#
Graphical Display Toolbar
Graphical Network Display
SAP AG 2008
Graphical Network Display: • The graphical display toolbar contains the following function icons: - Adjust to objects: This focuses on all the displayed objects - Reduce size/Increase size: Shows the model in detail or overview - Enlarge to world view: Positions the model on a global scale - Switch on overview: This opens a small window showing the model's global position - Display shifts: This opens a dialog box for map maintenance. You can use maps other than those provided with the standard application. First, save the map files locally, then activate the Add function button in the map maintenance screen to add map layers. In this screen you can also customize the fill and line colors on the map as well as the width of the lines - Filter: This allows you to filter objects displayed on the map - Choose: This allows you to select a location on the map - Highlight: You can highlight the inbound and outbound lanes of a location by selecting the location and activating this icon - Move: You can move a location that you have first selected - Connect: You use this to connect (create transportation lanes between) locations (select location first, choose connect, draw line to other location, lane maintenance screen appears) - Change representation of connection: You use this to change the way that transportation lanes are displayedPrint/Save: You choose this to print and save the view © SAP AG
Use the context menus on nodes and links (click once with right mouse button) as described in object selection above. SCM612
5-6
Locations
Vendor
Plant
DC
Customer Transportation zone
MRP area
Shipping point
Carrier
Transportation lanes
SAP AG 2008
As well as locations and transportation lanes, the supply chain model also allows you to keep track of other supply chain elements. These include products, PPMs (production process models), and resources. During supply chain modeling, you may have to assign or delete large numbers of objects in your model. Many of these objects can have dependent objects assigned to them. To guarantee consistency within the model, you can automatically assign or delete the dependent objects, together with the primary object. Automatic assignment guarantees not only consistency but also enables easier model maintenance.
© SAP AG
SCM612
5-7
$
%& Access to frequently used objects Used for queries Serve as filters Configured for users
SAP AG 2008
If you have a lot of master data, viewing it in the network map in the Supply Chain Engineer can become very confusing. To limit your view to only the master data you want to concentrate on, you can define work areas. The work area is used exclusively as a filter for displaying objects in the Engineer. You can maintain different work areas. This enables you to obtain manageable amounts of data. In the work area of the Supply Chain Engineer, you can select: •
Locations (plant, distribution center, vendor, customer)
•
Products
•
Resources
•
Production
•
Transportation Lanes
© SAP AG
SCM612
5-8
''
You are now able to: Maintain Models via the Supply Chain Engineer
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
5-9
© SAP AG
SCM612
5-10
Exercises Unit: Supply Chain Engineer Topic: Supply Chain Engineer At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a model of a supply chain network. • Use the Supply Chain Engineer to view and maintain a network. After creating the APO Master data consisting of Locations (plants/DC's, vendors and customers), Products, Resources and Transportation Lanes a network work area can be created using the Supply Chain Engineer. This network can be used to limit the amount of data that is viewed for a given supply chain scenario. A Work Area can be created for each network scenario. You will create work areas representing your domestic supply chain network, your international multi-modal network and the network related to your pool distibution. 1-1
Create a new Work Area, GR##, for Model 000 for your domestic supply chain network. 1-1-1
Add the following Plants to your work area: 10##
Hamburg Plant
12##
Dresden Plant
22##
Paris Plant
1-1-2
Using the Connect Icon on the network map, create a transportation lane between plant 12## and plant 22##. Assign the Means of Transports, FTL## and LTL##, to the transportation lane.
1-1-3
Add your customers locations to the work area:
© SAP AG
T-S11A##
CompuMax GmbH
T-S22A##
PILAR am Neckar
T-S33A##
DELA Handelsgesellschaft mbH
T-S11B##
PC-World Stuttgart KG
T-S11C##
Riedel Computer OHG
SCM612
5-11
1-1-4
1-1-5
2-1
Add your vendors to the work area: T-S11F##
Sunny Electronics GmbH
T-S11H##
PAQ Deutschland GmbH
T-S100##
Intercompany Vendor for Plant 22##
Add your products to the work area: T-ATC1##
Sunny Sunny 01
T-ATD2-##
Maxitec R 3200 Personal computer
T-ATD3-##
Diskette Drive, 3.5", HD
1-1-6
Add your resources to the work area.
1-1-7
Display the list of transportation lanes for the model.
Create a new Work Area, MM##, for Model 000 to display your multi-modal supply chain network. 2-1-1
Add the following Plant to your work area: 30##
2-1-2
2-1-3
New York
Add the following Distribution Centers (DC) to your work area: 35##
Dallas
25##
Rotterdam
Add your customer location to the work area: T-S44A##
2-1-4
© SAP AG
Hannover International
Add your products to the work area: T-ATC1##
Sunny Sunny 01
T-ATD2-##
Maxitec R 3200 Personal computer
T-ATD3-##
Diskette Drive, 3.5", HD SCM612
5-12
2-1-5
Add your the resources (G##-RAIL01, G##-SHIP01, G##-TRK01) to the model and your work area. Save the work area. Back out of the SCE display.
3-1
Create a new Work Area, PD##, for Model 000 to display your pool distribution supply chain network. 3-1-1
Add the following Plants to your work area:
12## 3-1-2
Dresden
Add the following DC to your work area: 13##
3-1-3
Frankfurt Consolidation Hub
Add the following customers to your work area: T-S11B## T-S11A## T-S22A## T-S33A##
3-1-4
Add the following Transportation Zones to your work area: DE-D000070000 DE-D000060000 Save the work area. Exit from the SCE.
© SAP AG
SCM612
5-13
Solutions Unit: Supply Chain Engineer Topic: Supply Chain Engineer
1-1
Create a new Work Area, GR##, for Model 000 for your domestic supply chain network. 1-1-1
Add the following Plants to your work area: 10##
Hamburg Plant
12##
Dresden Plant
22##
Paris Plant
a Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Supply Chain Engineer → Maintain Model b Enter the following: Model
000
Work Area
GR##
c Choose Change Model
.
d In the column labeled Object Type/Object Name, Right-click on the word Plant next to the plant icon. e Select Add objects to work area. The Select Work Area dialog box will appear. f
Enter the plants from the table below in the Internal char. value fields of the Select Object dialog. 10##
Hamburg plant
12##
Dresden plant
22##
Paris plant
g Choose Adopt . The plant icons representing your plants will appear on the map and will be listed. © SAP AG
SCM612
5-14
h 1-1-2
Select the Adjust to Objects icon . This will cause the map display to center on the objects added to the Work Area.
Using the Connect Icon on the network map, create a transportation lane between plant 12## and plant 22##. Assign the Means of Transports, FTL## and LTL##, to the transportation lane. a Select the Connect
icon located in the toolbar above the map.
b Put your cursor on the plant 12## icon and Drag & Drop a transportation lane to plant 22##. When the left mouse button is released, the system will display the transportation lane create screen. c Select the Header Data button. When the header data General data box appears, enter Group ## in the Description field. d Select Copy and close
.
e In the Means of Transport section, select Creation of a new entry f
.
Enter the following in the Means of Transport screen on the right side: Validity: Means of Trans.
FTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .800
Mns of Trsp.Costs
g
Choose Generate Proposal
h Select Copy
© SAP AG
.
.
SCM612
5-15
i
Enter the second Means of Transport from the table below: Validity: Means of Trans.
LTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: 1.000
Mns of Trsp.Costs
j
Choose Generate Proposal
k Select Copy and Close l
Select Back
.
.
m Select the Choose 1-1-3
.
icon to restore the cursor from “connect” mode.
Add your customers locations to the work area: a Right-click Customers/Ship-To Parties next to the Customers/Ship-To Parties icon. b Select Add objects to work area. The Select Work Area dialog box will appear. c Enter the customers from the table below in the Internal char. value fields of the Select Object dialog. T-S11A##
CompuMax GmbH
T-S22A##
PILAR am Neckar
T-S33A##
DELA Handelsgesellschaft mbH
T-S11B##
PC-World Stuttgart KG
T-S11C##
Riedel Computer OHG
d Choose Adopt . The customer icons representing your customers will appear on the map and will be listed. © SAP AG
SCM612
5-16
1-1-4
Add the Vendors to your GR## Work Area: Right-click on Vendors next to the Vendors
b
Select Add objects to work area. The Select Work Area dialog box will appear.
c
Enter the vendors from the table below in the Internal char. value fields of the Select Object dialog.
d 1-1-5
icon.
a
T-S11F##
Sunny Electronics GmbH
T-S11H##
PAQ Deutschland GmbH
T-S100##
Intercompany Vendor for Plant 22##
Choose Adopt . The vendor icons representing your vendors will appear on the map and will be listed.
Add your products to the work area: a
To assign your products to the work area, select the Location Products button first.
b
Right-click on Location Products in the Object Type/Object Name column.
c
Select Add objects to work area. The Select work area will appear.
d
Enter the product numbers from the table below to the Internal char. value fields. T-ATC1-## T-ATD2-## T-ATD3-##
1-1-6
© SAP AG
e
Select the Adopt
button.
f
Your products will appear in a list under the Location Products Object Type/Object Name column.
Add your Resources to your Work Area: a
Select the Resources
b
Right-click on the Transportation Resources Object Name. Select Add objects to work area.
c
In the Select Work Area dialog, enter G##-FTRK01 and G##-FTRK05 in the two Internal char. value From and To fields on the first line.
d
Enter G##-LTRK01 and G##-LTRK05 in the two Internal char. value From and To fields on the second line. SCM612
button.
5-17
e
Select the Adopt
button.
f
The vehicle resources will now appear under the Transportation Resource heading.
g Display the resources by selecting the arrowhead to the left of the Transportation Resource heading. There should be 10 resources listed. h Select all of your resources in the list by selecting the first resource and then shift-click on the last resource. All of the resources should be highlighted. i
Right click on the selected resources.
j
Select Add to model.
k An Information dialog will display informing you that 10 resources will be added to the model. Select Continue. l
The resource
m Select Save n Choose Back 1-1-7
2-1
icon should now be displayed to the left of each resource. . .
You will now use the Supply Chain Engineer to display the transportation lanes related to your Work Area, GR##. a
The Supply Chain Engineer: Choose Model screen should have the Model 000 and your Work Area GR## displayed.
b
Choose Change Model
c
Select the Transportation Lanes
d
Select the arrowhead to the left of the Transporation Lanes icon. The list of transportation lanes will appear.
e
Select one the transportation lanes in your network and double-click on it. The system will take to the transportation lane change transaction.
f
Choose Back
g
Choose Back to return to the Supply Chain Engineer: Choose Model screen. Select No to the message asking if you want to save the model.
. button.
to return to the SCE.
Create a new Work Area, MM##, for Model 000 to display your multi-modal supply chain network.
© SAP AG
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Supply Chain Engineer → Maintain Model
b
Enter the following: Model
000
Work Area
MM## SCM612
5-18
c 2-1-1
Choose Change Model
.
Add the following Plant to your work area: 30## a
New York
Right-click on the word Plant next to the plant
icon.
b Select Add objects to work area. The Select Work Area dialog box will appear. c
Enter the plant from the table above in the Internal char. value fields of the Select Object dialog.
d Choose Adopt . The plant icons representing your plants will appear on the map and will be listed. 2-1-2
Add the following Distribution Centers (DC) to your work area: 35##
Dallas
25##
Rotterdam
a
2-1-3
Right-click on the words Distribution Centers next to the DC
b
Right-click on Distribution Centers next to the Distribution Center icon.
c
Select Add objects to work area. The Select Work Area dialog box will appear.
d
Enter the DC’s from the table above in the Internal char. value fields of the Select Object dialog.
e
Choose Adopt . The DC icons representing your DC’s will appear on the map and will be listed.
f
icon . This will cause the map display to Select the Adjust to Objects center on the objects added to the Work Area.
Add your customer location to the work area: T-S44A## a
© SAP AG
icon.
Hannover International
Right-click Customers/Ship-To Parties next to the Customers/Ship-To Parties icon. SCM612
5-19
2-1-4
2-1-5
© SAP AG
b
Select Add objects to work area. The Select Work Area dialog box will appear.
c
Enter the customer from the table above in the Internal char. value fields of the Select Object dialog.
d
Choose Adopt . The customer icon representing your customer will appear on the map and will be listed.
Add your products to the work area: T-ATC1-##
Sunny Sunny 01
T-ATD2-##
Maxitec R 3200 Personal computer
T-ATD3-##
Diskette Drive, 3.5", HD
a
To assign your products to the work area, select the Location Products button first.
b
Right-click on Location Products in the Object Type/Object Name column.
c
Select Add objects to work area. The Select work area will appear.
d
Enter the product numbers from the table above to the Internal char. value fields.
e.
Select the Adopt
f.
Your products will appear in a list under the Location Products Object Type/Object Name column.
button.
Add your the resources (G##-RAIL01, G##-SHIP01, G##-TRK01) to the model and your work area. a
Select the Resources
button.
b
Right-click on the Transportation Resources Object Name. Select Add objects to work area.
c
In the Select Work Area dialog, enter G##-RAIL01 in theInternal char. value From field on the first line.
d
Enter G##-SHIP01 in theInternal char. value From field on the second line.
e
Enter G##-TRK01 in the Internal char. Value From field on the third line.
f
Select the Adopt
g
The vehicle resources will now appear under the Transportation Resource heading.
button.
SCM612
5-20
h
Display the resources by selecting the arrowhead to the left of the Transportation Resource heading. The 3 resources should be listed.
i
Select all of your resources in the list by selecting the first resource and then shift-click on the last resource. All of the resources should be highlighted.
j.
Right click on the selected resources.
k.
Select Add to model.
l
An Information dialog will display informing you that 3 resources will be added to the model. Select Continue.
m The Resource
icon should now be displayed to the left of each resource.
n
.
o 3-1
Select Save Select Back
.
Create a new Work Area, PD##, for Model 000 to display your pool distribution supply chain network. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Supply Chain Engineer → Maintain Model
b
Enter the following:
c
Model
000
Work Area
PD##
Choose Change Model
3-1-1 12##
© SAP AG
Dresden
.
your work area:
Add the following Plant to
a
Right-click on the word Plant next to the plant
b
Select Add objects to work area. The Select Work Area dialog box will appear.
c
Enter the plant from the table above in the Internal char. value fields of the Select Object dialog.
d
Choose Adopt . The plant icons representing your plants will appear on the map and will be listed.
SCM612
icon.
5-21
3-1-2
Add the following DC to your work area: 13##
3-1-3
Frankfurt Consolidation Hub
a
Right-click on Distribution Centers next to the Distribution Center icon.
b
Select Add objects to work area. The Select Work Area dialog box will appear.
c
Enter the DC from the table above in the Internal char. value fields of the Select Object dialog.
d
Choose Adopt . The DC icons representing your DC’s will appear on the map and will be listed.
Add the following customers to your work area: T-S11B## T-S11A## T-S22A## T-S33A##
© SAP AG
a
Right-click Customers/Ship-To Parties next to the Customers/Ship-To Parties icon.
b
Select Add objects to work area. The Select Work Area dialog box will appear.
c
Enter the customers from the table above in the Internal char. value fields of the Select Object dialog.
d
Choose Adopt . The customer icons representing your customers will appear on the map and will be listed.
SCM612
5-22
3-1-4
Add the following Transportation Zones to your work area: DE-D000070000 DE-D000060000
© SAP AG
a
Right-click on Transportation Zones next to the Transportation Zone icon.
b
Select Add objects to work area. The Select Work Area dialog box will appear.
c
Enter the transportation zones from the table above in the Internal char. value fields of the Select Object dialog.
d
Choose Adopt . The plant icons representing your plants will appear on the map and will be listed.
e
Choose Save
.
f
Choose Exit
.
SCM612
5-23
© SAP AG
SCM612
5-24
Contents: Transfer of Transaction Data between ERP and SCM Systems Integration Model for the Transfer of Transaction Data Publication of Delivery and Shipment data from SCM to ERP.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-1
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: Describe the process of Transaction Data transfer between ERP and SCM Systems Define an Integration Model for the transfer of Transaction data Make the required customizing settings in SCM to facilitate the publication of delivery and shipment data from SCM to ERP. Transfer Transaction Data from ERP to SCM
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-2
For transportation planning, sales orders, purchase orders and stock transport orders must be transferred to SCM using the CIF. An integration model will be created to transfer the transaction data to SCM. Upon completion of the transportation planning for a group of sales orders, the resulting delivery and shipment documents must be transferred to ERP using the publication process. Before this process can be performed, customizing settings in SCM must be completed.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-3
SCM
ERP ERP transaction data Purchase orders Purchase requisitions Sales orders Planned orders Planned ind.reqmts Reservations Stocks...
TP/VS transaction data Core Interface
CIF
Integration model
Orders - Replenishment order - Manufacturing order - Procurement order ... (Distinction by ATP category)
SAP AG 2008
The transaction data that is to be transferred into SCM, is specified in an integration model that you define in the ERP System. The transaction data is mapped to orders in SCM that differ by ATP category.
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-4
!
ERP ERP transaction data
SCM Initial data transfer
TP/VS transaction data BF (PchOrd)
Purchase Orders Stock Transport Orders Returns
BM (SalesOrder)
Sales orders Deliveries Stocks ...
Incremental data transfer Real-time
CC (Stock) ...
SAP AG 2008
First, the initial data transfer of transaction data is performed via the APO Core Interface (CIF). This is usually followed automatically by the incremental data transfer between ERP and SCM for transaction data objects that are members of an active integration model. This means that new transaction data or changes to existing transaction data are transferred automatically. The SCM transaction data objects are not generally identical to those of the ERP System. The system transfers various ERP transaction data into SCM as orders that differ by ATP category.
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-5
" 1. Generate integration model
ERP
Determine name and SCM target system
Name Target sys. Sales orders
Select transaction data
Production/process orders Storage location stock
...
ERP
2. Activate integration model
Integration model is active Start
Initial transfer of transaction data is performed, followed by a continuous real-time incremental data transfer
SAP AG 2008
You define the integration model that controls the transfer of transaction data in the ERP System. You can find the menu option Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer (the CIF menu) under Logistics -> Central Functions -> Supply Chain Planning Interface. The integration model distinguishes between master data and transaction data. We recommend that you select the two types of data in separate integration models and then transfer them separately. In the integration model, you select the transaction data you want to transfer. You specify the following in the integration model: •
The SCM target system for the data transfer
•
The data objects you want to transfer
You can delete integration models that you no longer need, but note that you must first deactivate them. For any transaction data from the production planning that is contained in an active integration model, the system usually performs a continuous real-time incremental data transfer between the ERP System and SCM.
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-6
#
$ %
Name + application = unique definition of integration model Name
PC
Target sys.
SCMCLNT800
Application
TD
SCM System
Sales orders Production/process orders
Selection of transaction data types
Planned orders Storage location stocks
...
Sales orders
Material Plant
Selection criteria for the transaction data
1000
...
Execute
+
Save
SAP AG 2008
The transaction data that is to be transferred from the ERP System to the SCM System is defined in an integration model. The ERP System generates this integration model (transaction CFM1). An integration model is uniquely defined by its name and application. It is useful to create several integration models with the same name but as different applications. Ensure that the data pools of your integration models are generally not too big. This enables you to handle errors more easily. The target system that you specify in the integration model determines the SCM System that the transaction data is transferred into. The target system is a logical (SCM) system that must have a RFC connection. The SCM System determines the (ERP) target system to be used for a retransfer from SCM to ERP. You use a particular integration model to specify which transaction data you want to transfer. To do so, you first specify the transaction data types that are to be added to the integration model. Secondly, you specify the selection criteria that will be used to select the individual documents in the ERP System. You complete the generation of the integration model by "executing" the model (this means that the data objects of the model are compiled) and then you save it.
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-7
&
#
$ %
Integration model
ERP
PC
Name
Material master AA Material Salesmaster order B
Target system SCMCLNT800 Application
"Activate"
ERP
Sales order A
TD Active/Inact.
Sales order B PC
SCMCLNT800
TD
Start
SCM
10:00:00
automatic
Transaction data in SCM
Incremental data transfer
Material master AA Material Sales master order B Sales order A
Sales order A
SAP AG 2008
To transfer transaction data between ERP and SCM, you must activate the integration model. You activate an integration model with the transaction Activate integration model (transaction code CFM2) in the CIF. It is permissible to have several integration models active at a time. Choose the Start function to trigger the initial data transfer. This means that the transaction data you have selected is transferred into SCM for the first time. This initial transfer is usually automatically followed by the real-time link between the ERP System and the SCM System, concerning the selected transaction data. This means that once a storage location stock of a selected material changes due to a goods movement posting, the new stock is transferred into SCM. In the same way, production orders that are generated in SCM, for example, are immediately transferred to the ERP System.
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-8
#
SCM
Planning results in TP/VS e.g.
Which ERP System?
'
Delivery x
or
Collect the changes Online transfer
ERP
Delivery x
ERP Plant B
Plant A
SAP AG 2008
For TP/VS, there are three transactions that are used to process transfers of SCM planned documents to the ERP System: •
/SAPSCM/VS50 Transfer Orders to Delivery Generation /SAPSCM/VS52 Check release of Planned Orders /SAPSCM/VS51 Transmit planned Shipments to OLTP System
In the Basic settings (publication of planning results) operation in SCM Customizing, specify for each plant and publication type (for example, deliveries and transports (shipments) ), which ERP System you are going to publish your planning results in (name of the logical system). You must complete this table, even if you only operate one ERP System. The publication process is performed in TP/VS after the shipments have been planned and released.
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-9
Planned Shipment and Delivery Documents can be transferred from SCM to ERP for Plant 1200:
SAP AG 2008
SCM IMG: Integration with SAP Components Integration of SAP SCM and SAP ERP Settings for Data Transfer Publication Maintain Distribution Definition
Basic
Settings in the Distribution Definition table determine which planning documents can be sent (published) to an external system such as ERP for execution. For TP/VS, Publication Types 330 (Transport) and 340 (Deliveries) are relevant. An entry should be made in this table for all plants/DC‘s that will have deliveries and shipment documents for execution. In addition to the Location, the Logical System to which the documents are to be transferred and the ERP System Release must be specified. Using the Generate and Delete Distribution Definition customizing activity, multiple Distribution Definition records can be created at one time. This capability is particularly helpful if a large number of locations (plants/DC‘s) are involved in planning.
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-10
''
(
You are now able to: Describe the concept of Transaction Data transfer between ERP and SCM Systems Create an integration model to transfer transaction data to SCM Make the necessary customizing settings in SCM to enable the publication of delivery and shipment data from SCM to ERP Transfer Transaction Data
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-11
Exercises Unit: Transfer of Transaction data Topic: Integration Model for Transaction Data At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create an Integration Model to transfer TP/VS-related transaction data via the CIF to APO. Transportation-relevant transactions from the ERP System must be transferred via the CIF to APO. In addition, inventory-relevant stocks must also be transferred to APO if ATP checking is to performed in APO. You will create an integration model to enable this transfer.
1-1
Create, generate and activate an integration model, GR##, in ERP to transfer the following transaction and inventory-relevant stocks to the target APO system: Sales Orders Purchase Orders Stock Transport Orders Stocks: Storage Location Stocks in transit 1-1-1 Create the integration model: GR##. Use TD as your Application code. Restrict your transaction data (Sales orders, purchase orders, stock transport orders) selection to that data that belongs to your group number. Use the data in the following table to restrict the selection of data to your supply chain network.
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-12
Transaction Type
Data to Select
Sales orders/P.O's/Stk Figures: Materials
T-ATC1-## T-ATD2-## T-ATD3-##
Sales orders/P.O's/Stk Figures: Plants
10## 12## 22## 25## 30## 35## 38##
1-2
Save the settings as a variant: GR##-TD 1-1-2 Generate and Save the model. 1-1-3 Activate the model. Record the stock balances from the ATP data in APO: 1-2-1 Product: T-ATC1-## Plant 10##
________________________________
Plant 12##
________________________________
Plant 25##
________________________________
Plant 35## ________________________________ 1-2-2 Product: T-ATD2-## Plant 10##
________________________________
Plant 12##
________________________________
Plant 22##
________________________________
Plant 35## ________________________________ 1-2-3 Product: T-ATD3-##
© SAP AG
Plant 10##
________________________________
Plant 12##
________________________________
Plant 22##
________________________________ SCM612
6-13
Plant 35## 1-3
________________________________
To test the CIF interface and your integration model you will create some sales orders to be shipped from your Dresden plant to two different customers. To test the purchasing transaction transfer you will create a purchase order from one of your vendors for materials to be received in your Hamburg plant. A stock transport order will be created to transfer stock for a material to your Paris plant. 1-3-1 Create a sales order: Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11A##
PO Number
06-1-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 2 weeks
Material
T-ATC1-##
Order Quantity
50 PC
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
1-3-2 What plant is on the line item in sales order? _______________ 1-3-3 Record the order document number: ________________________ 1-3-4 Create a sales order: Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11C##
PO Number
06-2-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 2 weeks
Material
T-ATC1-##
Order Quantity
55 PC
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
1-3-5 What plant is on the line item in sales order? _______________ 1-3-6 Record the order document number: ________________________
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-14
1-3-7 Create a Purchase Order : Order Type
NB
Vendor
T-S11F##
Purchasing Org.
1000
Purchasing Group
001
Company Code
1000
Material
T-ATD2-##
Quantity
300 PC
Price
850.00 EUR
Delivery Date
Today + 3 weeks
Plant
10##
Storage Location
0001
NOTE: Set the Confirmation Control on the line item to ‘ANLI – Inbound delivery’. 1-3-8 Record the PO Document Number: _______________________ 1-3-9 Create a Stock Transport Order: Order Type
NB
Vendor
T-S100## (Intercompany Plant vendor)
Purchasing Org.
2200
Purchasing Group
220
Company Code
2200
Material
T-ATC1-##
Quantity
100 PC
Price
345.00 EUR
Delivery Date
Today + 2 weeks
Plant
22##
Storage Location
0001
NOTE: Set the Confirmation Control on the line item to ‘ANLI – Inbound delivery’. 1-3-10 Record the Document Number: ____________________________
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-15
Exercises Unit: Transfer of Transaction data Topic: Customizing for Publication At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Make the necessary customizing settings in APO to publish/transfer delivery and shipment document data to the ERP System. After the transportation planning has been performed by TP/VS, the planned delivery and shipment documents are transferred to ERP for the "execution" process.
2-1
You will make the required settings in APO to allow the transfer of planned delivery and shipment document data from APO to the ERP System via the CIF. There are two Publication Types that are relevant for TP/VS planned documents: 330 – Transports for shipment documents 340 – Deliveries for delivery documents The publication type combined with the inbound/outbound location code, the logical system and the ERP release number are required for each entry in the customizing table. You will need to make an entry for both publication types for each of your plants and vendors. Plants: 10##, 12##, 22##, 25##, 30##, 35##, 38## Vendors: T-S11F##, T-S11H##, T-S100## After you have created your entries in the Distribution Definition table, save the table.
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-16
Solutions Unit: Transfer of Transaction data Topic: Integration Model for Transaction Data 1-1
Create, generate and activate an integration model, GR##, in ERP to transfer the following transaction and inventory-relevant stocks to the target APO system: Sales Orders Purchase Orders Stock Transport Orders Stocks: Storage Location Stocks in transit 1-1-1 Create the integration model: GR##. Use TD as your Application code. Restrict your transaction data (Sales orders, purchase orders, stock transport orders) selection to that data that belongs to your group number. Use the data in the following table to restrict the selection of data to your supply chain network. Transaction Type
Data to Select
Sales orders/P.O's/Stk Figures: Materials
T-ATC1-## T-ATD2-## T-ATD3-##
Sales orders/P.O's/Stk Figures: Plants
10## 12## 22## 25## 35##
Save the settings as a variant: GR##-TD a
© SAP AG
Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Central Functions → Supply Chain Planning Interface → Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer → Integration Model → Create SCM612
6-17
b
c
Enter the following from the table: Model Name
GR##
Logical System
Your APO logical system
APO Application
TD
In the Material Dependent Objects section, set the following checkboxes: Storage Loc Stk Transit Stock
d
Select the Further Restrictions field.
e
In the Stocks area that pops up on the right side of the screen, select the Multiple Selection
f
icon to the right of the Storage Loc Stk
icon on the Material line.
Enter the following materials in the Single Values column: T-ATC1-## T-ATD2-## T-ATD3-##
g
Choose Copy
.
h
Select the Multiple Selection
i
Enter the following Plants/DC’s in the Single Value column:
icon on the Plant line.
10## 12## 22## 25## 30## 35## 38## j
Select Copy
.
k
In the Material Dependent Objects section, set the following checkbox: Sales Orders
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-18
l
Select the Further Restrictions field.
icon to the right of the Sales Orders
m In the Sales Orders area that pops up on the right side of the screen, select the Multiple Selection n
icon on the Material line.
Enter the following materials in the Single Values column: T-ATC1-## T-ATD2-## T-ATD3-##
o
Choose Copy
.
p
Select the Multiple Selection
q
Enter the following Plants/DC’s in the Single Value column:
icon on the Plant line.
10## 12## 22## 25## 30## 35## 38## r
Select Copy
.
s
In the Material Dependent Objects section, set the following checkbox: POs and PReqs
t
Select the Further Restrictions field.
icon to the right of the POs and PReqs
u
In the Purchase Orders and Purchase Reqs area that pops up on the right side of the screen, select the Multiple Selection line.
© SAP AG
SCM612
icon on the Material
6-19
v
Enter the following materials in the Single Values column: T-ATC1-## T-ATD2-## T-ATD3-##
w
Choose Copy
.
x
Select the Multiple Selection
y
Enter the following Plants/DC’s in the Single Value column:
icon on the Plant line.
10## 12## 22## 25## 30## 35## 38## z
Select Copy
.
Before the model is generated, you will now create a Variant of the model. This variant is necessary if you want to run the model in a background process later. a
Choose Save
b
In the ABAP Variant screen, enter your variant name: GR##-TD and a description of your own choosing.
c
Choose Save
.
1-1-2 Generate the model.
© SAP AG
a
Choose Execute . The system will display a screen with the number of objects found for each type of master data. You can drill down on each object by clicking on the number of records found display. Note: If you get a message regarding the selection and “long run times”, choose ‘NO’.
b
Select the Generate IM button. You will get a message dialog that informs you that the model has been generated.
c
Select Continue
d
Select Exit
. SCM612
6-20
e
Select Exit
1-1-3 Activate the Model. a
Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Central Functions → Supply Chain Planning Interface → Core Interface Advanced Planner and Optimizer → Integration Model → Activate
b
Enter your Model, Logical System and APO Application code if not present in the fields.
c
Choose Execute
d
Select the line in the left column with the ‘TD’.
e
Place your cursor on the line with the Date, Time and User-id.
f
Select the Active/Inactive
.
button.
A green check mark should appear next to the line indicating that the model has been made active. g
Select the Start system.
button to do the actual transfer of data to the APO
After the transfer has been activated, you will get a message regarding logs and confirming the transfer.
1-2
h
Choose Continue
i
Select Exit
j
Select Exit
Record the stock balances from the ATP data in APO: 1-2-1 Product: T-ATC1-## Plant 10##
________________________________
Plant 12##
________________________________
Plant 25##
________________________________
Plant 35##
________________________________
1-2-2 Product: T-ATD2-##
© SAP AG
Plant 10##
________________________________
Plant 12##
________________________________
Plant 22##
________________________________
Plant 35##
________________________________ SCM612
6-21
1-2-3 Product: T-ATD3-##
1-3
Plant 10##
________________________________
Plant 12##
________________________________
Plant 22##
________________________________
Plant 35##
________________________________
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Global ATP → Reporting → Product Availability
b
For each of the Products above do the following:
c
In the Check Data area enter: Product Number
From the question
Location
From the question
Business Event
A
d
Choose Enter
.
e
Record the quantity from the screen display.
f
Choose Back
g
Repeat steps c. thru f. for each Product-Location Quantity to be recorded above.
.
To test the CIF interface and your integration model you will create some sales orders to be shipped from your Dresden plant to two different customers. To test the purchasing transaction transfer you will create a purchase order from one of your vendors for materials to be received in your Hamburg plant. A stock transport order will be created to transfer stock for a material to your Paris plant. 1-3-1 Create a sales order:
© SAP AG
Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11A##
PO Number
06-1-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 2 weeks
Material
T-ATC1-##
Order Quantity
50 PC
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
a
Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → Create
b
Enter the Order Type from the table above. SCM612
6-22
c
Choose Enter
.
d
Enter the data from the table above in the corresponding fields in the Create Standard Order: Overview screen.
e
Select Enter
.
1-3-2 What plant is on the line item in sales order?_______________ a
Select the Shipping tab. Record the plant that is on the line item.
b
Select Save
.
1-3-3 Record the order document number: ________________________ 1-3-4 Create a sales order:
a
Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11C##
PO Number
06-2-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 2 weeks
Material
T-ATC1-##
Order Quantity
55 PC
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
Follow the steps in 1-3-1, a. thru e to create the order.
1-3-5 What plant is on the line item in sales order? _______________ a
Select the Shipping tab. Record the plant that is on the line item.
b
Select Save
.
1-3-6 Record the order document number: ________________________ 1-3-7 Create a Purchase Order :
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-23
Order Type
NB Standard PO
Vendor
T-S11F##
Purchasing Org.
1000
Purchasing Group
001
Company Code
1000
Material
T-ATD2-##
Quantity
300 PC
Price
850.00 EUR
Delivery Date
Today + 3 weeks
Plant
10##
Storage Location
0001
NOTE: Set the Confirmation Control on the line item to ‘ANLI – Inbound delivery’.
© SAP AG
a
Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known
b
Select the
c
Verify the Order Type and enter the vendor from the table above.
d
Select the PO Header not open.
e
Enter the Purchasing Organization, Purchasing group and Company code from the data in the table above.
f
Choose Enter
g
Select the Expand Items icon to the left of Item Overview if the Item Overview entry area is not present. In the Item Overview area in the middle of the screen, enter the remaining material/item-related information from the table above.
h
Choose Enter
i
In the Item section at the bottom of the screen, select the Confirmations tab.
j
In the Conf. Ctrl field, select the code: ANLI – Inbound delivery ERP.
k
Choose Save
button above the documentation panel. icon, if the header information area is
.
.
.
SCM612
6-24
1-3-8 Record the PO Document Number: _______________________ 1-3-9 Create a Stock Transport Order: Order Type
NB Standard PO
Vendor
T-S100## (Intercompany Plant vendor)
Purchasing Org.
2200
Purchasing Group
220
Company Code
2200
Material
T-ATC1-##
Quantity
100 PC
Price
345.00 EUR
Delivery Date
Today + 2 weeks
Plant
22##
Storage Location
0001
NOTE: Set the Confirmation Control on the line item to ‘ANLI – Inbound delivery’. a
If you are not already on the Create Purchase Order screen, navigate to the transaction: ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Materials Management → Purchasing → Purchase Order → Create → Vendor/Supplying Plant Known
b
You are entering an inter-company stock transport order and it is entered just like a regular PO. In fact the PO Order Type is the same: NB.
c
Complete the stock transport order by following steps b. thru j. in paragraph 1-3-7 above using the data table in this paragraph.
1-3-10 Record the Document Number: ____________________________
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-25
Solutions Unit: Transfer of Transaction data Topic: Customizing for Publication
2-1
You will make the required settings in APO to allow the transfer of planned delivery and shipment document data from APO to the ERP System via the CIF. There are two Publication Types that are relevant for TP/VS planned documents: 330 – Transports for shipment documents 340 – Deliveries for delivery documents The publication type combined with the inbound/outbound location code, the logical system and the ERP release number are required for each entry in the customizing table. You will need to make an entry for both publication types for each of your plants and vendors. Plants: 10##, 12##, 22##, 25##, 30##, 35##, 38## Vendors: T-S11F##, T-S11H##, T-S100## After you have created your entries in the Distribution Definition table, save the table. a
Navigate to SCM IMG: Integration with SAP Components → Integration via APO Core Interface (CIF) → Basic Settings for Data Transfer → Publication → Generate and Delete Distribution Definition
b
On the Generate/Delete Distribution Definition screen, select the Multiple Selection
c
icon on the Publishing Type line.
Enter the following values in the Select Single Values column: 330 340
d
Select Copy
e
On the Generate/Delete Distribution Definition screen, select the Multiple Selection
© SAP AG
. icon on the Location Number line.
SCM612
6-26
f
Enter the following values in the Select Single Values column: 10## 12## 22## 25## 30## 35## 38## T-S11F## T-S11H## T-S100##
g
Select Copy
h
Enter ‘T90CLNT090’ or the Logical System Number provided by the Instructor to the class in the Logical System field.
i
Choose Execute
j
Review your data on the resulting Distribution Criteria Administration screen.
k
Choose Select all
l
Choose Save Selection
.
.
. .
m You should get a message that 20 distribution definitions were updated in the database. n
© SAP AG
Select Exit
.
SCM612
6-27
© SAP AG
SCM612
6-28
Contents: Configuration and Customization Activities
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-1
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: Understand activities required to configure the TP/VS system
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-2
Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Lesson 1: General/Basic Settings Lesson 2: Conditions Lesson 3: Compatibility/Incompatibility Lesson 4: Pickup/Delivery Windows Lesson 5: Scheduling
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-3
In preparation for running the TP/VS modeling and optimization process, the planning environment must be established by making various customizing settings and creating the necessary master data in TP/VS.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-4
Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Lesson 1: General/Basic Settings Lesson 2: Conditions Lesson 3: Compatibility/Incompatibility Lesson 4: Pickup/Delivery Windows Lesson 5: Scheduling
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-5
!
At the conclusion of this topic, you will be able to: Make the basic VS customizing settings necessary to set up the optimization process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-6
"#
!
To implement TP/VS there are certain basic settings that must be made by the project team.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-7
$
% Transportation Service Provider Selection
Basic Settings Geocoding / GIS
Transportation Service Provider Settings
Number Ranges Determine Shipment Types
Interfaces (ERP Related)
Transportation Groups
Assignment of Transportation Zone to Locations
Means of Transport
….
Transportation Modes
Backorder Processing
Freight Units
Filters
Optimization
Sort Profiles
Profiles (Optimization / Cost)
Scheduling
Define Compatibilities Definition of Dimension Units SAP AG 2008
SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization Scheduling (TP/VS)
© SAP AG
Transportation Planning and Vehicle
SCM612
7-8
&' Creation of Master Data in ERP Creation of Integration Models and the transfer of Master Data ERP -> SCM Plants, DC’s Customers Suppliers Locations Carriers/TSP’s Products Materials Creation of Transportation Groups Creation of Transportation Modes Creation of Means of Transport Creation of Vehicle Resources and assignment to active model 000 Modelling in Supply Chain Engineer Creation of Transportation Lanes Assignment of Means of Transport to Transportation Lanes Assignment of Transportation Service Providers (TSP’s) to Lanes and Means of Transport
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-9
&
(
SAP AG 2008
SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings Basic Settings for Vehicle Scheduling ATP confirmed quantities : Specifies for Vehicle Scheduling planning whether the ATP confirmed quantities with corresponding scheduled date (date of schedule line) should be used as a basis, or whether the desired delivery date is used per order item. Indicator set: Use of ATP confirmed quantities Indicator not set: Use of desired delivery dates Read SD Data: Set this indicator if you activate the user exit '001' in function module '/SAPSCM/VS_ORDER_GET' to allow you to control the display or filtering of additional SD fields for orders in interactive planning. • Do not set this indicator if you do not use user exit '001'. • We recommend that you use user exit '005' if you want to add user-specific field values for freight units that are not part of SD database tables. • Setting this indicator has a negative effect on performance for all of Vehicle Scheduling. You should therefore only set this indicator if you really need to. Ignore “Complete Deliveries Indicator”: If set, system can split sales orders with the “complete dlv” flag. Use Characts: Activate the usage of characteristics Change logic for deliveries: Use “ERP Weight and Volume for Deliveries”: You can use this indicator to use weight and volume of a delivery from the ERP system as the basis for freight unit creation. If this indicator is not set, weight and volume for the freight unit are calculated using material master data in SAP APO. Activate OSTA: One-Time-Ship-To Addresses can be used Location Identifier: How is the location name for the OSTA location created (based on time stamp, number range, order number) © SAP AG
SCM612
7-10
&
)
SAP AG 2008
Shipment Split: Own Vehicles: If you set this flag, a new shipment begins with each empty run of the vehicle. Shipment Split: External Vehicles: If you set this indicator, a new shipment begins with each empty run of the vehicle. Any Start Location with Own Vehicle : Specifies whether vehicles for which the means of transport is your own means of transport and that are not assigned to a depot can start from any location at the next optimization run or whether they have to start from their last location (from the last shipment). Use shipping point as source location: Indicates that the shipping point must be used as source location for freight units in shipments. Global setting! Max. Break Interruption: (Un) loading: Specify possible breaks for activities. Should not be used as it affects performance of the optimizer Do not schedule ERP Shipments: ERP shipments will not assigned to a resource and therefore will not consume capacity.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-11
&
*
SAP AG 2008
Currently only number of shipments (EA) is supported for Transportation Allocation. External Costs: If you do not set this indicator, a very high default value is automatically set for a transportation service provider for which costs could not be determined. There is also a check for whether at least one transportation service provider has "correct" costs. If this is not the case, this strategy can no longer be used. If you set this indicator, a default value is not set and the strategy cannot be used. General Settings: Change History (Days): Enter the duration, in days, for which changes to shipments are recorded. If you specify a duration other than zero, each action representing a planning change affecting shipments is recorded. At the same time, entries that are older than the specified duration are deleted. Log Level: Used to set the level of detail of entries in the application log.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-12
+,
-
.
SCM IMG: Advanced Planner and Optimizer Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings
Transportation Planning/Vehicle
Define Number Range for Temporary Shipments
Define Number Range for Shipments
SAP AG 2008
The temporary shipment number range is used to assign shipment numbers to shipment documents created during the Route Optimization process. The Number Range for Shipments table is used to assign shipment numbers to shipment documents that have been ‘released’ to the ERP System. This number range MUST match the number range assignment in ERP for External Number assignment.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-13
!
/!
ERP Shipment Type
SAP AG 2008
SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Interfaces Determine Shipment Type This customizing activity is used to map the Means of Transport and Inbound/Outbound Shipment to the corresponding Shipment Type in the specified Logical System where the planned shipment documents are to be transferred. Conditions can also be used to control the assignment of a inbound / outbound shipment type to a means of transport. The Shipment Types(Vehicle Column) must be defined in the ERP System for the transfer of the shipment to take place. ERP Shipment Type configuration can be found at: ERP IMG: Logistics Execution Transportation
© SAP AG
Shipments
SCM612
Define Shipment Types
7-14
0
/
You should now be able to: Make the basic VS customizing settings necessary to set up the optimization process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-15
Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Lesson 1: General/Basic Settings Lesson 2: Conditions Lesson 3: Compatibility/Incompatibility Lesson 4: Pickup/Delivery Windows Lesson 5: Scheduling
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-16
0
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Set up conditions for various TP/VS functions such as Compatibility/incompatibility checking, pickup/delivery windows, split rules, control rules, dynamic route determination, freight unit selection in the optimizer profile and shipment type determination.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-17
"#
!
In various transportation scenarios the TP/VS implementation and support team needs the ability to determine whether certain functions or load consolidation can take place.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-18
1
SAP AG 2008
SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Optimizer Define Field Catalog TP/VS field catalog will include fields, which can be used in defining compatibilities and conditions for orders. Field Catalog consists of entries, which define fieldname (= ID), description of field, database table and field name (optional to define F4 help) and function name. The field name is used as unique field ID to get corresponding freight unit field value. For standard fields it coincides with the fieldname of corresponding characteristic in freight unit structure. That’s why for fields already included in freight unit structure, it is enough to enter field name in Field Catalogue, to enable definition of conditions which include this field. TP/VS Field Catalogue will be delivered with following standard fields: • Means of transport (not included in conditions, only used for compatibilities) • Cross-docking location (not included in conditions, only used for compatibilities) • Source/target Location/transportation zone • ATP category, logical system, ERP object type • Shipping information (shipping point, shipping conditions, incoterms1, route, delivery priority) • Material information (material number, transportation group) • Weight/volume group It will be possible to include user-defined fields in TP/VS field catalogue. In this case it will be also possible to define user function module for such fields (this functionality is similar to SCM-ATP). If no user function module is defined, the attempt is done to read the value from the freight unit structure using field name as identifier of field. If no field exists with such name and no user function module is specified, the error message is raised. To simplify processing the freight unit structure /SAPSCM/VSR_G_FUNIT will be enhanced with fields: INCO1, AZONE, LZONE (Target/Source transportation zone) GRGEW, GRVOL (Weight/Volume Group). © SAP AG
SCM612
7-19
1 Object Type
O (order/freight unit)
I (Item)
V (Vehicle)
S (Shipment) L (location)
2
/!
Explanantion
Usage Conditions e.g. in the VS Optimizer Profile, the Dynamic Route Determination, the validity of pickup and delivery time windows, compatibilities etc. Compatibilities between the Freight Unit and something else, in the This value comes from the freight unit Optimizer, Manual Planning and DRD This is only used for conditions that are used in the split profile and for compatibilities that are considered when building the freight units. T value comes from the schedule lines Therefore if it would be necessary always to separate cats and dogs, it which are the basis for building the would be necessary to define compatibility rules for both 'Order' and freight unit. 'Item' objects. Conditions in the Dynamic Route Determinationprofile for Resource selection Compatibilities between the Resource and something else, in the This is an attribute of the vehicle. Optimizer, Manual Planning and DRD. Conditions for determination of the shipment type and the control rules for changes Compatibility for the Carrier Selection for Continous Move This comes from the shipment. This defines the compatibility between a Hub location and a freight unit Hub-location or a Vehicle.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-20
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-21
SAP AG 2008
To create a condition use menu path: SCM SAP Menu Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Transportation Optimization Define Conditions. Then: Select Switch to Change Mode and then New Entries. Enter the condition Name, then the condition Description. Enter the Validity Period. In the Restrictions area of the screen, enter the Fields and corresponding filter values in the Value From and To fields. If selection is to be using a list of values, ranges, excluded values and ranges, select the Sel.options button. If you have used more than one selection field, use the Restrictions Type field to select whether you want an ’AND’ or ‘OR’ relationship to be used between each field condition. Select Save.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-22
Pickup/ Delivery Windows
Optimizer
SAP AG 2008
Pickup/Delivery windows are defined at: SCM SAP menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment Current Settings Transportation Optimization Define Pickup/Delivery Windows It will be possible to define conditions for orders. These conditions can be used for example to restrict compatibilities, date constraints only for specific orders. It can also be used in optimization profile to additionally restrict orders for VS planning. Several conditions are always combined with AND operator. Nevertheless, the user has the possibility to define several values, patterns or ranges for one field (for example, customers in transportation zones LZONE = 69100-69199, 71000, 72*). The maintenance screen for conditions consists of pairs of field names and field value selection options (up to 4 rows). In this way it will be possible to define not only exact field values, but also patterns and ranges for values. F4 help for field values is automatically adjusted according to field type. Fields which can be used in conditions are defined in TP/VS field catalog. It will be possible to save/load conditions as variant.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-23
"#
!
!
SAP AG 2008
From the Optimization Profile, the Condition Editor can be used to define conditions. Example. A user wants to enter conditions to select only orders with order quantity between 10 and 20 pieces: •
The following entries are present in the TP/VS Field Catalogue (standard fields in freight unit structure):
- RCAP_CAP1 Requested quantity of order - RCAP_UNI1 Unit of measure. •
Now the following conditions can be defined:
- Requested quantity of order = 10 – 20, - Unit of measure = PC,.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-24
0
/
You should now be able to: Set up conditions for various TP/VS functions such as Compatibility/incompatibility checking, pickup/delivery windows, split rules, control rules, dynamic route determination, freight unit selection in the optimizer profile and shipment type determination.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-25
Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Lesson 1: General/Basic Settings Lesson 2: Conditions Lesson 3: Compatibility/Incompatibility Lesson 4: Pickup/Delivery Windows Lesson 5: Scheduling
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-26
!
/ ,3
!
/ 0
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Perform the configuration necessary to control whether certain freight units can be consolidated into the same shipment.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-27
!
/ ,3
!
/
"#
!
When creating optimization models that drive the load consolidation process in TP/VS various compatibilities or incompatibilities must be taken into account that determine whether certain materials can be shipped together, or whether a transportation method is compatible with the ship from or to location, or whether certain other physical or business characteristics are present that would ,or should, affect the load consolidation process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-28
!
/ /!
SAP AG 2008
(In-) compatibilities and incompatibilities can be taken into account in the optimizer, in manual planning (including multilevel planning) and within the dynamic route determination. You can use compatibilities and incompatibilities to define the compatibility of planning data that the system is to take into account. Requirements: • You have defined fields that you want to use to define your compatibility types in the TP/VS Field Catalog. The following compatibility types are not permitted: • Means of Transport - Means of Transport • Transshipment Location - Transshipment Location Examples: • Certain materials cannot be transported together due to hazardous material regulations and safety. • A certain truck type cannot transport certain products. • A customer cannot be delivered by a certain carrier / means of transport. • Product can not be delivered in the same compartment. • Vehicle Type/Transport Group OR Transport Group / Transport Group OR Vehicle / Locations. • Orders with different Incoterms must not be transported together. • Refrigerated goods must only be transported in appropriate means of transport (refrigerated trucks). • A certain means of transport cannot be unloaded at a location, since the location does not have a suitable loading ramp. Example: • Sales orders with certain Incoterms are not to be shipped together. • Define the following - compatibility type: Cp.Type: 4 (or any other number between 1 and 99 that is not already being used as a compatibility type) - Field Name 1: Incoterms Part 1 - Field Name 2: Incoterms Part 1 © SAP AG
SCM612
7-29
!
SAP AG 2008
After the compatibility types are created the compatibility relationships can be defined. The validity of the compatibilities and incompatibilities can be restricted to certain optimization profiles. Conditions can also be used to restrict the compatibilities and incompatibilities to certain orders. Compatibilities are not symmetric, they define compatibility for the first attribute Incompatibilities during manual planning can be overruled; the system displays a warning message. Compatible combination of some values of the first and second attribute means that the first attribute value is incompatible with all other possible values of the second attribute (unless they are not specified as compatible also). It doesn't say anything regarding possible values of the first attribute. For example if there is a rule for Means of Transport – Transport group and you maintain CHILLED T1XX compatible then CHILLED can only transport T1XX but T1XX can be transported by other means of transport.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-30
%
!
!
SAP AG 2008
SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment Current Settings Transportation Optimization Define Compatibilities In this table compatibility/incompatibility specifications can be entered that will apply to all optimization profiles, to specific optimization profiles. Conditions can also be entered for any compatibility check to control under what circumstances a compatibility check will be made.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-31
!
/,3
!
/ 0
/
You should now be able to: Perform the configuration necessary to control whether certain freight units can be consolidated into the same shipment.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-32
Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Lesson 1: General/Basic Settings Lesson 2: Conditions Lesson 3: Compatibility/Incompatibility Lesson 4: Pickup/Delivery Windows Lesson 5: Scheduling
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-33
+ 4 !,
/5
0
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Create pickup/delivery windows to be used by the optimizer.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-34
+ 4 !,
/5
"#
!
In many transportation scenarios early or lateness ‘costs’ must be factored into the optimization process. In addition, there may be situations in which it is not permissible for a shipment to be early or late without a penalty cost. The pickup/delivery windows function allows you to establish these cost parameters.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-35
+ 4 !,
/5
&
Costs Dearly
Dlate
Red
Blue
Orange
Dlate
Dearly Green
01/06
01/07
01/08
01/09
01/10
01/11
01/12
01/13 01/14
01/15
Time
A. Soft constraints for early and late delivery visit.
SAP AG 2008
This Orange curve defines (for example): (1) Late delivery until 01/12 is allowed and does not incur penalty cost. (2) Delivery beyond 01/12. is allowed, but incurs penalty costs. The blue curve displays the same information, but replaces the red curve if you mark the time as relevant in the definition of the time window.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-36
+ 4 !,
/5
6
early delivery not allowed
late delivery not allowed
Costs Dearliest
Dlatest
red
Dearliest
Dlatest blue
01/06
01/07
01/08
01/09
01/10
01/11
01/12
01/13 01/14
01/15
Time
B. Hard constraints for early and late delivery visit.
SAP AG 2008
This orange curve defines (for example): (1) Late delivery beyond 01/13. is not allowed. The blue curve displays the same information, but replaces the red curve if you mark the time as relevant in the definition of the time window.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-37
+ 4 !,
/5
&
Costs
early delivery
Late delivery
not allowed
not allowed
Blue
01/06
01/07
01/08
Red
01/09
01/10
01/11
01/12
01/13 01/14
01/15
Time
C. Soft and hard constraints for early and late delivery visit.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-38
/!
+ 4 !7
/
%
Priority
SAP AG 2008
The Select Activity field is used to select whether the rules apply to a pickup, delivery or all shipment scenario. There are buttons in the Applications Toolbar that provide the following functions: Add/delete entry, Sort ascending/descending, change/display mode functions. The Applications Toolbar also contains a button for defining/displaying Conditions. Corresponding window appears after selection of one line and clicking the button. Priority field (01-99 or blank) can be used to define what rule is of higher priority and should be applied for the order, if it satisfies more than one constraint condition/profile. In this case rule with lowest priority number (= highest priority) will be applied. If Priority field is blank, it is considered to be of lowest Priority = 100.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-39
+ 4 !,
/5
!
SAP AG 2008
Pickup/Delivery windows are defined at: SCM SAP menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment Current Settings Transportation Optimization Define Pickup/Delivery Windows The Pickup/Delivery Windows screen consists of a selection list box for visit type (delivery or pickup) and the table to display corresponding information for visits. The table consists of following fields: • • •
•
• • •
Area field to select whether the activity is to be used only for Dynamic Route Determination, Vehicle Scheduling or both. Priority field (optional) for distinguishing between entries for orders which satisfy more than one selection filter Two list boxes (early visit, late visit) with four options: no restriction or blank (means that neither soft (costs), nor hard constraints are applied) soft (costs) (optimizer uses costs defined in cost profile for corresponding times) not allowed (hard constraint) (optimizer considers corresponding date as hard constraint) soft and hard constraints (optimizer considers both hard constraint and costs) Four tolerance fields in hours : minutes format: 1) Early visit tolerance. It is relevant only if soft/soft & hard constraint is defined for early visit. It defines, before what date costs for earliness are applied. 2) Earliest visit tolerance. It is relevant only if hard/soft & hard constraint is defined for early visit. It defines, before what date visit is not allowed. 3) Late visit tolerance. It is relevant only if soft/soft & hard constraint is defined for late visit. It defines, after what date costs for earliness are applied. 4) Latest visit tolerance. It is relevant only if hard/soft & hard constraint is defined for late visit. It defines, after what date visit is not allowed. A Flag for respecting exact time of RDD/MAD An Optimization Profile name (optional) for restricting rules only per specified profile (s) Text containing condition for orders (to make easier for user to check conditions).
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-40
/!
SAP AG 2008
Lateness/earliness of delivery is relative to RDD (Requested Delivery Date) of order, lateness/earliness of pick-up is relative to MAD (Material Availability Date) of order. In preprocessing, order dates (RDD, MAD and delivery window if any) are mapped to corresponding optimizer dates. Latest/earliest date will be set correspondingly if hard constraint is defined for delivery/pick-up, lateness/earliness penalty date will be set if soft constraints (i.e. costs) are defined for delivery/pick-up. If no constraints are defined, corresponding dates are set to the start/end of the planning horizon.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-41
+ 4 !,
/5
Select if you want to respect the time of the order.
SAP AG 2008
Use this feature to specify which customers expect a 100% on time delivery and which customers allow some flexibility (early or late delivery). Additionally, define whether being early or late incurs “penalty costs”. Finally, use this to reduce the time between end of production and the shipment to the customer. Respect exact requested delivery/MAD time: •
Controls the basis on which the optimization calculates the tolerance.
•
Use
- If you do not set the indicator, the optimization calculates the early/delayed delivery from the start/end of the day that is the requested delivery date and the early/delayed pickup from the start/end of the day that is the material availability date. - If you set the indicator, the optimization calculates the early/delayed delivery from the requested delivery time and the early/delayed pickup from the material availability time.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-42
+ 4 !,
/%
/
SAP AG 2008
When defining Pickup/delivery Windows you can also specify the conditions under which the constraints apply.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-43
! /
!
! 42 !
/
Delivery as suggested by optimizer. Delivery as requested by customer.
Time windows as observed during optimization.
SAP AG 2008
Use this feature to display all active time windows for a selected freight unit on the fly . Understand why the optimizer scheduled a freight unit in a certain way.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-44
+ 4 !,
/5
0
/
You should now be able to: Create pickup/delivery windows to be used by the optimizer.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-45
Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Lesson 1: General/Basic Settings Lesson 2: Conditions Lesson 3: Compatibility/Incompatibility Lesson 4: Pickup/Delivery Windows Lesson 5: Scheduling
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-46
0
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand the methods that can be used to determine the various delivery scheduling dates that are used in the optimization process. Configure the TP/VS system to perform configuration process scheduling (CPS).
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-47
"#
!
In implementing TP/VS, the methods that can be used to calculate delivery scheduling dates must be understood so that they can be properly applied.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-48
'
%
/
,. 8
/
Material availability date (MAD) is calculated from the customer' s requested delivery date, taking into account how much time is needed for delivery-related procedures, such as picking, packing, loading, and transportation Forward Scheduling If backward scheduling determines a date in the past as the date on which a schedule line becomes due for shipping or if the material will not be available on the date calculated, the system automatically carries out forward scheduling to determine the earliest possible shipping deadline. SCM TP/VS displays the confirmed delivery data (equal RDD if no forward scheduling occurs) and the MAD.
SAP AG 2008
The system automatically calculates the goods issue date by taking into account the following factors: •
The requested delivery date
•
The pick/pack time
•
The loading time
•
The transit time
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-49
/
$% +2 +,
(
SAP AG 2008
This diagram represents the standard delivery scheduling in ERP and GATP-TP/VS (SCHEDL). The following dates can be calculated using the GATP/TP/VS Configurable Process Scheduling (CPS) or they can be determined in the ERP system using the standard delivery scheduling logic and lead times: • • • • • •
Transportation Planning Date Material Availability Date (MAD) Loading Date Goods Issue Date Requested (Confirmed) Delivery Date (RDD) Unloading Date (Only computed in TP/VS Scheduling)
In case of GATP (APO-TP/VS): •
The delivery scheduling dates are computed based on the condition technique and master data entered in TP/VS or GATP. There is a predefined scheduling procedure, SCHEDL, that contains the condition types and access sequences that represents the scheduling dates to be computed.
•
The pre-configured condition types and access sequences are: LEAD – Used to compute the transportation planning lead time (Normally, not used with TP/VS). PICK - Used to compute the picking lead time. LOAD – Used to compute the loading time TRAN - Used to compute the transit time (Not used with TP/VS). TP/VS computes this time based on the data from the transportation lane and means of transport. UNLD - Used to compute the unloading time.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-50
/
".+ )
SAP AG 2008
This diagram represents the standard delivery scheduling in ERP and GATP-TP/VS (SCHEDL). The following dates can be calculated using the GATP/TP/VS Configurable process Scheduling (CPS) or they can be determined in the ERP system using the standard delivery scheduling logic and lead times: • • • • • •
Transportation Planning Date Material Availability Date (MAD) Loading Date Goods Issue Date Requested (Confirmed) Delivery Date (RDD) Unloading Date (Only computed in TP/VS Scheduling)
In case the of ATP (ERP): •
If ERP delivery scheduling is used the following lead times are used to compute the delivery scheduling dates: - The transit time is the time in days that is required to deliver goods from your premises to the customer location. It is defined for a route.
- The loading time is the time in days that is required for loading a delivery item. It is determined from the shipping point, the route, and the loading group of the material.
- The pick/pack time is the time in days that is required for allocating goods to a delivery as well as the time in days
that is required for picking and packing. It is calculated using the shipping point, the route, and the weight group of the order item. - The transportation planning lead-time is the time in days that is needed to organize the shipping of the goods. This might include booking a ship and reserving a truck from a forwarding agent. It is defined for a route. - In ERP delivery scheduling, there is no ability to compute an Unloading Date.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-51
+ 4
,0
,
$% +2 +, Access Seq. Configuration for ‘LOAD’ time that defines the weight group.
Loading time for each weight group
Calculated Loading Time, based on weight group SAP AG 2008
A combination of defined fields can be used to determine the duration for Picking (PICK), Loading (LOAD) and Unloading (UNLD). These fields are predefined as condition types in the SCHEDL GATP-TP/VS scheduling procedure provided by SAP. Each of these predefined condition types has a corresponding access sequence. In the access sequence configuration, keys that define the fields that are to be used to determine the duration times are specified. Each key is defined by creating a corresponding condition table in the scheduling configuration. You can define the appropriate keys to determine the most accurate duration.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-52
0
/
You should now be able to: Understand the methods that can be used to determine the various delivery scheduling dates that are used in the optimization process. Configure the TP/VS system to perform configuration process scheduling (CPS).
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-53
/
You are now able to: Perform the basic customizing settings required to use the SCM TP/VS component in vehicle scheduling. Understand the use of conditions in various TP/VS functions. Create Pickup/Delivery windows. Set up compatibility and incompatibility checking for the optimization process. Understand the use of delivery scheduling and be able to configure the TP/VS system to use configurable process scheduling (CPS).
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-54
Exercises Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Topic: Shipment Type Determination At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Make the required settings in APO customizing to determine the ERP Transportation Shipment Types. After shipments are planned in TP/VS, they will be "published" and transferred to the ERP System for execution. A shipment type must be determined for each planned shipment for the process to work properly. You will make the required setting for the assignment of the ERP shipment types.
1-1
Update the Shipment Type determination table to assign the Shipment Types you created in the ERP System, AI## and AO##. There are also three shipment types that have previously been created for use in multi-modal shipments. You will assign these to your corresponding means of transports. 1-1-1 Create an entry in the Shipment Type Determination table for each of your Means of Transports, FTL## and LTL## for the Shipment Types AI## and AO##. For the means of transport RAIL##, SHIP## and TRK## assign shipment types VSOR, VSOS, VSOT respectively. The RAIL##, SHIP## and TRK## means of transport will be used only in a multi-modal transportation scenario and will be assigned only to shipment types used for outbound shipments. The table below summarizes the use and assignments of the means of transports you will be using. Use the Logical System Number of the ERP System.
© SAP AG
Means of Transport
Inbound/Outbound
Shipment Type
FTL##
I
AI##
FTL##
O
AO##
LTL##
I
AI##
LTL##
O
AO##
RAIL##
O
VSOR
SHIP##
O
VSOS
TRK##
O
VSOT
SCM612
7-55
Exercises Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Topic: Mapping Table for Vehicles At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Perform the APO customizing required to map the Transportation Methods to the corresponding Packaging Material that represent the Methods of Transport in ERP. Your business processes include packing materials from the deliveries into handling units that will be "packed" into the method of transportation. To facilitate this you want the shipment documents to include a packaging material that represents the trailer, container, or other unit of transportation. This is sometimes called the “Top” HU. To have the "packaging material" created automatically when the shipment document is transferred to ERP you will have to update the Mapping Table for Vehicles.
2-1
Create an entry in the Mapping Table for Vehicles for the packaging materials created in ERP, FTL-##, LTL-##, SHIP-## that represent the means of transport FTL##, LTL##, and SHIP## respectively. The packaging materials created in ERP to represent the “Top” HU for a shipment are listed in the following table: ERP Packaging Material
Means of Transport
FTL-##
FTL##
LTL-##
LTL##
SHIP-##
SHIP##
Note: The alphabetic characters in the material number in the ExtVehDesc field must be entered in all capital letters.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-56
Exercises Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Topic: Compatibilities/Incompatibilities At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Perform the customizing necessary to set up compatibility/incompatibility checking required in many shipment planning scenarios. You must first set up a compatibility type in customizing that defines the fields to be used in compatibility/incompatibility checking. Then in the TP/VS application you can use the compatibility type to set up the actual values to be used in compatibility checking. In your transportation environment you have agreements with your customers in which you agree to pay the cost of freight and insurance and others in which the customer agrees to pay these costs from a particular transportation point. You use the incoterms field to define these relationships. For example customers for whom you pay the costs of transporting to the dock may be FOB, whereas a customer who assumes the cost of transportation from the shipping point may be coded with EXW. Merchandise with differing incoterms, in many cases must not be in the same shipment.
3-1
Create a Compatibility Type in customizing to check the compatibility based on the Incoterms 1 field (EXW, FOB, CIF, etc.). Then set up an incompatibility rule that can be used by the optimizer to insure that the incompatibility is enforced when shipments are planned. You will do the following: 1.
Create Compatibility Type code = (20 + ##) that can be used to check the incompatibility between two ‘Incoterms 1’ fields.
2.
Use the Compatibility Type code you created to check the compatibility rule such that the Incoterms 1 values CIF and EXW are incompatible. You will temporarily assign the incompatibility rule to an unused optimization profile (‘VS01’) until you are ready to use it.
3.
You will test the rule in a future exercise.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-57
Exercises Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Topic: Conditions At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Define and use conditions in Delivery/Pickup Windows, selection of freight units in vehicle scheduling, and compatibility checking. Since you are global enterprise, you have shipment planning that involves not only domestic shipments but international as well. You want to be able to plan domestic shipments differently from international, multi-modal shipments. Use of conditions can make this process simpler.
4-1
4-2
Your Dallas DC, 35## ships both domestically and internationally. You will create a Condition that can be used to select only the international demand from the sales orders that are shipped from Dallas. 1.
Create a condition rule (GR##-INTL) that uses the source location, Dallas DC 35##, and the destination customer, T-S44A##, as the filtering rule.
2.
You will assign this rule to an optimization profile later in the course
You have shipping plants in Germany (10## and 12##) for which you will be doing transportation planning using the TP/VS planning process. You want to be able to select only rush orders for planning from your two plants, Hamburg (10##) and Dresden (12##). A rush order from these two plants will have a Shipping Condition of ‘01’ or ‘10’. 1.
Create a condition rule (GR##-RUSH) that uses the conditions outlined above in selecting freight units for planning.
2.
You will assign this rule to an optimization profile later in the course,
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-58
Solutions Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Topic: Shipment Type Determination 1-1
Update the Shipment Type determination table to assign the Shipment Types you created in the ERP System, AI## and AO##. There are also three shipment types that have previously been created for use in multi-modal shipments. You will assign these to your corresponding means of transports. 1-1-1 Create an entry in the Shipment Type Determination table for each of your Means of Transports, FTL## and LTL## for the Shipment Types AI## and AO##. For the means of transport RAIL##, SHIP## and TRK## assign shipment types VSOR, VSOS, VSOT respectively. The RAIL##, SHIP## and TRK## means of transport will be used only in a multi-modal transportation scenario and will be assigned only to shipment types used for outbound shipments. The table below summarizes the use and assignments of the means of transports you will be using. Use the Logical System Number of the ERP System.
© SAP AG
Means of Transport
Inbound/Outbound
Shipment Type
FTL##
I
AI##
FTL##
O
AO##
LTL##
I
AI##
LTL##
O
AO##
RAIL##
O
VSOR
SHIP##
O
VSOS
TRK##
O
VSOT
a
Navigate to SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) → Interfaces → Determine Shipment Type
b
Select New Entries button.
c
Make an entry in the table for each entry in the table above. Your instructor will supply you with the Logical System Number to use in each entry.
d
Carefully check each entry. The system cannot check the correctness of the shipment type in the ERP system during the update of this table.
e
Choose Save
.
f
Choose Exit
. SCM612
7-59
Solutions Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Topic: Mapping Table for Vehicles 2-1
Create an entry in the Mapping Table for Vehicles for the packaging materials created in ERP, FTL-##, LTL-##, SHIP-## that represent the means of transport FTL##, LTL##, and SHIP## respectively. The packaging materials created in ERP to represent the “Top” HU for a shipment are listed in the following table: ExtVehDesc
Means of Trans.
FTL-##
FTL##
LTL-##
LTL##
SHIP-##
SHIP##
Note: The alphabetic characters in the material number in the ExtVehDesc field must be entered in all capital letters.
© SAP AG
a
Navigate to SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) → Interfaces → Maintain Mapping Table for Vehicles
b
Select New Entries button.
c
Enter the ExtVehDesc from the table above in all caps.
d.
Enter the Logical System Number provided by your instructor (e.g. T90CLNT090).
e
Enter the Means of Trans. From the table above.
f
Repeat steps c. thru e. for all remaining entries in the table above.
g
Choose Enter
h
Choose Save
i
Select Exit
. . .
SCM612
7-60
Solutions Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Topic: Compatibilities/Incompatibilities 3-1
Create a Compatibility Type in customizing to check the compatibility based on the Incoterms 1 field (EXW, FOB, CIF, etc.). Then set up an incompatibility rule that can be used by the optimizer to insure that the incompatibility is enforced when shipments are planned. You will do the following: 3-1-1 Create Compatibility Type code = (20 + ##) that can be used to check the incompatibility between two ‘Incoterms 1’ fields.
© SAP AG
a
Navigate to SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) → Optimizer → Define Compatibility Types
b
If the screen is in Display View, Select Change/Display
c
Select the New Entries button.
d
Define the Compatibility Type by entering the data from the table below: Comp. Type
(20 + ##)
Text
Gr ## Incoterms check
Compatibility Area
All
Field1 Name
INCO1
Object 1 Type
O – Order/Freight Unit
Field2 Name
INCO1
Object 2 Type
O – Order/Freight Unit
Comp. Level
Default
e
Select Enter
.
f
Choose Save
.
g
Select Exit
.
.
SCM612
7-61
3-1-2 Use the Compatibility Type code you created to check the compatibility rule such that the Incoterms 1 values CIF and EXW are incompatible. You will temporarily assign the incompatibility rule to optimization profile ‘VS01’ until you are ready to use it. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment Current Settings Transportation Optimization Define Compatibilities
b
Select your Compatibility Type from the drop-down list using the Select Compatibility Type field.
c
Select the Switch to Change Mode
d
Select the New Entries
e
Enter the following data:
icon.
icon.
Incoterms Part 1
EXW
Incoterms Part 1
CIF
Compatibility
Incompatible
Opt. Profile
VS01
f
Choose Enter
g
Select Save
.
h
Select Exit
.
.
3-1-3. You will test the rule in a future exercise.
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-62
Solutions Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS): Basic Settings Topic: Conditions 4-1
Your Dallas DC, 35## ships both domestically and internationally. You will create a Condition that can be used to select only the international demand from the sales orders that are shipped from Dallas. 1.
Create a condition rule (GR##-INTL) that uses the source location, Dallas DC 35##, and the destination customer, T-S44A##, as the filtering rule. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment Current Settings Transportation Optimization Define Conditions
b
Select the Switch to Change Mode
c
Choose the New Entries
d
Enter ‘GR##-INTL’ in the Create Condition pop-up dialog.
e
Select Continue
f
Enter the data from the table below:
icon.
icon.
.
Description
Gr ## Intl from DC 35##
Validity Period
Fr. Today’s Date
To: 12/31/9999
Field1
OLOCFROM
From: 35##
Field2
OLOCTO
From: T-S44A##
Restriction Type
AND all Fields
Selection Options:
2.
© SAP AG
g
Select Enter
h
Select Save
. .
You will assign this rule to an optimization profile later in the course
SCM612
7-63
4-2
You have shipping plants in Germany (10## and 12##) for which you will be doing transportation planning using the TP/VS planning process. You want to be able to select only rush orders for planning from your two plants, Hamburg (10##) and Dresden (12##). A rush order from these two plants will have a Shipping Condition of ‘01’ or ‘10’. 1.
Create a condition rule (GR##-RUSH) that uses the conditions outlined above in selecting freight units for planning. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment Current Settings Transportation Optimization Define Conditions
b
Select the Switch to Change Mode
c
Choose the New Entries
d
Enter ‘GR##-RUSH’ in the Create Condition pop-up dialog.
e
Select Continue
f
Enter the data from the table below:
icon.
icon.
.
Description
Gr ## Rush Orders
Validity Period
Fr. Today’s Date
To: 12/31/9999
g
In the first Select Options field enter, or choose from the dropdown list, ‘OLOCFROM’ (Source Location)
h
Select the Select Options
i
In the Restrictions dialog, enter your two plants in the Single Value column: 10## and 12##.
j
Choose Copy
k
On the next line, enter ‘OVSBED’ (Shipping Conditions), or choose it from the dropdown list.
l
Select the Select Options
button.
.
button.
m In the Restrictions dialog, enter your two shipping conditions in the Single Value column: 01 and 10.
2.
© SAP AG
n
Choose Copy
.
o
In the Restriction Type field, select ‘AND All fields’.
p
Choose Save
.
q
Choose Exit
.
You will assign this rule to an optimization profile later in the course.
SCM612
7-64
© SAP AG
SCM612
7-65
Contents: The optimization process flow in TP/VS The VSR Optimizer Creating the Cost Profile Creating the VS Alert Profile Creating the Optimization Profile Interactive Planning Releasing and Publishing Planned Deliveries and Shipments
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-1
At the conclusion of this unit, you will be able to: Describe the TP/VS optimization process and identify the objectives of the optimization process. Create Cost, Alert and Optimization profiles Perform VS Interactive Planning Create and use order splitting profiles Perform shipment release and publication Identify other functions and features related to Vehicle Scheduling.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-2
Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Lesson 1: VS Optimization Lesson 2: Profiles in TP/VS Lesson 3: Interactive Planning Lesson 4: Order Splitting Lesson 5: Shipment Release and Publication Lesson 6: Other Functions/Features
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-3
The PC electronics manufacturer will use TP/VS to plan inbound and outbound shipments. Before planning can begin, the cost and optimization profiles must be created. To monitor various exception situations that can occur during the planning and tendering process you want to create an Alert Profile to report these exceptions.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-4
Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Lesson 1: VS Optimization Lesson 2: Profiles in TP/VS Lesson 3: Interactive Planning Lesson 4: Order Splitting Lesson 5: Shipment Release and Publication Lesson 6: Other Functions/Features
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-5
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the overall VS Optimization process Understand the fundamentals of how the VSR Optimizer works and its objectives. Describe constraints used in the optimization process. Explain the concept and use of freight units (FU).
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-6
!"
VS Optimization is the central process in TP/VS. It is critical that the project team understand the fundamental concepts surrounding the vehicle scheduling function and the related terminology.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-7
#
%$$
&
Configuration
Master Data
Modeling
Plan Shipments Manually Optimizer Dynamic Route Determination Create/Transfer Shipments
Transportation Service Provider Selection
Create/Transfer Deliveries
Releasing Shipments and TSP Tendering
SAP AG 2008
After the basic TP/VS customizing, establishment of the appropriate master data and creation of the planning and cost profiles, the optimization of transportation demands may be performed. This is called the “optimization” process. It may be performed interactively or in background. Backorder processing carried out in the global ATP component can affect the vehicle scheduling determination in TP/VS. Upon completion of the planning for one or more shipments, automatic carrier selection may be performed. Based on the carrier selection profile a carrier will be assigned to each shipment selected. To transfer planned shipments and their corresponding delivery documents to the OLTP or ERP system for execution, the process of “publishing” must be performed first. An optional process that is part of the collaborative planning strategy of supply chain management is carrier tendering. The carrier tendering process, available in different scenarios, gives the shipper the ability to notify potential carriers of the availability of a shipment and its characteristics. The carrier, in turn, can accept or decline the tender offer and report that decision back to the shipper using various automated techniques. After shipments are published, they and their related delivery documents can be transferred to the OLTP or ERP System for execution. This step represents the final process in the process flow.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-8
#
%$$
'
Create ERP Sales Order
Call the dynamic route determination
Build Freight Units and Planned Shipments
Transfer ERP Sales Order to APO via CIF
Build Freight Units
OPTIMIZER Release Shipment
Create Deliveries
Allocate TSP
CS-Optimizer
Transfer Shipment to ERP via CIF
Allocate Vehicle Resource, Consolidate, Route Opt., Scheduling Create Planned Shipments
Adjust / Optimize Shipment
SAP AG 2008
Sales orders are created in the ERP System and then transferred to SCM via the CIF. The transactions required to do so are CFM1 for creating an integration model and CFM2 for activating and deactivating the integration model. VS consists of a two-step optimization process: •
1. Optimization on the basis of planning costs: Using an optimization and cost profile, the optimizer decides what has to be transported by which method/vehicle, when it needs to be transported and over what transportation lane the shipment should be taken.
•
2. Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection: On the basis of a TSP selection parameters a carrier is assigned based on real freight costs, business share and/or priority.
After the optimization processes have been completed, the shipments and related delivery documents are “published” and transferred to the OLTP-ERP system.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-9
(
')
*+
The problem of the Traveling Salesman consists in the detection of the shortest way (or one of the shortest ways), which connects a number of locations, like the towns, a traveling salesman has to visit on his sales tour.
SAP AG 2008
The Traveling Salesman Problem belongs to a group of problems that cannot be solved optimally in a reasonable time (NP-complete problems). The Vehicle Scheduling Problem in TP/VS is a generalization of the Traveling Salesman Problem and is therefore even harder to solve. The algorithm uses search strategies to try and find a solution which is as good as possible, during the given runtime. Usually, the solution found is not necessarily optimal.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-10
,
(
VSR Optimizer: Vehicle Scheduling and Routing Optimizer Goal: Determine transportation plan that minimizes total costs and satisfies all constraints. Decisions: per order: deliver or not? per delivered order: select path through hub network (legs) per selected leg: select vehicle per vehicle: select relative ordering of activities (= routing) assign start time to each activity (= scheduling) Total costs = weighted sum of: order costs (non-delivery, earliness, lateness), and vehicle costs (fixed, duration, stops, quantity, distance, dist cost)
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-11
(
#
$
Real World Problem
Vehicle Scheduling and Routing Problem
Outbound
m vehicles
1
4
Replenishment
2
capacity c
6
5 7
Inbound
3
8
demand bj
9 time window [lj,rj]
time window [l,r] supply a
The optimizer creates a mathematical model out of the “real world problem”
SAP AG 2008
The Vehicle Scheduling and Routing Problem is a significant extension of classical vehicle scheduling problem The Vehicle scheduling problem….. Order-based model •
Source location and destination location per order (= Pickup and delivery problem)
•
Quantity regarding loading dimensions (tons, m3, ...)
•
Order characteristics (chemicals, food, frozen, ...)
•
Service times for loading and unloading (depends on vehicle)
• Cost are defined for not delivering an order Hard and soft time constraints per order • declared for pickup activity and delivery activity Delivery activity requires inbound resource at source location •
Opening hours
• Capacities Pickup activity requires outbound resource at destination location •
Opening hours
•
Capacities
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-12
(-
Schedules of Vehicle Types
Wait Time
Handling Resources
Vehicle Capacity Depot Location Pickup / Delivery Time Windows
Stay Time
Optimizer constraints
Opening Hours of Locations Min / Maximum Storage Time at Hub
(In-)Compatibilities Loading/ Unloading Durations Conditions Limits on Distance, Duration, Stopovers
Load Level of Vehicle
SAP AG 2008
Incompatibilities are considered as hard constraints in the optimizer. The maximum storage time at location is the time a freight unit may be stored at a location. This is defined in the Location master (‘TP/VS’ tab, ‘Goods wait time’). This constraint is used only for crossdocking locations. Load/Unload handling resources and Opening hours are defined in the ‘Resources’ tab of the Location master: • You specify the resource used to load and unload a vehicle during a delivery process. You must also define the resource consumption (in pieces), which are required for delivery. Docks, forklifts...each freight unit uses the same capacity, independent of its size; the capacity is used during the load/unload time. • Opening hours are also defined in the ‘Resources’ tab of the Location master. You have to indicate the resource for which the opening times of this location are maintained. The break times of the resource define when the location is not available. • You can either define load/unloading times or opening hours but not both. Note: Picking lead time as well as transportation creation time which are defined in the ‘TP/VS’ tab of the location master are not relevant for the TP/VS optimizer. • Picking lead time is the time required to make an order from the SCM system available before the material availability date of the ERP system, so that picking can take place in the ERP system based on the corresponding deliveries. •
Transportation creation time is the time required for the transportation documents to be transferred from SCM to the ERP system, so that the appropriate shipment documents can be created before loading begins.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-13
(
-
$
.
1. ABAP Optimizer pre-processing Data selection Creation of input data for optimizer Order split User Exit available
2. C++ Optimizer pre-processing Which orders cannot be delivered at all? Which order can be processed by which vehicle?
SAP AG 2008
Before the optimizer starts the TP/VS preprocessing (ABAP) extracts the information from the SCM system and creates the required input for the optimizer. Certain business logic is already applied in the optimizer preprocessing for example the order split functionality. SAP offers before and after the optimization BADI‘s to influence the input and output of the optimizer. After the optimization the optimizer post-processing save the results of the optimizer. The Optimizer works on the basis of a step-by-step-search technique: •
First solution Generator: The term evolutionary indicates that the optimizer processes a population of alternative transportation plans, which are evolved over time by iterative selection ("survival of the fittest") and variation. In the first step, the population is filled with five different transportation plans produced by greedy insertion heuristics. Such a greedy insertion heuristics iteratively distributes the orders on the vehicles; for each order, the cheapest insertion position (defined by vehicle and position on the vehicle's route) is chosen. This general principle is frequently called greedy algorithm, because each separate decision is made in a greedy fashion, always choosing the best local option.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-14
(
-
$
/
3. C++ Optimizer Evolutionary local search (ELS) Population is seeded by greedy insertion heuristics Stochastic search method, based on iterative variation and selection Uses iterated local search inside variation
4. C++ Optimizer Post-processing Adjustments of results due to to not-planning relevant restrictions
5. ABAP Optimizer Post-processing User exit available Write optimizer result back to SCM system Order merge
SAP AG 2008
The Optimizer works on the basis of a step-by-step-search technique: •
Local improvement: The worst two of this population are eliminated, and further search works on a population of size three. Each of the transportation plans in the current population is modified by some random modifications (e.g. drop orders from vehicle), followed by local search (insert orders somewhere else, re-arrange routing or scheduling on a vehicle, etc.) to make the plan locally optimal (i.e. it cannot be further improved by small modifications like e.g. swapping two elements in a route).
•
Modifies the current solution ('move') and accepts the modified solution, if cost criteria is met. Phase 1: Greedy Search Only cost improving moves are accepted Phase 2: Non-Improvement-Moves Frequent moves are penalized; non-improving moves are accepted
•
From time to time, some bad plans are replaced by better ones found previously, in order to reintensify the search around those better ones. This basic idea is called iterated local search, and in our case it represents the selection pressure of evolution.
•
Best solution found during runtime is returned.
The population of the evolutionary local search is currently 3. The 3 solutions are evaluated simultaneously. Example for step 4 is the assignment of the relationship loading / unloading activity and transportation activity. If between the loading – transportation and unloading activity waiting time occurs then the transportation activity is assigned directly after the loading activity. © SAP AG
SCM612
8-15
(
-
$
00
Costs Phase 2: Non-Improvement Moves First Solution
Phase 1: Greedy Search
Solution Runtime
SAP AG 2008
Vehicle Scheduling Optimization: What does it do? •
The optimizer tries to solve the following problem: Assignment of freight units to vehicles and determination of a good delivery order for each vehicle, so that total transportation costs are minimized.
•
It has to consider several constraints (vehicle capacity constraints, opening hours...).
•
It has to take penalty costs into account as part of the total transportation cost.
What the optimizer does not do: •
Transportation chains with more than 2 reloading points; parallel chains
•
Handling resource optimization
•
Variable breaks (Resources, Vehicles)
•
Determination of shortest paths
•
Vehicle space optimization
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-16
(
(
3,00E+08
2,50E+08
2,00E+08
C O S T
1,50E+08
1,00E+08
5,00E+07
01:21:43
01:15:32
01:03:11
01:09:26
01:00:55
00:49:35
00:51:57
00:46:43
00:44:06
00:32:16
00:26:26
00:25:25
00:21:43
00:17:38
00:15:03
00:03:08
00:11:25
00:01:15
00:02:02
00:00:37
00:00:19
00:00:00
00:00:10
0,00E+00
Elapsed Run Time SAP AG 2008
Duration of an optimization run depends on the following factors: •
Number of transportation demand (sales orders, purchase orders, stock transport orders, deliveries, etc.)
•
Number of resources (Vehicle Resources, Handling Resources)
•
Constraints and costs: For an optimization run, different constraints have to be considered for planning. There is a difference between “hard” and “soft” constraints:
- During an optimization run hard constraints cannot be exceeded. An example of a hard constraint is the capacity of a vehicle resource. - The Optimizer tries to observe soft constraints such as the requirement date of a sales order item. Violation of soft constraints is possible and takes into account the penalties, e.g. for early/late delivery. •
Schedules (train, ship, ...)
•
Number of depot locations (return trips for own vehicles)
•
Compatibilities and Incompatibilities btw. any two field from the field catalogue
•
Maximum time a freight unit may be stored at a location (only relevant for cross docking locations)
•
Limits on distance, duration, stopovers
•
Opening hours
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-17
& TP/VS plans with freight units (FU) A freight unit can be e.g.: Sales order Purchase order Purchase requisition Stock transport order Return Delivery Represents goods that are to be transported together Requires always a ship-from and a ship-to location Freight units are the input for TP/VS planning Two types of freight units exist: Assigned to a shipment Not assigned to a shipment
SAP AG 2008
Planning object in the Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component that represents the quantities to be delivered with shipments, and that forms the basis of planning and optimization. A freight unit can consist of one or more order items/schedule lines or delivery items.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-18
$ Planned shipments consists of Freight Units (FU’s). Planned shipments can be created Manually Assignment of unassigned FU to resources Optimizer Selection of the FU to be optimized C++ SAP optimizer Dynamic route determination At sales order entry in ERP
SAP AG 2008
The interactive planning can be used to plan shipments for orders and deliveries and to process them manually. The optimization can be used to optimize the planning of shipments on the basis of costs and to determine optimal delivery sequences and transportation dates/times. The optimization can be started from interactive planning or scheduled it in the background. Optimization results can be processed in interactive planning. The dynamic route determination performs automatic transportation planning and scheduling without calling the optimizer. As a result, shipment proposals are calculated with their corresponding dates/times. The ERP system automatically triggers dynamic route determination when a sales order is created or changed.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-19
1
You should now be able to: Describe the overall VS Optimization process Understand the fundamentals of how the VSR Optimizer works and its objectives. Describe constraints used in the optimization process. Explain the concept and use of freight units (FU).
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-20
Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Lesson 1: VS Optimization Lesson 2: Profiles in TP/VS Lesson 3: Interactive Planning Lesson 4: Order Splitting Lesson 5: Shipment Release and Publication Lesson 6: Other Functions/Features
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-21
$
,
#
%$After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the use of a Cost profile in the optimization process. Create a Cost profile. Describe the purpose of a TP/VS Alert profile and create an Alert profile. Explain the purpose of an Optimization profile and create an Optimization profile.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-22
$
,
#
%$!"
Before vehicle scheduling can be performed, there are profiles that must be created. These profiles supply the planning costs of various constraints to the VSR Optimizer, they can inform the VSR Optimizer of various planning alerts to monitor, and an optimization profile must be created that represents a planning scenario.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-23
$
,
,
#
%$Cost profile Alert profile Optimization profile
SAP AG 2008
Cost profile •
Transportation-related costs to be considered by the VSR optimizer.
•
The costs entered in the Cost profile are planning costs, they are not “real” costs, they are relative costs to be used by the optimizer.
Alert profile
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-24
-
$
,
GENERAL
LOCATION
TRANSPORTATION
DIMENSION
TRANSPORTATION LANE
SAP AG 2008
Planning costs to be used during an optimization run are defined using a Cost Profile. Costs are not “real” costs, they are relative costs to be used by the optimizer. Location costs: • • • • •
Unit for delay / early delivery is also maintained Delay costs are the costs imposed as a penalty for delayed delivery or pickup Premature costs are the costs imposed as a penalty for premature delivery or pickup Non-delivery costs are the costs imposed as a penalty for non-delivery Delay, premature and non-delivery costs can be defined location dependent. For each location a certain priority can be defined, and for each priority different penalty costs can be specified
Transportation costs: •
Fixed transportation costs are the one-off costs incurred by using a means of transport
Dimension costs: •
Variable transportation costs are maintained per means of transport
•
Possible dimensions are: Quantity, Duration, Distance and Stop-Offs
•
Definition of maximum distance, duration , number of stop-overs
Transportation Lane: •
In the dimension costs tab the costs dimension has to be set to: Transportation lane
•
Transportation costs have to be maintained for the unit of measure defined in the dimension tab
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-25
$
1-
$
1
Customer Location Master
Cost Profile
SAP AG 2008
Delay, Premature and non-delivery costs can be defined location dependent. For each location a certain priority can be defined, and for each priority different penalty costs can be specified. Note: The TP/VS optimizer does not use the delay/non-delivery costs which are defined in the Location Product master. Those costs are only used by SNP. Note: Although the penalty costs are maintained on a “DAY” basis. For the calculation of the penalty costs in the objective function, they are re-calculated in seconds. The priority in the ‘General’ tab of the location master data corresponds to the priority on the 'Location' tab in Cost profile. Orders for locations with a certain priority receive the appropriate penalty costs for non-delivery or delayed delivery. Have you maintained a delivery priority in your order, this priority is taken into account. If you do not enter a value, the system automatically assigns the value ‘0’. In TP/VS the priority depends on your maintained costs, other applications interprets the higher the number entered, the lower the priority.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-26
2
-
Lane 1
Loc. A
$
,
Lane 2
Lane 3
Loc. B
Loc. C
Stopover 1
Stopover 2
Loc. D
+1
SAP AG 2008
Number of stopovers: Depot Customer A Customer B Customer C => 2 stopovers (source and target location in a route are not taken into account for calculating the number of stopovers). You have to maintain the number of stopovers + 1. In an easy way you can say, that you have to maintain the number of lanes.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-27
-
$
,
/
LOAD COSTS
COST FUNCTION
WAIT TIME
COST FACTORS
MAXIMUM LENGTH OF STAY
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-28
The system should avoid transports if a certain load level has not been reached If this minimum load level is not reached then the system should not create a transport and should wait until this level has been reached. Additional piecewise linear loading costs to increase truck usage
Load costs
Loading is cost optimal as of a certain weight
Penalty Costs 1500 Penalty costs decreases by -1 per KG from 2000 kg to 2500 kg
Penalty Costs (Min. Load) 500
weight 2000 KG
2500 KG
SAP AG 2008
Loading costs are supported by the optimizer and the dynamic route determination. If the sum of non-delivery costs are higher than the loading costs, then the optimizer will still build non-optimal loads. Calculation is based on the total capacity requirements assigned to a vehicle within the planning horizon. Only one loading dimension is supported per Means of Transport, e.g. weight or volume. Note: Since the Dynamic Route determination is always considering all alternatives, irrespective of the costs, also shipments with very high load costs would be displayed.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-29
-
'3
(
Business Requirement: The system should normally plan the vehicles with a capacity of X. In case the demand is higher then the actual normal transportation capacity the vehicles can (exceptionally) get overloaded. Modeling: Additional piecewise linear loading costs to avoid usage of maximum capacity
Maximum capacity
Load costs Loading is very costly as of a certain weight Normal capacity
X
Weight
SAP AG 2008
Loading costs are supported by the optimizer and the dynamic route determination. If the sum of non-delivery costs are higher then the loading costs then the optimizer will still build nonoptimal loads Calculation is based on the total capacity requirements assigned to a vehicle within the planning horizon Only one loading dimension is supported per Means of Transport, e.g. weight or volume. Note: Since the Dynamic Route determination is always considering all alternatives, irrespective of the costs, also shipments with very high load costs would be displayed.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-30
4
# Wait time can be defined per location / means of transport Vehicles or containers may be loaded and then put into a waiting area for hours or days before the actual shipment starts Wait time can be defined in the VS cost profile Time between loading end and transportation start Used by optimizer and visible in the planning board
SAP AG 2008
Wait time can also be defined for a means of transport hierarchy. Access sequence will look for a record in the following order: •
Location / MOT
•
MOT
•
Location
•
Location and MOT initial
Wait time is visible in the planning board as a space. Wait time cannot be maintained in Manual Planning and is not used in the Dynamic Route Determination.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-31
3 "
,
1
Defines the duration during that the location can be visited Avoid idle time on certain locations Forces the creation of smaller shipments if the loading time is very long
SAP AG 2008
Access sequence will look for a record in the following order: •
Location / MOT
•
MOT
•
Location
•
Location and MOT initial
Scenarios: •
Loading (Start Location) Time between start of the first loading activities and the time when the transport activity starts
•
Stop (Break at one location): Time between the end of the last transport activity and the next transport activity
•
Transit Location (Hub): Time between transportation activity and last unloading activity and time between first loading activity and the next transport activity
•
Unloading (Target location): Time between end of transport activity and end of last unloading activity
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-32
!
%
SAP AG 2008
Cost profile allows to define the earliness / lateness costs per cost profile, MOT or MOT Grouping Cost multipliers are maintained in the cost profile (early pick, late pick, early delivery, late delivery) Example: late pickup is not desired for rail transports while late pickup is no problem for Trucks.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-33
5
$
,
SAP AG 2008
Maintain an alert profile if you want to track Vehicle Scheduling alerts in APO. The profile allows you to maintain a user-specific selection of alerts corresponding to your area of responsibility. To set up Alerts for TP/VS choose SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Chain Monitoring Current Settings Set Alert Monitor or choose transaction code /SAPAPO/AMON_SETTING.
Supply
Determine planning version and time frame for alert selection in initial settings screen. If no version is defined, the system considers the version of the VS optimization profile Select the ‘VS‘ tab, name your alert profile and choose the alerts you want to use. You also have to assign the relevant optimization profile. Save and go back.. You can also enter your alert profile in optimization profiles. Assign your alert profile to the version-dependent alert selection. Save. Note: Keep alerts to a minimum. Too many alerts slow performance
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-34
$
,
'6
SAP AG 2008
The VS Optimization Profile is the central element in TP/VS. It provide the following major data to the optimizer: Selection of resources, selection of freight units, optimizer settings, horizons, TSP selection parameters and cost and alert profiles. There are eight tabs to maintain settings for the optimization profile: •
General – Contains the Planning Version, Alert Profile to be used, the Cost profile to be used, the maximum time, in seconds, that the optimizer is to run for this profile.
•
Horizons – Used to specify the Planning and Demand Horizon data.
•
ATP Categories – Used to select the ATP categories of the input demand to be selected for optimization.
•
Locations – Used to select the locations of the demand to be included in the optimization.
•
Resources – In this tab the vehicle resources available to the planned shipments are selected.
•
Advanced Order Selection– Contains additional fields that can be used to further filter the input demand to the optimizer. It also contains Conditions data that can be used to further filter the demand.
•
Additional – Used to specify user-created Planning Board profile and other Optimization settings that are normally not required.
The VS Optimizer can be started from the optimization profile.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-35
$
,
')
SAP AG 2008
The planning horizon contains information about when can a shipment be created You can define the planning horizon and the demand horizon as fixed or relative: •
Fixed: You define the planning horizon precisely by defining a start and end date and a start and end time.
•
Relative: You do not define the planning horizon with precise dates and times, but specify instead a duration in days starting from the current date. The system then automatically determines the start and end date and the start and end time.
The demand horizon specifies which orders (for example, sales orders and purchase orders) and deliveries are included in planning. The system chooses all orders and deliveries whose requested delivery date lies within the demand horizon. You can also specify that the system selects the orders based on the material availability date. Selection According to Mat. Avail Date: Controls if order selection in sales orders and deliveries is executed according to the material availability date (indicator set) or according to the requested delivery date (indicator not set). You can also specify a Factory Calendar to be used in determining the planning and demand horizon periods. If you specify a factory calendar, the system does not take into account non-workdays in accordance with this factory calendar when calculating the relative planning horizon and the the relative demand horizon. These horizons then always begin on a workday.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-36
)
Start of Demand Horizon
today
.
10 Days . Offset
.
End of Demand Horizon
.
50 Days . . Demand Horizon = Duration
= Sales Order = Material Availability Date = Requested Delivery Date
.
Sales Order is not included in defined Demand Horizon, if the selection is made by Requested Delivery Date.
SAP AG 2008
The demand horizon specifies which orders (are included in planning. The system chooses all orders and deliveries whose requested delivery date lies within the demand horizon. You can also specify that the system is select the orders and deliveries based on the material availability date. The Duration in the Relative Horizon is used as follows: •
Start of demand horizon: current date + Offset
•
End of demand horizon: current date + Offset + Duration.
•
Example
- If an Offset of 7 is defined, the selection of material availability/requested delivery dates for the orders begins eight days after today. Selection According to Mat. Avail Date: Controls if order selection in sales orders and deliveries is executed according to the material availability date (indicator set) or according to the requested delivery date (indicator not set).
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-37
$
)
Start of Planning Horizon
today
10 Days
Latest Requested Delivery Date
50 Days
Offset
End of Planning Horizon
9 Days
End of Offset Planning Horizon
= Sales Order = Material Availability Date = Requested Delivery Date SAP AG 2008
The planning horizon contains information about when shipments are scheduled. You can define the planning horizon as fixed or relative: • Fixed: You define the planning horizon precisely by defining a start and end date and a start and end time. • Relative: You do not define the planning horizon with precise dates and times, but specify instead a duration in days starting from the current date. The system then automatically determines the start and end date and the start and end time. - If the planning horizon is not to start on the current date, but instead at a later time, you can define an offset. - The relative planning horizon must not lie in the past. - In the case of the relative planning horizon, you can specify the time zone in which the horizon is to be calculated. - According to this, the relative planning horizon is defined as follows: Start of planning horizon = current date + defined offset End of planning horizon = current date + defined offset + defined duration of planning horizon Offset in days: • The planning horizon commences after this period has elapsed. You can also maintain the offset duration to the exact hour and minute. This can result in either of the following: - Time-dependent: if offset (in days) is set to 0, the planning horizon commences from the current time, after the offset duration has elapsed (in hours and minutes). - Time-independent: if offset is set to 1 or higher, the planning horizon commences after the offset in days plus the maintained offset (in hours and minutes) from 0:00h • If you want to specify the offset more precisely you can specify it in hours and minutes via Offset Duration. - Example: Time dependent: Offset in Days=0 Offset Dur=3:00 means ‘after three hours from current time’ Time independent: Offset in Days=1 Offset Dur=7:00 means ‘after one day and seven hours’, (the seven hours are counted after the end of the first day, from 0:00 am the next day) Note: A day is defined as being 0:00h until 23:59h the time refers to the local time zone of user End of Offset Indicates a time span in days. For example, if you enter 3, there is a period of 3 days after the latest required delivery date during which the order can be executed. If you enter a 0, the order must be executed on the latest delivery
date.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-38
$
,
' 5#$ -
Select the ATP-Categories you want to use in the planning profile
SAP AG 2008
The Demand category controls which requirements categories are included during Interactive Planning. The categories can be combined with each other (for example a combined outbound/replenishment scenario). However, disconnected relationships will not work. For example, an inbound/outbound combination. Customer-designed ATP categories can be used to enhance these categories. The following lists identify some of the order categories by transportation requirement. • Inbound: - AH Purchase order memo - BF Order item schedule line • Stock transports: - (AH) Purchase order memo (only if necessary) - BF Order item schedule line - BI Stock transport order - BR Delivery • Outbound: - BM Sales order - BQ Delivery free of charge - BR Delivery - BT Returns delivery All supported categories in TP/VS can be found in the database table /SAPAPO/VS_PSTRA
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-39
$
,
'
Select the locations which will be included in the planning
Selection Options
SAP AG 2008
In the Locations tab page you select the locations for whom the demand will be planned. If you are planning outbound demand (Sales Orders or Deliveries), you would select the ‘Source’ box of the plant/DC locations for whom the demand would be planned. For inbound demand (Purchase Orders, Shipping Notifications, etc.) you would select the ‘Target’ box of the plant/DC locations. Using the Selection Options icon, you can input selection criteria to select the locations automatically. A Recommendation is to use Transportation zones as a selection criteria
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-40
$
,
'(
Select the resources / vehicles which are included in the planning run
Selection Options
SAP AG 2008
In the Resources tab page you select the resources available to the optimizer. Using the Selection Options icon, you can input selection criteria to select the resources automatically.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-41
$
,
'5
SAP AG 2008
In the Order Advanced tab page you can enter additional filtering criteria available to the optimizer. In the Materials box you can add filtering criteria to select demand based on: •
Material Number
•
Material Group
•
Transportation Group
•
Loading Group
Consider Source and target Location - If this flag is set, only orders are selected, where source and target locations are selected on the Locations tab page. If it is not set, orders are selected, where source or target locations are selected on the Locations tab page. Quantities - Defines a quantity interval for the order quantity. You can use the Exclude indicator to specify whether the orders with order quantities within the interval entered are excluded from planning or whether they are taken into account. The system only makes this selection if a conversion factor has been defined for the unit entered. Condition – In this area, you can specify a Condition name profile that contains conditional selection criteria.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-42
$
,
'# $
SAP AG 2008
The transportation service provider selection (TSP selection) can be used to assign a suitable transportation service provider (TSP) to the shipments either manually or automatically. The goal is to find a TSP with the lowest costs. In manual TSP selection, the TSP is assigned manually to the shipments. If the check against transportation allocations has been configured, the system takes into account transportation capacities (transportation allocations) that have been defined for the individual TSPs. If the system does not find any transportation allocations during the assignment, it assigns a TSP but does not assign quantities in the planning book. A separate optimization is available for the automatic TSP selection. This determines a TSP while taking into account the chosen optimization options for all the shipments that have been chosen. If no TSPs are available, the system removes the relevant shipment from optimization. Considers compatibilities btw. TSP and customer, business shares, transport allocations, costs, continuous move.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-43
-
1-
*
SAP AG 2008
After creating your TP/VS master data and configuration settings you should execute transaction /SAPAPO/VSCC to check the consistency of the vehicle scheduling. There may be messages that do not apply to your modeling environment. If so, ignore these messages.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-44
$
,
#
%$1
You should now be able to: Explain the use of a Cost profile in the optimization process. Create a Cost profile. Describe the purpose of a TP/VS Alert profile and create an Alert profile. Explain the purpose of an Optimization profile and create an Optimization profile.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-45
Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Lesson 1: VS Optimization Lesson 2: Profiles in TP/VS Lesson 3: Interactive Planning Lesson 4: Order Splitting Lesson 5: Shipment Release and Publication Lesson 6: Other Functions/Features
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-46
0
$
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the basics of the VS Interactive Planning process. Understand the layout use of the various display areas in the Vehicle Scheduling transaction. Create planned shipments manually. Perform a planning run using the VSR Optimizer. Perform shipment change, deletion and re-planning. Describe the use of the various tab structures in the Vehicle Scheduling transaction.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-47
0
$
!"
The interactive planning process is used to perform the day-to-day planning in TP/VS. This process consists of the steps necessary to make a planning run for transportation demands. In addition, various maintenance tasks such as shipment change, deletion and re-planning might be necessary in the planning process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-48
0
$
SAP AG 2008
From the SCM SAP menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Planning Interactive Vehicle Scheduling. Then, the Vehicle Scheduling – Selection screen appears. Select an optimization profile. The Optimization Profile can be reviewed from this screen by selecting the Optimization Profile button on the application toolbar.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-49
0
$
.
Features Multi-Frame/Multi-View Design…
Planned Shipments Shipment Assigned Orders
Unassigned Orders for Consolidation
Resource, Shipments, Order Overview
SAP AG 2008
A selection area (shuffler) on the left side of the screen which can display three different views (resources, shipments, orders) in which a planning object can be selected Tabular planning on the right side of the screen which covers the three different planning tables, or online scheduling, which contains information on all shipment activities in graphical form (a different display of tabular planning). Tabular planning consists of three tables: •
Transport. activities All transportation activities (shipment assignments/itineraries) for the orders that assigned to the planning object are displayed here. The transportation number, the start, finish and gross/net duration of the transportation activities are displayed.
•
Assigned/unplanned orders In the upper table, all of the (scheduled) orders assigned to the planning object in the planning horizon are displayed.
•
In the lower table, all of the orders that are not scheduled or are to be scheduled are displayed if they were selected according to the criteria defined in the optimization profile for order selection (selection horizon, source locations, order categories) and are therefore relevant for planning in the current planning run.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-50
0
$
/
Resource view all vehicle resources are displayed which… are not assigned to a depot location are assigned to one of the selected depot locations Shipment view All shipments that have at least one shipment activity completely or partially within the planning horizon are displayed Is used to change, reschedule or delete shipments that are already scheduled Order view All shipment-related data for individual orders are displayed Is used to display the itinerary of the individual orders
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-51
-
1
3
1
2
SAP AG 2008
You are in the maintenance view for interactive vehicle scheduling: Vehicle Scheduling – Resource. Double-click a resource in the left area of the screen. The screen name displays the resource description. In tabular planning, go to the right screen area when you can move orders from the planning table Not yet scheduled/to be scheduled to the planning table Assigned/unplanned shipments. You can use drag and drop to do this, or choose Assign order. To remove an order from the table, choose Remove order. The Transportation Scheduling Specifications for Scheduling screen appears (see next page). Here you maintain: • Loading and unloading durations • Sequence of the stops • Transportation duration • Arrival or departure date and time The default values for the loading duration are determined in Transportation and Shipping Scheduling. A default value is also generated for the itinerary determined by the drive to all source locations and to all target locations. The sequence of the stops is determined by setting the "stopoff sequence". The transport duration is read from the transportation relationships, however, they can be adjusted if necessary. At least one date must be entered for each shipment (usually the arrival time at the last target location). After you confirm, a shipment is created as long as there is a possible date for the execution of the shipment in the planning horizon, and the resource selected has enough capacity. Confirm your entries with Enter. In the Transportation activities planning table and the upper planning table of Assigned/unplanned shipment units, a line is added with the corresponding information. © SAP AG
SCM612
8-52
-
1
SAP AG 2008
While you plan manually, the following restrictions are taken into account: •
Vehicle resource capacities (as long as the resources are planned finitely)
•
Resource time streams (including resource breaks, shifts, and unscheduled breaks)
•
Loading and unloading resources at locations (including capacities and time streams)
•
Opening times
•
Trips to and from depot location (for own means of transport)
•
Empty running distance
•
Desired dates for arrival and departure
•
Planning horizon
If the vehicle is assigned to a transportation vehicle that is not suitable for schedules and a shipment is created, this vehicle resource is not available for other shipments for the duration of the shipment, regardless of any remaining capacity.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-53
( Interactive Optimization
or, Optimizing in the Background SAP AG 2008
Interactive Optimization •
From the interactive vehicle scheduling ‘Vehicle Scheduling Resource’ screen, select the ‘VS Optimizer’ button.
Optimizing in the Background •
Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Schedule Optimization Run.
•
Enter a job name.
•
Choose an optimization profile.
•
Choose Enter. The Start Times screen appears.
•
Specify a date for background optimization.
•
Choose Save. The screen closes and the message Background job was successfully scheduled appears in the message bar
Planning
Planning in the Background
The Optimization is carried out in the background at the time you selected. If the optimization run finishes without any problems occurring or messages being displayed, the Optimizer does not create any transports. Reasons for this can be: •
Non-delivery costs are so low, that the Optimizer determines that non-delivery is cheaper than the transport of the order.
•
Transportation lanes are missed.
•
Total time of transport activities including work breaks is too long for the planning horizon.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-54
)
1 ,
SAP AG 2008
To get the documentation of the Optimizer actions during an Optimization run, use Transaction /SAPAPO/OPT11. For analysis and error handling you can set the Dump Level to 1 in /SAPAPO/OPT10. In transaction /SAPAPO/OPT11 you can see, if input and/or output data are written.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-55
-
2 3 1
SAP AG 2008
On the Vehicle Scheduling – Shipments screen, you can reschedule shipments. You have selected a shipment (by double-clicking a shipment in the left screen area) and chosen Reschedule shipment on the Transportation activities tab. If additional orders are added to a shipment in the transportation view, the whole shipment is rescheduled. You can do this until the shipment has been released.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-56
SAP AG 2008
You delete a shipment in the left screen area of the Vehicle Scheduling – Shipments screen by doubleclicking the shipment to select it, clicking the right mouse button, and choosing Delete shipment. If you deallocate all of the orders assigned to a shipment, the shipment is also deleted. If an order is assigned to a shipment to be deleted as well as to other shipments, it is deallocated from all shipments. You can do this until the shipment has been released.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-57
' Featuring Graphical Drop & Drag for Scheduling Transportation Activities and Resources
SAP AG 2008
Online scheduling: In the Transportation activities chart, the orders are displayed with their transportation activities on a time axis. This time axis corresponds to the planning horizon defined in the optimization profile. The activities load, transport, and unload are displayed in the form of bars, each in a different color. These bars cover the start and finish of activities. In the Resources chart, all of the resources involved in the shipments are displayed. This includes all of the vehicle resources, handling resources, and opening time resources. Resource breaks are displayed in gray.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-58
!"
3
Features Interactive View of Alert Monitor….
SAP AG 2008
View the alerts in the Alert Monitor window (Alert Monitor
Display alerts)
Take action on alerts in the Alert Monitor window. (Access context menu with right mouse click.) There are three possible priority levels: •
Error
•
Warning
•
Information
Alert types are automatically assigned certain priority levels, but you can change the priority level of an alert in SCM Customizing.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-59
0
$
1
You should now be able to: Explain the basics of the VS Interactive Planning process. Understand the layout use of the various display areas in the Vehicle Scheduling transaction. Create planned shipments manually. Perform a planning run using the VSR Optimizer. Perform shipment change, deletion and re-planning. Describe the use of the various tab structures in the Vehicle Scheduling transaction.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-60
Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Lesson 1: VS Optimization Lesson 2: Profiles in TP/VS Lesson 3: Interactive Planning Lesson 4: Order Splitting Lesson 5: Shipment Release and Publication Lesson 6: Other Functions/Features
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-61
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the basic purpose and use of order splitting. Create and use order splitting profiles in the vehicle scheduling process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-62
!"
In day-to-day transportation planning it is often necessary to split transportation demands to meet the physical requirements or constraints of shipping merchandise. For example, the quantities of materials in a single sales order might not be able to be contained in a single shipment due to quantity, volume, or weight constraints of the means of transport. In this case, for transportation purposes the order must be “split” into multiple freight units.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-63
( Used to automatically consolidate and/or split order/delivery items Example: A sales order must be delivered with multiple outbound deliveries due to its size (Relation 1:1 FU and final delivery) Two types of freight units Split freight unit represents any combination of order line items with quantities planned for transportation (fixed shipping quantities) Remainder freight unit represents open quantities of order (open shipping quantities). They cannot be changed directly Split limits and rounding (in several dimensions) Vehicle capacities as split limits Decision full delivery or not on header level Several methods for distribution of item quantities
SAP AG 2008
Split rules are defined using transaction /SAPAPO/VS14 Order split allows to bring items of a sales order into transportation planning even if the quantity of this order item exceeds the capacity of the vehicles. Example: Assume a sales order item for 50 tons of raw material. It is larger than the largest available vehicle and thus can not be introduced into the planning run. The solution is, that TP/VS will split these large order items by creating multiple deliveries with smaller items. The Order Split is controlled by rules that define how an item should be split. The split process itself runs automatically. Split rules will be applied automatically by the system.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-64
(
-
SAP AG 2008
Split Rules are created using transaction /SAPAPO/VS14. Each split rule has an Rule ID that you assign and a description. In the Validity box you select the ATP Categories that represent the transportation demand to which you want the split rule applied. In the Area field you select the TP/VS applications for which you want the split rule to be used (VSR Optimization, Dynamic Route Determination or ‘ALL’). Optionally, a split rule can also be assigned to a specific VSR optimization profile. A condition rule can also be used to filter the demands on which the split rule is applied. If multiple split rules apply to a VSR optimization profile, a priority number can be used to determine the sequence in which the split rules are applied. If the split rule is to be applied manually, an indicator check box is used to indicate this situation. Various consolidation and split options can be selected in the Consolidation/Split Control box. The units of measure and split values are entered in the Dimensions/Split Values area of the screen. The values enter in this area are used to determine when a split must be made and the split quantity for each split.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-65
(
3
Set the flag “Merge Planned Freight Units” in the split profile so that the system automatically combines planned freight units that belong to the same order and are transported on one vehicle into a freight unit after optimization. If several sales order items for the same material are planned, then one delivery items will be created.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-66
#
%$6
5
APO TP/VS
ERP
ERP
Split freight units
Sales Order 123 10 Prod1 4 Pal 20 Prod2 4 Pal 30 Prod3 1 Pal
Remainder freight units are created out of APO orders according to planning settings
Shipment 666
Freight unit 123 10 Prod1 4 Pal 20 Prod2 4 Pal 30 Prod3 1 Pal
Fr. unit 123-0001 10 Prod1 3 Pal
Delivery 901 10 Prod1 3 Pal
Fr. unit 123-0002 10 Prod1 1 Pal 20 Prod2 2 Pal
Delivery 902 10 Prod1 1 Pal 20 Prod2 2 Pal
Fr. unit 123 20 Prod2 2 Pal 30 Prod3 1 Pal
Split freight units are constructed out of originals using delivered quantities, split rules or manual input Orders are not changed!
Remainder freight unit – maybe further splitted
Creation of deliveries/subsequent deliveries based on planned or unplanned freight units
TPVS Order Split SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-67
#$% Freight unit construction using split rules Package size:
Fr. unit 123-0001 1 Pal
1 pallet Sales Order 123/10 4 Pal
Optimization Shipment 666 Fr. unit 123-0001 1 Pal
Freight unit construction in postprocessing Shipment 666 Fr. unit 123-0001 1 Pal
Fr. unit Fr. unit 123-0002 123/10/0001 11Pal Pal Shipment 777 Fr. unit 123-0003 1 Pal Fr. unit 123-0004 1 Pal
Fr. unit Fr. unit 123-0002 123/10/0001 11Pal Pal Fr. unit 123-0003 1 Pal
Shipment 777 Fr. unit 123-0002 2 Pal
Fr. unit 123-0003 1 Pal
Fr. unit 123-0004 1Pal
1. Rules are applied to not-planned quantities of orders to construct freight units of package size. This is necessary as SAP Optimizer doesn’t have split functionality currently
2. Freight units are constructed based on consolidated delivered quantities. Consolidation is done per shipment stages.
SAP AG 2008
After the optimization freight units are merged again to avoid unnecessary splits (based on the merge flag in the split rules) Merge is performed per shipment stage.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-68
-
#
%$Integration of characteristics available Split rule - mapping between UoM in freight unit and characteristic During freight unit creation characteristic values are read Split limits/rounding can be used in the same way as for standard UoMs
SAP AG 2008
Examples for usage are sales orders, purchase requisitions, purchase orders
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-69
1
You should now be able to: Describe the basic purpose and use of order splitting. Create and use order splitting profiles in the vehicle scheduling process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-70
Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Lesson 1: VS Optimization Lesson 2: Profiles in TP/VS Lesson 3: Interactive Planning Lesson 4: Order Splitting Lesson 5: Shipment Release and Publication Lesson 6: Other Functions/Features
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-71
(
$
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the process of shipment release. Perform the shipment release and publication process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-72
(
$
!"
After shipments have been planned in Vehicle Scheduling, they must be transferred, along with the delivery information, from the TP/VS system to the ERP System for execution.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-73
(
Select Release Shipment
SAP AG 2008
Before each optimization run, all (fixed) shipments that are not yet released are de-allocated. The optimizer reschedules the orders. For an order to be fixed, it must be released (published). When a shipment is released: •
the planning result is accepted as final.
•
the shipment is prepared for transfer to the OLTP system.
•
the published shipment is not de-allocated before an optimization run.
•
the optimizer considers its resource load as a starting solution.
Process Flow: •
Vehicle Scheduling – Shipments view. To release orders, select one or more shipments in the left area of the screen by double-clicking them.
•
Choose Release shipment.
•
Note: After you release the shipments, you cannot make any changes to them in the SCM System. There is one exception. If you use manual TSP Selection, you are able to choose or change your carrier.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-74
#
%$$
&
Configuration
Master Data
Modeling
Plan Shipments Manually Optimizer Dynamic Route Determination Create/Transfer Shipments
Transportation Service Provider Selection
Create/Transfer Deliveries
Releasing Shipments and TSP Tendering
SAP AG 2008
After the basic TP/VS customizing, establishment of the appropriate master data and creation of the planning and cost profiles, the optimization of transportation demands may be performed. This is called the “optimization” process. It may be performed interactively or in background. Backorder processing carried out in the global ATP component can affect the vehicle scheduling determination in TP/VS. Upon completion of the planning for one or more shipments, automatic carrier selection may be performed. Based on the carrier selection profile a carrier will be assigned to each shipment selected. To transfer planned shipments and their corresponding delivery documents to the OLTP or ERP system for execution, the process of “publishing” must be performed first. An optional process that is part of the collaborative planning strategy of supply chain management is carrier tendering. The carrier tendering process, available in different scenarios, gives the shipper the ability to notify potential carriers of the availability of a shipment and its characteristics. The carrier, in turn, can accept or decline the tender offer and report that decision back to the shipper using various automated techniques. After shipments are published, they and their related delivery documents can be transferred to the OLTP or ERP System for execution. This step represents the final process in the process flow.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-75
#$ 6
,
,
$
SAP AG 2008
To create a shipment in SAP ERP, a delivery must already exist. The generation of the delivery is triggered out of TP/VS. The sales order will be replaced by the generated delivery. The OLTP generation of deliveries can be executed for •
Freight units which are in a planned shipment
•
Freight units which are not assigned to a shipment out of the freight unit screen
Delivery generation also triggers subsequent delivery split in ERP for split outbound deliveries, this step is also prerequisite for OLTP shipment generation
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-76
#$ 6
,
,
&
Create Deliveries for Unassigned FU
SAP AG 2008
Using this function you can create the delivery (ies) for freight units that have not been assigned to a shipment in planning.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-77
#
%$$
&
Configuration
Master Data
Modeling
Plan Shipments manually or using the Optimizer
Create/Transfer Shipments
Carrier Selection
Create/Transfer Deliveries
Releasing Shipments
Carrier Tendering
SAP AG 2008
After the basic TP/VS customizing, establishment of the appropriate master data and creation of the planning and cost profiles, the optimization of transportation demands may be performed. This is called the “optimization” process. It may be performed interactively or in background. Backorder processing carried out in the global ATP component can affect the vehicle scheduling determination in TP/VS. Upon completion of the planning for one or more shipments, automatic carrier selection may be performed. Based on the carrier selection profile a carrier will be assigned to each shipment selected. To transfer planned shipments and their corresponding delivery documents to the OLTP or ERP system for execution, the process of “publishing” must be performed first. An optional process that is part of the collaborative planning strategy of supply chain management is carrier tendering. The carrier tendering process, available in different scenarios, gives the shipper the ability to notify potential carriers of the availability of a shipment and its characteristics. The carrier, in turn, can accept or decline the tender offer and report that decision back to the shipper using various automated techniques. After shipments are published, they and their related delivery documents can be transferred to the OLTP or ERP System for execution. This step represents the final process in the process flow.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-78
#
,
$
!($
SAP AG 2008
Check Release of Planned Shipments •
An overview of the released planned shipments appears. This step is important to make sure that all predecessor documents (for example, sales orders) have been converted to deliveries, since this is a prerequisite for creating a shipment.
Transmit Planned Shipments to OLTP System •
A list of all checked shipments appears, choose the one to be transferred
•
Choose Execute. The Display logs screen appears containing information on the current user of the log and an list of the shipments that are currently being transferred.
After this step the process is ended in TP/VS and continues only in ERP.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-79
$ Data can be transferred interactively to: Obtain an overview of the documents to be transferred Make changes to the due date horizon of the document transfer Earlier transfer of individual documents
SAP AG 2008
You have made the required settings in Customizing: • Maintain the Basis Settings in the activities for Publication. • Maintain the settings for Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) under Interfaces. In the SCM menu, choose Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling -> Environment -> OLTP Interface and then choose, one after the other, the following activities: • Transfer Orders to Delivery Generation • Check Release of Planned Shipments • Transmit Planned Shipments to OLTP System Transfer Orders to Delivery Generation • The Selection of orders to be transferred dialog box appears in which you specify the due date horizon for which you want to display planned orders. A list of the predecessor documents then appears (orders, purchase requisitions, etc.). You can confirm them or postpone transferring them. • Choose Execute. The Display logs screen appears containing information on the current user of the log and an list of the orders that are currently being transferred. Check Release of Planned Shipments • An overview of the released planned shipments appears. This step is important to make sure that all predecessor documents (for example, sales orders) have been converted to deliveries, since this is a prerequisite for creating a shipment. Transmit Planned Shipments to OLTP System • The Selection of shipments to be transferred dialog box appears in which you specify the due date horizon for which you want to display planned shipments. A list of these shipments then appears. You can confirm them or choose them for earlier transfer. • Choose Execute. The Display logs screen appears containing information on the current user of the log and an list of the shipments that are currently being transferred.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-80
!
SAP AG 2008
By setting the flag 'Shipment end' in the ERP system, the shipment in TP/VS is no longer relevant for planning. A deletion indicator for those shipments is set. If a shipment has been deleted in the ERP System, the shipment in TP/VS will also be deleted. Those shipments and their deliveries for which a deletion indicator has also been set are deleted. To delete those shipments choose in SCM Menu Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Planning Delete Shipments. The Display logs screen appears. Along with the general information on the user of this activity, a list of shipments that are due appears. Data on this screen can only be displayed. Choose Back to exit this screen. If you post goods issue or goods receipt, a deletion indicator is set for the delivery. To delete those deliveries choose in SCM Menu Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Planning Delete Deliveries. The Display logs screen appears. A deletion indicator is also set for a delivery, if • The delivery has been deleted in the ERP System • The delivery has been posted as a goods issue in the ERP System and is not assigned to a shipment anymore • The shipment has been deleted in the ERP System To delete the delivery choose in the SCM menu: Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Planning Delete Deliveries. The Display logs screen appears. Along with the general information on the user of this activity, a list of deliveries that are due appears. Data on this screen can only be displayed. Choose Back to exit this screen.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-81
-
1 Publishing (Live Cache)
Tendering on Planned Shipments
VS-Communication Layer
EDI XML WEB
Orders
Deliveries Shipments
SAP AG 2008
Executable function releasing planned shipments from SCM into the “Communication Layer” The VS-Communication Layer is a collection of database tables which store detailed order/delivery/shipment information. Shipments are given a “firm” status and made available for tendering
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-82
(
$
1
You should now be able to: Explain the process of shipment release. Perform the shipment release and publication process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-83
Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Lesson 1: VS Optimization Lesson 2: Profiles in TP/VS Lesson 3: Interactive Planning Lesson 4: Order Splitting Lesson 5: Shipment Release and Publication Lesson 6: Other Functions/Features
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-84
&
&
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the various functions and features that can be used in Vehicle Scheduling such as: Appointment planning Displaying time windows related to Pickup/Delivery Windows Manual pool planning using the Multilevel planning screen Use of Control Rules Display of shipment change history Use of mass processing in Vehicle Scheduling.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-85
&
&
!"
In addition to the basic Vehicle Scheduling functions related to planning and publishing shipments , there are a number of functions and features that might be required in various transportation planning scenarios.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-86
5
$
,
&
Use the freight unit builder to adopt the delivery windows of your freight units according to the appointments you made with your customers.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-87
1
*'
1
SAP AG 2008
Use this feature to display all active time windows for a selected freight unit on the fly. Understand why the optimizer scheduled a freight unit in a certain way. In the Order view of the Shuffler, or in the Assigned Freight Units section, press the right mouse button and select “Information for Pickup / Delivery”. For assigned freight units you can use button: “Information for Pickup/Deliver”.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-88
3
$
$
SAP AG 2008
Manual Pool Planning is performed from data entry under the tab “Multilevel Planning” Manual Pool Planning: There are 3 primary steps to create shipments with manual pool planning: Create a stage – origin and destination route •
Transportation duration is determined when MOT/resource is assigned
•
Deletion of the stage deletes will cause all orders associated with the stage to be deleted also.
Assign a resource to the stages – vehicle assignment (optional). •
Can be assigned via drag-and-drop
•
Can be assigned via assignment button
•
Before a stage can be accepted, a resource must be assigned
Add orders to each stage. •
They can be added via drag-and-drop
•
Or, they can be added via the assign order button
•
However, before a shipment is accepted, each stage must have at least one order assigned.
It is possible to create shipments without resource assignment.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-89
) Heuristics can be implemented in order to Create a new logic to generate planned shipments Change planned shipments after optimization Support the manual planning process Requires customer specific algorithms A maximum of 20 heuristics can be activated Can be executed as batch Activation of Heuristics Interface BAdI necessary
SAP AG 2008
The Heuristics pushbutton on the Multilevel Planning tab page in interactive planning only becomes active when you activate the heuristic interface in customizing. You have to implement the "Heuristics Interface" business add-in (BAdI) before you can activate the heuristic interface. A maximum of 20 heuristics can be activated. Used to decrease the effort of the planner Create a predefined structure of one or more shipments
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-90
-
( Maintenance with Transaction /SAPAPO/VS80 What should be done if planned order is changed in ERP? Planned shipments: De-allocate order Invalidate Adjust BAdI Write alert Define alert type Maintain selection conditions for planned orders Maintain change conditions for shipments If no rule is found, shipment is always adjusted and kept consistent
SAP AG 2008
A planned shipment is deleted from TP/VS , if it contains only one order, which has been deleted..
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-91
)
1
Activate the shipment history in TP/VS global customizing Available in the Details tab of a shipment
SAP AG 2008
Activate the shipment history in SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning / Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) Basic Settings General Settings : Change History (Days)
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-92
60 0
,
'5
(
SAP AG 2008
You can display one or more shipments on a road map on the tab page Geographical Overview in interactive planning. A route can be displayed either as a road route, that is, the exact route to be followed, or as a symbolic route, that is, a direct connection between the individual locations. You can also display route descriptions with the travel time and distance of the journey based on the road network. Prerequisites •
You have installed an external GIS server (GIS = Geographical Information System) and an IGS (Internet Graphics Server) and connected these to SAP APO.
•
You have activated the map display for your user in Customizing for the component Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS).
•
You have created the geographical coordinates for the locations.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-93
60 0
,
'5
(
SAP AG 2008
Displaying Routes •
The routes are displayed as colored lines. The start and destination locations and the stop-offs are marked with a description in addition to the graphical display to provide a better overview.
•
You can display the routes for shipments and for orders and resources to which shipments are assigned. Note when selecting orders that in the case of a shipment with several orders, the system only displays the route as far as the destination location of the selected orders.
•
If during the display you switch tab pages and select a different object in the selection bar (left part of the screen), the system refreshes the road map display when you select the Geographical Overview tab page again.
Displaying Route Description, Travel Time, and Distance •
You can display a detailed route description for this shipment by choosing Route.
If you choose the arrow to the right of Selected Shipment and then choose the shipment that you want, the travel time and distance are displayed on the basis of the road network for this shipment. The distance is displayed in a user-defined unit (for example, mile, km). To display the travel time and distance for all the displayed shipments, choose Overview.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-94
60 '
0
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-95
#$% TP/VS allows you to do delta optimization…. Based on “Keep existing Shipments” on TP/VS optimizer profile
SAP AG 2008
TP/VS allows you to do delta optimization…. •
Based on “Keep existing Shipments” on TP/VS optimizer profile
•
If you set this indicator, the system does not delete planned shipments that already existed before the optimization run during optimization.
•
It updates these shipments if additional orders are scheduled on the same vehicle or are removed from the shipment during optimization.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-96
& It is possible to fix shipments for optimization without publishing them It is possible to use transportation zones in hub hierarchy Delivery weight and volumes are transferred from ERP to APO and may be used as basis for freight units Delivery transportation status is transferred from ERP to APO and included to freight unit
SAP AG 2008
In order to fix shipments transaction /SAPAPO/VS01 can be used.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-97
5
&
,
Mass Processing Capabilities
3
$
Create Job
Schedule Job
Job
Optimization
Profile
TSP Selection Create/Delete Deliveries Create/Delete Shipments
Date Sequence Job, Event, or operation
11 10
12
1
2
9 8
3 7
6 5
4
SAP AG 2008
The above sequence depicts the steps you perform to carry out mass processing. You can carry out several planning actions within one job as long as they have the same activity. For example, you might run a mass processing job that executes several macros at the same time, or a job that carries out a VS optimization, carrier selection then publishing of the data to the ERP (OLTP) system.. The sequence in which actions within one activity are processed depends on the sequential numbers you define for them in the activity. The system performs all actions for the first characteristic value before processing the second characteristic value. Consequently, if you want the system to perform one action for all characteristic values before it starts the next action, you must define separate planning activities. For each job you can define the selection of data which should be considered in the processing of the job as well as the level to which it should be aggregated before the actions are executed. Planning jobs are reusable. See: SCM SAP Menu Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Interface Mass Processing Interface.
© SAP AG
SCM612
Environment
OLTP
8-98
3
$
7
Job Log Available Date / Time of job Status - red, yellow, green Characteristic combinations processed
SAP AG 2008
You can now have the system create a log of a mass processing job. You do this by setting an indicator on the job creation screen. The job log shows: •
Name of the job
•
Date and time which the job started
•
Whether the job completed successfully (green), with warnings (yellow) or with errors (red)
•
A message relating to every characteristic value combination that was processed in the job along with long text
•
You can also use the following functions:
•
Show/hide all characteristic value combinations that completed successfully/with warnings/with errors
•
Sort and filter according to characteristic value combination or message text
•
Print, download or send the current view of the log
•
Define display variants for the log
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-99
&
&
1
You should now be able to: Describe the various functions and features that can be used in Vehicle Scheduling such as: Appointment planning Displaying time windows related to Pickup/Delivery Windows Manual pool planning using the Multilevel planning screen Use of Control Rules Display of shipment change history Use of mass processing in Vehicle Scheduling.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-100
1
You are now able to: Describe the TP/VS optimization process and identify the objectives of the optimization process. Create Cost, Alert and Optimization profiles Perform VS Interactive Planning Create and use order splitting profiles Perform shipment release and publication Identify other functions and features related to Vehicle Scheduling
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-101
Exercises Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Topic: Interactive Planning At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Create a Cost Profile to be used in VS Optimization • Create a TP/VS Alert Profile to monitor exception events in planning • Create Optimization Profiles for use with the VS Optimizer in planning different transportation scenarios. • Perform interactive planning runs and evaluate the results • Release shipments • Publish delivery and shipment data to the ERP System. As a member of the TP/VS implementation team, you are responsible for setting up the required profiles necessary begin planning of transportation shipments using TP/VS. You are required to establish cost profiles that the optimizer will use in evaluating cost constraints related to various methods of transportation. To monitor the process for various exception situations you will also create a VS Alert Profile that will be assigned to your optimization profile. Finally, as the last step before the interactive planning can begin you must create the Optimization Profiles, that, among other things, will select the documents for planning. After the planning process has been completed, you will transfer the delivery and shipment data to the ERP System using the publishing process. 1-1
Within active Model 000 you are to create a cost profile (GR##-CP) that will specify the general, location, shipment and dimensional costs that you will use in your TP/VS planning. The tables below will show the planning costs that you are to assign in your profile. Location Costs: Priority Premature Del
© SAP AG
Delayed Del.
Premature P.U
Delayed P.U
Non-Delivery
1
250.000
2000.000
250.000
2000.000
1,000,000.000
2
100.000
1000.000
100.000
1000.000
500,000.000
SCM612
8-102
Transportation.: Means of Transport
Fixed Cost
FTL##
50.000
LTL##
40.000
RAIL##
100.000
SHIP##
300.000
TRK##
40.000
Dimension: Means of Trans.
Cost Dimension
Transportation costs
Cost Unit
Transportation Max.
Cost Basis
FTL##
E Distance
FTL##
S Stop
LTL##
E Distance
1 Trans Lane
RAIL##
E Distance
1 Trans Lane
SHIP##
E Distance
1 Trans Lane
TRK##
E Distance
1 Trans Lane
1-2
1 Trans Lane 65.000
10
0 Dimension
To monitor certain situations that can be encountered by the Optimizer, you will create an Alert Profile in the Alert Monitor. The table below lists the data that you will need to establish your alert profile. VehSched alert profile:
VSAP-##
Description
VS Alert Profile Gr. ##
VS Alerts to be recorded:
Check availability (order due date/time changed by VS) Order not scheduled by Optimizer in Transportation Planning Order was changed in OLTP No transportation service provider found Transportation: Resource is overloaded Vehicle Scheduling - Tendering Alerts (all tendering alerts) Vehicle Scheduling - Resource Alerts (All resource alerts)
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-103
1-3
To run the VS Optimizer you must create an optimization profile that gives the optimizer certain information required for it to carry out a planning run. In this exercise you will create an optimization profile: OPIN-## for planning inbound shipments. Profile Name:
OPIN-##
Description:
Inbound Shipments Gr. ##
General tab: Plng Version
000
Alert profile
VSAP-##
Cost profile
GR##-CP
Opt. Runtime
60
Horizons tab: Planning Horizon: Duration (Days)
60
Demand Horizon: Duration (Days)
60
ATP Categories: Cat.
AH, BF
Locations: Target:
10##, 12##
Resources: Resource
G##-FTRK01 – G##-FTRK05 G##-LTRK01 – G##LTRK05
1-4
Advanced Order Selection tab:
No Entries
TSP Selection tab:
No Entries
Run the Consistency Check on your inbound profile. If there are any errors you should correct the errors before proceeding. Transaction: /n/SAPAPO/VSCC
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-104
1-5
In this exercise you will create an optimization profile (OPOUT-##) that will be used to plan outbound shipments for your plant 12##. Profile Name:
OPOUT-##
Description:
Outbound Shipments Gr. ##
General tab: Plng Version
000
Alert profile
VSAP-##
Cost profile
GR##-CP
Opt. Runtime
60
Horizons tab: Planning Horizon: Duration (Days)
60
Demand Horizon: Duration (Days)
60
ATP Categories: Cat.
BF,BI,BM
Locations: Source:
12##
Target
22##
Resources: Resource
G##-FTRK01 – G##-FTRK05 G##-LTRK01 – G##LTRK05
1-6
Advanced Order Selection tab:
No Entries
TSP Selection tab:
No Entries
Run the Consistency Check on your outbound profile. If there are any errors you should correct the errors before proceeding. Transaction: /n/SAPAPO/VSCC
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-105
1-7
Now, you will use your OPIN-## optimization profile to initiate the optimization process for the purchase order you created in Unit 6. During this process you will learn and reinforce your navigation skills using the interactive optimization transaction. After the optimization run has been completed you will review the data that is displayed on the Vehicle Scheduling screen and review the unassigned "Freight units". 1-7-1 Execute the Interactive Vehicle Scheduling. Answer the following questions: How many Non-Assigned Freight Units are there? _____ How many resources are available?
______
How many Assigned Freight Units?
______
How many shipments were created ?
______
1-7-2 Run the VS Optimizer. Answer the following questions: How many Non-Assigned Freight Units are there? ______ How many resources are available? _______ How many Assigned Freight units? ______ How many shipments were created ? _______ 1-7-3 Check the Alert Monitor: How many alerts were displayed ? ________ 1-7-4 Release the shipment. Save the session.
1-8
You will now conduct an interactive vehicle scheduling run for outbound shipments using your optimization profile OPOUT-##: 1-8-1 Initiate the optimization process using your optimization profile OPOUT-## and review the data that is displayed on the Vehicle Scheduling screen and review the Non-Assigned Freight units. Answer the following questions: How many Non-Assigned Freight units are there? ______ How many resources are available? _______
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-106
How many Assigned Freight units? ______ How many shipments were created ? _______ 1-8-2 Create a planned shipment and release a shipment manually from one of the sales orders. Use an LTL resource. 1-8-3 Run the VS Optimizer. Answer the following questions: How many Non-Assigned Freight units are there? ______ How many resources are available? _______ How many Assigned Freight Units? ______ How many shipments were created ? _______ 1-8-4 Check the Alert Monitor: How many alerts were displayed ? _______ Save the session. 1-8-5 Release the planned shipments. Shipment document number: _______________________ Shipment document number: _______________________ 1-8-6 Perform Manual Transportation Service Provider Assignment for the shipments. Assign carrier 0000001058 to each shipment. Save the session.. 1-8-7 Transfer the delivery data to the ERP System using the publishing process. 1-8-8 Transfer the shipment data for your shipments to the ERP System. 1-8-9 Check the shipment status of all shipment documents. Shipment Status _______________________________________ 1-8-10 View the delivery and shipment documents in the ERP System for one of the sales orders.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-107
Exercises Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Topic: Using Transportation Zone Hierarchies and Incompatibilities At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Understand the customizing settings and master data requirements necessary to use transportation zone hierarchies in shipment planning. • Assign incompatibility rules to optimization profiles. Due to the large customer base in your PC electronics company, you must reduce the number of transportation lanes required to plan shipments. To accomplish this and to provide a more accurate cost optimization, you will use the transportation zone hierarchy function. 2-1
Although a transportation zone hierarchy has already been established, TZONE, you will review the pertinent settings: 2-1-1 First, look at the hierarchy structure definition table. In this table the TZONE hierarchy is defined as a Location hierarchy with two levels (Two is the standard and can’t be exceeded.). 2-1-2 The second relevant table is the Maintain Transportation-Relevant Hierarchy table. In this table, you assign your transportation zone hierarchy to the VS application. 2-1-3 The transportation zone hierarchy should be created before any customer location data is transferred to APO. When the hierarchy is created first, the system will automatically update the hierarchy with the transportation zones and associated customer locations. To see your customers in the transportation zone hierarchy go to the Hierarchy master data table. Verify that your customers are in transportation zones DE-D000060000, DE-D000070000 or DE-D000080000.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-108
2-1-4 To test the use of Transportation Zone Hierarchies: Create four sales orders: 1. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11A##
PO Number
08-1-##
Req. deliv. Date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Incoterms
EXW
Material
T-ATD2-##
Order Quantity
50 PC
Document Number:
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
_______________________
2. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S22A##
PO Number
08-2-##
Req. deliv. Date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Incoterms
CIF
Material
T-ATD2-##
Order Quantity Material Order Quantity
(Sales Area 1000/10/00)
55 PC T-ATD3-## 50 PC
Document Number : _______________________ 3. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S33A##
PO Number
08-3-##
Incoterms
CIF
Req. deliv. Date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Material
T-ATD2-##
Order Quantity Material Order Quantity © SAP AG
(Sales Area 1000/10/00)
50 PC T-ATD3-## 50 PC SCM612
8-109
Document Number : _______________________ Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S33A##
PO Number
08-4-##
Req. deliv. Date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Incoterms
CIF
Material
T-ATD2-##
(Sales Area 1000/10/00)
50 PC
Order Quantity
T-ATD3-##
Material
50 PC
Order Quantity
Document Number : _______________________ 2-1-5 Use your optimizing profile OPOUT-## to plan the shipments and save the planned data but document the following: How many shipments were created? ____________________ What was the optimized costs?
____________________
2-1-6 To use the transportation zone hierarchy in planning, a transportation lane must exist between the source plants/DC’s and the transportation zones. In addition, a “circular” transportation lane must exist in which the source and target locations are the transportation zone. In this exercise, you will check transportation zone DED000060000 for the circular relationship and add your Transportation Methods to the lane (FTL## and LTL##). 2-1-7 Create the transportation lane between your shipping plant 12## and transportation zone: DE-D000060000. 2-1-8 Go back to Interactive Planning and re-run the VS Optimizer and document the following: How many shipments were created? _____________________ What was the total optimized costs? _____________________
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-110
2-1-9 Save your data. 2-2
You will now assign the incompatibility rule you created earlier to your OPOUT-## optimization profile. This rule specifies that orders with the Incoterms of EXW cannot be shipped with orders having an incoterms code of CIF. One of the orders you entered previously has an incoterms code of ‘EXW’. All of the other orders have an incoterms code of ‘CIF’. 2-2-1 Assign your compatibility rule to your OPOUT-## optimization profile. 2-2-2 Use Interactive Vehicle Scheduling to re-plan the shipments created in the last transportation zone exercise. The order with the incoterms code of ‘EXW’ should be in a different shipment.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-111
Exercises Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Topic: Pool Distribution Scenario and Conditions At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Understand how the VS Optimizer can be used to model a pool distribution scenario. • Apply a condition rule to an optimization profile so that only transportation demand meeting the conditions are selected for optimization. Rush orders from multiple customers are shipped via a truck to a distribution hub and during this process one or more stop offs can be made on the way to the distribution hub. After the shipment arrives at the hub, the merchandise is reassigned to shipments that will be used to deliver the individual orders to the respective customers. You will test the scenario by creating four ‘rush’ orders, one to each of four different customers. The orders will be consolidated onto one shipment to be delivered from the source location in Dresden (12##) to the distribution hub in Frankfurt (13##). One of the orders will be delivered to a customer after the remaining orders are dropped at the pool distribution hub in Frankfurt. This is an illustration of the multi-stop capabilities of the optimizer in planning. The three remaining orders will be delivered from the distribution hub in Frankfurt (13##) to the respective customers in a multi-stop shipment. 3-1
In this first step you will set up the transportation infrastructure necessary to model the pool distribution scenario: 3-1-1 You must create a TSP Hierarchy that represents the customers to be “pooled”. In this step you will update the TSP_HIER hierarchy structure to assign the customers to the Frankfurt Hub (13##).The customers to be assigned to the Frankfurt Hub are in the table below:
© SAP AG
Node
Relationship
13##
Root
T-S11A##
Child to 13##
T-S22A##
Child to 13##
T-S33A##
Child to 13##
SCM612
8-112
3-1-2 Add your means of transports, FTL## and LTL## to the circular lane, DED000070000. 3-1-3 Add your means of transports (FTL##, LTL##) to the transportation lane DED000070000 to DE-D000060000. 3-1-4 Create a new optimization profile, OPPOOL-## by copying the profile, OPOUT##. Assign your Rule Condition GR##-RUSH to the profile so that only ‘rush’ orders are selected. 3-1-5 Create sales orders using the data in the table below. 1. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11B##
PO Number
08-5-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 1 week
Material
T-ATC1-##
Order Quantity
50 PC
Shipping Condition
01
Document Number:
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
_______________________
2. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11A##
PO Number
08-6-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 1 week
Material
T-ATD2-##
Order Quantity Shipping Condition
55 PC 01
Document Number:
© SAP AG
(Sales Area 1000/10/00)
_______________________
SCM612
8-113
3. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S22A##
PO Number
08-7-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 1 week
Material
T-ATD2-##
Order Quantity Shipping Condition
(Sales Area 1000/10/00)
50 PC 01
Document Number:
_______________________
4. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S33A##
PO Number
08-8-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 1 week
Material
T-ATD2-##
Order Quantity Shipping Condition
(Sales Area 1000/10/00)
50 PC 01
3-1-6 Run interactive vehicle scheduling using the OPPOOL-## profile you created. 3-1-7 Review the planned shipments that were created. How many shipments were created? _______________
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-114
Exercises Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Topic: Multi-Modal Transportation Planning with Order Splitting At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Understand how the VS Optimizer can be used to model a multi-modal transportation planning. • Apply splitting rules to transportation demand to causing splitting of freight units for accurate transportation planning. Many times the quantities, weights, volumes and palletization of materials in a sales order are too large to be physically shipped together in the same truck, trailer or container. These freight units must be split for accurate transportation planning. In TP/VS you will set up a split rule to cause automatic splitting of freight units for the multi-modal transportation scenario. Your Dallas DC (35##) ships one of your products, T-ATC1-## to a customer in Germany who special orders the product. You ship the product by rail to your NY hub (30##). From the NY hub the shipment goes by ship to the Port of Rotterdam (25##). From the Port of Rotterdam the materials are offloaded to trucks for delivery to the customer (T-S44A##) 4-1
In previous exercises you have established the means of transports (RAIL##, SHIP## and TRK##), the resources (G##-RAIL01, G##,SHIP01, and G##-TRK01), and the transshipment hierarchy in TSP_HIER. Before you can test your multi-modal scenario, however, you must create a new optimization profile (OPMM-##) because you will be using different resources and location data. In addition you want to assign your split profile to the optimization profile because the splitting rule is to apply only to your export shipments. 4-1-1 Create the new optimization profile, OPMM-## by copying OPOUT-##. Use the same parameters except for the following location and resource settings: Source Location 35##
Resources G##-RAIL01 G##-SHIP01 G##-TRK01 © SAP AG
SCM612
8-115
4-1-2 Your product, T-ATC1-## is palletized eight PC’s per pallet. You want the split to be based on the maximum number of pallets that will fit in a standard 40’ container. You have determined that 16 pallets is the limit for one container or truck load. Therefore, you want the split rule to cause an automatic split for each group of 16 pallets, which is 128 PC’s. Create a Split Rule to be identified by the number (20 + ##). The parameters for the split rule are shown in the table below. (ex: 20 + Gr 05 = 25)
Rule ID
20 + ##
Rule Description
Split RuleGr. ##
ATP Categories
BM, BR
Area
All
Opt. Profile
OPMM-##
Condition
Leave blank
Priority
Leave blank
Apply Manually
Not selected
Consolidation/Split Control
Use default settings
(sales orders, deliveries)
Dimension/Split Values: Unit
PAL
Dimension
No Dimension
Split Quantity
16
Rounding Quantity
0
Use Veh. Cap.
Not selected
4-1-3 Test your multi-modal scenario with order splitting by entering the following order and then plan it using interactive vehicle scheduling. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S44A##
PO Number
08-9-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Material
T-ATC1-##
Order Quantity
(Sales Area 3000/10/00)
256 PC
4-1-4 Run interactive vehicle scheduling using the OPMM-## profile you created. How may freight units were created? ________________ How many planned shipments were created? __________ © SAP AG
SCM612
8-116
Solutions Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Topic: Interactive Planning
1-1
Within active Model 000 you are to create a cost profile (GR##-CP) that will specify the general, location, shipment and dimensional costs that you will use in your TP/VS planning. The tables below will show the planning costs that you are to assign in your profile. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Application-Specific Master Data → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Maintain Vehicle Scheduling Costs
b
Enter Model name: 000
c
Select Change.
d
In the General tab, select Add lines
e
Enter Cost Profile GR##-CP
f
Choose Save
g
Select the Location tab and select Add Lines
h
Enter the data from the table below (Note: Enter your cost profile id, GR##-CP on each line):
Priority Premature Del
.
. .
Delayed Del.
Premature P.U
Delayed P.U
Non-Delivery
1
250.000
2000.000
250.000
2000.000
1,000,000.000
2
100.000
1000.000
100.000
1000.000
500,000.000
j Choose Save k
© SAP AG
.
Select the Transptn tab, then choose Add Lines
SCM612
.
8-117
l
Means of Trans.
Enter the data from the table below (Note: Enter your cost profile id, GR##-CP on each line): Means of Transport
Fixed Cost
FTL##
50.000
LTL##
40.000
RAIL##
100.000
SHIP##
300.000
TRK##
40.000
n
Choose Save
o
Select the Dimension tab, then choose Add Lines
p
Enter the data from the table below (Note: Enter your cost profile id, GR##-CP on each line):
Cost Dimension
.
Transportation costs
Cost Unit
.
Transportation Max.
Cost Basis
FTL##
E Distance
FTL##
S Stop
LTL##
E Distance
1 Trans Lane
RAIL##
E Distance
1 Trans Lane
SHIP##
E Distance
1 Trans Lane
TRK##
E Distance
1 Trans Lane
© SAP AG
1 Trans Lane 65.000
q
Choose Save
.
r
Choose Exit
.
10
SCM612
0 Dimension
8-118
1-2
To monitor certain situations that can be encountered by the Optimizer, you will create an Alert Profile in the Alert Monitor. The table below lists the data that you will need to establish your alert profile.
VehSched alert profile:
VSAP-##
Description
VS Alert Profile Gr. ##
VS Alerts to be recorded:
Check Availability. Order due date changed by VS Order not scheduled by Optimizer in Transportation Planning No transportation service provider found Loading resource overload
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Supply Chain Monitoring → Alert Monitor Alert Monitor
b
Choose the Overall Profile
c
In the Application-Specific Alert Profile area, enter 000 in the planning version field.
d
Select the VS
e
Enter the VS Alert Prof.: Enter the Description :
f
Select the Select Alert Types type’s hierarchy.
g
Select the “check boxes” for the alerts in the table below:
VS Alerts to be recorded:
button.
tab. VSAP-## VS Alert Profile Gr ## button to expand the alert
Check availability (order due date/time changed by VS) Order not scheduled by Optimizer in Transportation Planning Order was changed in OLTP No transportation service provider found Transportation: Resource is overloaded Vehicle Scheduling - Tendering Alerts (all tendering alerts) Vehicle Scheduling - Resource Alerts (All resource alerts)
© SAP AG
h
Choose the Save VS Alert Profile button.
i
Select Exit
. SCM612
8-119
j 1-3
When the “Data will be lost, Exit Alert Monitor?” message is displayed, select “YES”.
To run the VS Optimizer you must create an optimization profile that gives the optimizer certain information required for it to carry out a planning run. In this exercise you will create an optimization profile: OPIN-## for planning inbound shipments. Profile Name:
OPIN-##
Description:
Inbound Shipments Gr. ##
General tab: Plng Version
000
Alert profile
VSAP-##
Cost profile
GR##-CP
Opt. Runtime
60
Horizons tab: Planning Horizon: 60
Duration (Days) Demand Horizon:
60
Duration (Days) ATP Categories:
AH, BF
Cat. Locations:
10##, 12##
Target: Resources:
G##-FTRK01 – G##-FTRK05
Resource
G##-LTRK01 – G##LTRK05
© SAP AG
Advanced Order Selection tab:
No Entries
TSP Selection tab:
No Entries
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Environment → Current Settings → Transportation Optimization → Define Optimization Profile
b
Enter OPIN-## in the Optimization Profile field.
c
Select Create optimization profile SCM612
. 8-120
d
Enter INBOUND SHPMNTS - GR ## in the Description.
e
Under the General tab, enter the data from the corresponding fields in the table above.
f
Select the Horizons tab, enter the data from the corresponding fields in the table above.
g
Select the ATP Categories tab. Select the checkboxes corresponding to the ATP categories in the table above.
h
Select the Locations tab. 1. Select the Selection options for locations
icon.
2. In the Target area, select the Multiple selections icon Location Number line.
on the
3. Enter the locations from the table in the Select Single Values tab. 4. Select Copy
. .
5. Select Execute i
Select the Resources tab: 1. Select the Selection options for vehicles
icon. .
2. On the Means of Transport line select the Multiple selections icon
3. Enter your two means of transport, FTL## and LTL## under the Select Single Values tab. 4. Select Copy
.
. There should be a check mark in the Sel column for 5. Select Execute each selected resource.
1-4
j
There will not be any entries made in the Advanced order Selection and TSP Selection tabs in this exercise. You can briefly review the data fields under these tabs
k
Choose Save
.
l
Choose Exit
.
Run the Consistency Check on your inbound profile. If there are any errors you should correct the errors before proceeding. Because the consistency check reviews all TP/VS related settings and master data there may be messages that do not apply to your optimization profile. When errors or warnings appear, verify that the data fields reported as inconsistent are related to your data only. You may ignore all other inconsistencies. a
Execute the following transaction by entering the transaction code in the Command field, the select Enter . Transaction code: /n/SAPAPO/VSCC
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-121
b c d
1-5
Verify that the Planning Version field is 000. Scroll down the screen until you see the Optimization profile field. Enter your optimization profile in this field: OPIN-##. Select all of the check boxes in the Optimization dependent checks area.
e f
Choose Execute . Review the Test Results for any message related to your data. If there any inconsistencies found consult with your instructor.
g
Choose Exit
.
In this exercise you will create an optimization profile (OPOUT-##) that will be used to plan outbound shipments for your plant 12##. Profile Name:
OPOUT-##
Description: General tab:
Outbound Shipments Gr. ##
Plng Version
000
Alert profile
VSAP-##
Cost profile
GR##-CP
Opt. Runtime
60
Horizons tab: Planning Horizon: 60
Duration (Days) Demand Horizon:
60
Duration (Days) ATP Categories:
BF,BI,BM
Cat. Locations: Source:
12##
Target
22##
Resources: Resource: MOT: FTRK## MOT: LTRK##
a © SAP AG
G##-FTRK01 – G##-FTRK05 G##-LTRK01 – G##LTRK05
Advanced Order Selection tab:
No Entries
TSP Selection tab:
No Entries
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Environment → SCM612
8-122
Current Settings → Transportation Optimization → Define Optimization Profile b
Enter OPOUT-## in the Optimization Profile field.
c
Select Create optimization profile
d
Enter OUTBOUND SHPMNTS - GR ## in the Description.
e
Under the General tab, enter the data from the corresponding fields in the table above.
f
Select the Horizons tab, enter the data from the corresponding fields in the table above.
g
Select the ATP Categories tab. Select the checkboxes corresponding to the ATP categories in the table above.
h
Select the Locations tab. 1. Select the Selection options for locations
.
icon.
2. In the Source area, select the Multiple selections Location Number line.
icon on the
3. Enter the locations from the table in the Select Single Values tab. .
4. Select Copy
5. In the Target area , select the Multiple selections Location Number line.
icon on the
6. Enter the locations from the table above in the Select Single Values tab. 7. Select Copy
.
8. Select Execute i
.
Select the Resources tab: 1. Select the Selection options for vehicles
icon.
2. On the Means of Transport line select the Multiple selections
icon.
3. Enter your two means of transport, FTL## and LTL## under the Select Single Values tab. 4. Select Copy
.
5. Select Execute . There should be a check mark in the Sel column for each selected resource.
© SAP AG
j
There will not be any entries made in the Advanced order Selection and TSP Selection tabs in this exercise. You can briefly review the data fields under these tabs
k
Choose Save
.
l
Choose Exit
. SCM612
8-123
1-6
Run the Consistency Check on your outbound profile. If there are any errors you should correct the errors before proceeding. Because the consistency check reviews all TP/VS related settings and master data there may be messages that do not apply to your optimization profile. When errors or warnings appear, verify that the data fields reported as inconsistent are related to your data only. You may ignore all other inconsistencies. a
Execute the following transaction by entering the transaction code in the Command field, the select Enter . Transaction code: /n/SAPAPO/VSCC
1-7
b
Verify that the Planning Version field is 000.
c
Scroll down the screen until you see the Optimization profile field. Enter your optimization profile in this field: OPOUT-##.
d
Select all of the check boxes in the Optimization dependent checks area.
e
Choose Execute
f
Review the Test Results for any message related to your data. If there any inconsistencies found consult with your instructor.
g
Choose Exit
.
.
Now, you will use your OPIN-## optimization profile to initiate the optimization process for the purchase order you created in Unit 6. During this process you will learn and reinforce your navigation skills using the interactive optimization transaction. After the optimization run has been completed you will review the data that is displayed on the Vehicle Scheduling screen and review the unassigned "Freight units". 1-7-1 Execute the Interactive Vehicle Scheduling. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Planning → Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
b
Enter ‘OPIN-##’ in the Optimization Profile field.
c
. The system will display the demand horizon in the Choose Enter Selection Periods area, the Source and destination locations and the resources as specified in the optimization profile.
d
Select Execute
e
On the Vehicle Scheduling screen, notice the following:
.
1.
The purchase order you created previously appears in the NonAssigned Freight Units section of the screen.
2.
Your assigned resources are listed in the “Shuffler” area on the left side of the screen.
Answer the following questions: How many non-assigned Freight units are there? ___1___ © SAP AG
SCM612
8-124
How many resources are available? __10___ How many Assigned? ___0___ How many shipments were created ? ____0___ 1-7-2 Run the VS Optimizer. a
Select Start Optimization
.
b
When the Optimizer Settings dialog appears, select Cont.
c
The VSR Optimization screen will appear. Select Start Optimization Run .
d
You should get a message that the optimization process completed successfully.
e
Select the Accept Shipments icon
f
You will get a message” “Planned shipment nnnnnnnnn was created” in the messages area on the screen.
g
Choose Back
h
Select the Shipment View in the shuffler area. The planned shipment will be displayed in the column.
.
.
. This will return you to the Vehicle Scheduling screen.
Answer the following questions: How many non-assigned Freight units are there? __0____ How many resources are available? ____9____ (One was assigned to the planned shipment) How many Assigned Freight units? ___1___ How many shipments were created ? ____1___ 1-7-3 Check the Alert Monitor: a
icon. The system will open up the Alert Select the Alert Monitor display in the lower portion of the shuffler area. How many alerts were displayed ? ____0___
b
Select the Alert Monitor
icon again to close the Alert display.
1-7-4 Release the shipment. a © SAP AG
Select the shipment in the shuffler area. SCM612
8-125
1-8
b
Choose the Release Shipment icon. The system will now replace the temporary planning shipment number with a “permanent” shipment number. The status of the shipment is now changed to ‘C’ Published/released.
c
Choose Save
d
Select Exit
to save the results of your interactive vehicle scheduling. .
You will now conduct an interactive vehicle scheduling run for outbound shipments using your optimization profile OPOUT-##: 1-8-1 Initiate the optimization process using your optimization profile OPOUT-## and review the data that is displayed on the Vehicle Scheduling screen and review the unassigned Freight units. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Planning → Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
b
Enter ‘OPOUT-##’ in the Optimization Profile field.
c
Choose Enter . The system will display the demand horizon in the Selection Periods area, the Source and destination locations and the resources as specified in the optimization profile.
d
Select Execute
e
On the Vehicle Scheduling screen, notice the following:
.
1.
The two sales orders and the stock transport order you created previously appears in the Non-Assigned Freight Units section of the screen.
2.
Your assigned resources are listed in the “Shuffler” area on the left side of the screen.
Answer the following questions: How many Non-Assigned Freight units are there? ___3__ How many resources are available? __9____ How many Assigned Freight units? ___0__ How many shipments were created ? ___0___ 1-8-2 Create a planned shipment and release a shipment manually from one of the sales orders. Use an LTL resource.
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-126
a
First, you must select a resource from the list of resources in the Shuffler. Select resource G##-LTRK01.
b
Select one of the sales orders in the Non-Assigned Freight Units list.
c
Select the assign order
d
The system will display the Transportation Scheduling Specifications for Scheduling dialog screen. Since the order is being planned manually, the system is allowing you to enter the Departure Date-Time in addition to making any changes to the Loading and Unloading times, and Arrival Date-Time.
e
Enter a Departure Date-Time two days earlier than the Arrival DateTime.
f
. The system will return you back to the Vehicle Select Choose Scheduling screen. Notice that the system has assigned a planning shipment number to the manual shipment you just created.
g
Select the shipment in the shuffler area.
h
Choose the Release Shipment icon. The system will now replace the temporary planning shipment number with a “permanent” shipment number. The status of the shipment is now changed to ‘C’ Published/released.
i
Choose Save
icon.
to save the results of your interactive vehicle scheduling.
1-8-3 Run the VS Optimizer for the two Non-Assigned Freight Units. a
Select Start Optimization
.
b
When the Optimizer Settings dialog appears, select Cont.
c
The VSR Optimization screen will appear. Select Start Optimization Run .
d
You will get a message that the optimization was completed successfully.
e
Select the Accept Shipments icon
f
You will get two messages that “Planned shipment nnnnnnnnn was created” in the messages area on the screen.
g
Choose Back
h
Select the Shipment View in the shuffler area. The planned shipments will be displayed in the column.
i
Select Save
.
.
. This will return you to the Vehicle Scheduling screen.
.
Answer the following questions: © SAP AG
SCM612
8-127
How many Assigned Freight Units are there for each shipment? ___1___ (One F.U. was assigned to each planned shipment) How many resources are available? ___6___ (Each shipment planned and/or released is assigned one resource) How many Non-Assigned Freight Units? __0___ How many shipments were created ? ___2___ (One for the STO, One for the sales order) 1-8-4 Check the Alert Monitor: a
icon. The system will open up the Alert Select the Alert Monitor display in the lower portion of the shuffler area. How many alerts were displayed ? ____1___ (Check Availability Alerts)
b
Select the Alert Monitor
icon again to close the Alert display.
1-8-5 Release the planned shipments. a.
Select Shipment View .
b
Select the ‘planned’ shipments.
c
Select Release Shipment
d
Document the new ‘permanent’ shipment numbers.
.
.
Shipment document number: _______________________ Shipment document number: _______________________ 1-8-6 Perform manual Transportation Service Provider Assignment for the shipments. Assign TSP 0000001058 to each shipment. a
Select all of the ‘published/released/ shipments.
b
Select TSP Selection
c
Select the Manual Assignment radio button and then enter ‘0000001058’ in the adjacent field.
d
Select Execute
e
Select Save
.
. .
1-8-7 Review the data related to planned/released shipments. a © SAP AG
Select one of the release shipments by double-clicking on it. This will cause the details of the shipment to be shown in the Transportation SCM612
8-128
Activities/Itinerary and Assigned Freight Units sections under the Tabular Planning tab. b
Under the Tabular Planning tab, in the Transportation Activities/Itinerary section, choose the Change View:Section/Action icon. This will present a more detailed display of the itinerary of the shipment. Select the icon again to return to the previous view.
c
Using the tab selection list information under this tab.
d
Review the data in the remaining tabs.
. Select the Details tab. Review the
1-8-8 Transfer the delivery data to the ERP System using the publishing process. a
In the Menu bar select Goto
OLTP Generation of Deliveries
b
In the Transfer Orders to OLTP screen, select your orders/freight units.
c
Choose Transfer Orders . The shipment data will be transferred to the ERP system where the corresponding outbound deliveries will be created. Go to the ERP system and using transaction VA03 (sales order display) and document flow, verify that the delivery documents were created.
1-8-8 Transfer the shipment data for your shipments to the ERP System. a
Select all of your shipments.
b
Choose the Check and Transfer . . The system will transfer the shipment related data to the ERP system and create the shipment documents there.
1-8-9 Check the Shipment Status of all shipment documents in the Vehicle Scheduling screen.. Shipment Status __E – Shipment transferred to OLTP_____________ 1-8-10 View the delivery and shipment documents in the ERP System for one of the sales orders.
© SAP AG
a
Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → VA03 – Display
b
Enter the document number for one of the sales orders you created previously.
c
Choose Enter
d
From the Sales Order Overview screen, place the cursor in the Sold-to party field.
e
Choose: Environment → Display document Flow
f
In document flow, Select the shipment document.
g
Go to the Shipment document overview screen and:
.
SCM612
8-129
Verify the carrier assignment: Verify the Stages:
© SAP AG
______________
______________
What is the Shipment Type?:
______________
What is the Trans.Pl.Point?:
______________
SCM612
8-130
Solutions Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Topic: Using Transportation Zone Hierarchies and Incompatibilities
2-1
Although a transportation zone hierarchy has already been established, TZONE, you will review the pertinent settings: 2-1-1 First, look at the hierarchy structure definition table. In this table the TZONE hierarchy is defined as a Location hierarchy with two levels (Two is the standard and can't be exceeded.). a
Go to the Define Hierarchy Structure at: SCM IMG: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Hierarchy → Define Hierarchy Structure
b
Display the settings for the TZONE Hierarchy Structure.
2-1-2 The second relevant table is the Maintain Transportation-Relevant Hierarchy table. In this table, you assign your transportation zone hierarchy to the VS application. a
Maintain Transportation-Relevant Hierarchy at:
SCM IMG → Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) → Basic Settings → Maintain Transportation-Relevant Hierarchy Display the settings. 2-1-3 The transportation zone hierarchy should be created before any customer location data is transferred to APO. When the hierarchy is created first, the system will automatically update the hierarchy with the transportation zones and associated customer locations. To see your customers in the transportation zone hierarchy go to the Hierarchy master data table. Verify that your customers are in transportation zones DE-D000060000, DED000070000 or DE-D000080000. a
Display the Transportation Hierarchy Zone master data table: SCM SAP menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Hierarchy → Maintain Hierarchy
© SAP AG
b
Enter ‘TZONE’ in Hierarchy Name.
c
Select Display
. SCM612
8-131
d
Drill down in zones: DE-D000060000 DE-D000070000 DE-D000080000
e
Verify that your customers are in these zones. Customer
T. Zone
T-S11A## T-S22A## T-S33A## T-S11B## T-S11C## You can use the Find Objects in Hierarchy to locate your customers within the transportation zones. Just select the icon, then enter the customer number in the Char Value From field. Select Adopt
to display.
2-1-4 To test the use of Transportation Zone Hierarchies: Create four sales orders: 1. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11A##
PO Number
08-1-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Incoterms
EXW
Material
T-ATD2-##
Order Quantity
50 PC
Document Number:
© SAP AG
SCM612
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
_______________________
8-132
2. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S22A##
PO Number
08-2-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Incoterms
CIF
Material
T-ATD2-##
Order Quantity
(Sales Area 1000/10/00)
55 PC T-ATD3-##
Material Order Quantity
50 PC
Document Number:
_______________________
3. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S33A##
PO Number
08-3-##
Incoterms
CIF
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Material
T-ATD2-##
Order Quantity
(Sales Area 1000/10/00)
50 PC T-ATD3-##
Material Order Quantity
50 PC
Document Number:
_______________________
4. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S33A##
PO Number
08-4-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks+1 Day
Incoterms
CIF
Material
T-ATD2-##
Order Quantity
50 PC T-ATD3-##
Material Order Quantity
50 PC
Document Number: © SAP AG
(Sales Area 1000/10/00)
SCM612
_______________________ 8-133
a
Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → VA01- Create
b
Enter and save the sales orders. Record the document numbers.
2-1-5 Use your optimizing profile OPOUT-## to plan the shipments and save the planned data but document the following: How many shipments were created? ____________________ What was the optimized costs? a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Planning → Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
b
Enter ‘OPOUT-##’ in the Optimization Profile field.
c
. The system will display the demand horizon in the Choose Enter Selection Periods area, the Source and destination locations and the resources as specified in the optimization profile.
d
Select Execute
e
On the Vehicle Scheduling screen, notice the following: 1.
© SAP AG
____________________
.
The four sales orders you created appear in the Non-Assigned Freight Units section of the screen.
f
Select Start Optimization
.
g
When the Optimizer Settings dialog appears, select Cont.
h
The VSR Optimization screen will appear. Select Start Optimization Run .
i
You should get a message that the optimization process completed successfully.
j
Select the Accept Shipments icon
f
You will get three messages that “Planned shipment nnnnnnnnn was created” in the messages area on the screen.
g
Choose Back
h
Select the Shipment View in the shuffler area. The planned shipments will be displayed in the column.
k
Select Save
l
Document the number of shipments created: _______3_________
.
.
. This will return you to the Vehicle Scheduling screen.
.
SCM612
8-134
2-1-6 To use the transportation zone hierarchy in planning, a transportation lane must exist between the source plants/DC's and the transportation zones. In addition, a "circular" transportation lane must exist in which the source and target locations are the transportation zone. In this exercise, you will check transportation zone DE-D000060000 for the circular relationship and add your Transportation Methods to the lane (FTL## and LTL##). a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Transportation Lane → Transportation Lane
b
Enter the following: Model Name
000
Start Location
12##
Dest. Location
DE-D000060000
c
Select the
button.
d
Select the
e
In the General Data dialog screen that appears on the right side of the screen, enter the following:
button.
Description
Gr. ##
f
Select Copy and close
.
g
In the Means of Transport section, select Creation of a new entry
h
Enter the following in the Means of Transport screen on the right side:
.
Validity: Means of Trans.
FTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .800
Mns of Trsp.Costs i © SAP AG
Choose Generate Proposal SCM612
. 8-135
j
Select Copy
.
k
Enter the second Means of Transport from the table below: Validity: Means of Trans.
LTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: 1.000
Mns of Trsp.Costs l
Choose Generate Proposal
m Select Copy and Close n
Choose Save
o
Choose Exit
2-1-6-1
© SAP AG
.
.
.
Update the circular transportation lane: DE-D000060000 a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Transportation Lane → Transportation Lane
b
Enter the following: Model Name
000
Start Location
DE-D000060000
Dest. Location
DE-D000060000
c
Select
.
d
In the Means of Transport section, select Creation of a new entry
SCM612
.
8-136
e
Enter the following in the Means of Transport screen on the right side: Validity: Means of Trans.
LTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .150
Mns of Trsp.Costs f
Choose Generate Proposal
g
Select Copy and Close
h
Choose Save
i
Choose Exit
.
.
.
2-1-7 Now that you have a transportation lane from your Dresden Plant (12##) to the transportation zone containing the customers for which you created the sales orders, you should see shipment consolidation occur in TP/VS planning. Use your optimizing profile OPOUT-## to plan the shipments and save the planned data but document the following: How many shipments were created? _________1__________ What was the optimized costs?
© SAP AG
____________________
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Planning → Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
b
Enter ‘OPOUT-##’ in the Optimization Profile field.
c
Choose Enter . The system will display the demand horizon in the Selection Periods area, the Source and destination locations and the resources as specified in the optimization profile.
d
Select Execute
e
Select Start Optimization
f
When the Optimizer Settings dialog appears, select Cont.
.
SCM612
. . 8-137
g
The VSR Optimization screen will appear. Select Start Optimization Run .
h
You should get a message that the optimization process completed successfully.
i
Select the Accept Shipments icon
j
You will get one message that “Planned shipment nnnnnnnnn was created” in the messages area on the screen.
k
Choose Back
l
Select the Shipment View in the shuffler area. The planned shipments will be displayed in the column.
m Select Save n 2-2
.
. This will return you to the Vehicle Scheduling screen.
.
Document the number of shipments created: ______1_________
You will now assign the incompatibility rule you created earlier to your OPOUT-## optimization profile. This rule specifies that orders with the Incoterms of EXW cannot be shipped with orders having an incoterms code of CIF. One of the orders you entered previously has an incoterms code of ‘EXW’. All of the other orders have an incoterms code of ‘CIF’. 2-2-1 Assign your compatibility rule to your OPOUT-## optimization profile. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment Current Settings Transportation Optimization Define Compatibilities
b
Select your Compatibility Type (20 + ##) from the drop-down list using the Select Compatibility Type field.
c
Select the Switch to Change Mode
d
Enter ‘OPOUT-##’ in the Opt. Profile field.
e
Choose Save
icon.
.
2-2-2 Use Interactive Vehicle Scheduling to re-plan the shipments created in the last transportation zone exercise. The order with the incoterms code of ‘EXW’ should be in a different shipment.
© SAP AG
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Planning → Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
b
Enter ‘OPOUT-##’ in the Optimization Profile field.
SCM612
8-138
c
Choose Enter . The system will display the demand horizon in the Selection Periods area, the Source and destination locations and the resources as specified in the optimization profile.
d
Select Execute
e
Select Start Optimization
f
When the Optimizer Settings dialog appears, select Cont.
g
The VSR Optimization screen will appear. Select Start Optimization Run .
h
You should get a message that the optimization process completed successfully.
i
Select the Accept Shipments icon
j
You will get two messages that “Planned shipment nnnnnnnnn was created” in the messages area on the screen.
k
Choose Back
l
Select the Shipment View in the shuffler area. The planned shipments will be displayed in the column.
m Select Save n
© SAP AG
. . .
. This will return you to the Vehicle Scheduling screen.
.
Document the number of shipments created: ______2________
SCM612
8-139
Solutions Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Topic: Pool Distribution Scenario
3-1
In this first step you will set up the transportation infrastructure necessary to model the pool distribution scenario: 3-1-1 You must create a TSP Hierarchy that represents the customers to be “pooled”. In this step you will update the TSP_HIER hierarchy structure to assign the customers to the Frankfurt Hub (13##).The customers to be assigned to the Frankfurt Hub are in the table below: Node
Relationship
13##
Root
T-S11A##
Child to 13##
T-S22A##
Child to 13##
T-S33A##
Child to 13##
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu Advanced Planning and Optimization Master Data Hierarchy Maintain Hierarchy
b
Enter the following: Hierarchy Name
© SAP AG
TSP_HIER
c
Select Enter
.
d
Select Change
e
In the hierarchy display on the bottom portion of the screen, select the top line with the TSP_HIER node.
f
Choose the Add Objects
g
In the Select Work Area dialog that appears, enter your “Root” node, 13##.
h
Choose Adopt
i
Select your Frankfurt Hub 13## root node in the hierarchy display at the bottom of the screen by double-clicking. The node will appear in the Hierarchy Fast Entry area at the top of the screen.
j
Enter your customers T-S11A##, T-S22A## and T-S33A## in the Location fields in the Hierarchy Fast Entry area. Choose Enter .
.
button.
.
SCM612
8-140
k
Select Transfer
l
Choose Save
.
m Choose Exit
.
n
.
Choose Exit
.
3-1-2 Add your means of transports, FTL## and LTL## to the circular lane, DED000070000. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data→ Transportation Lane → Transportation Lane
b
Enter the following: Model Name
000
Start Location
DE-D000070000
Dest. Location
DE-D000070000
b
Select the
button.
c
In the Means of Transport section, select Creation of a new entry
d
Enter the following in the Means of Transport screen on the right side:
.
Validity: Means of Trans.
FTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .300
Mns of Trsp.Costs
© SAP AG
h
Choose Generate Proposal
i
Select Copy
.
.
SCM612
8-141
j
Enter the second Means of Transport from the table below: Validity: Means of Trans.
LTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .150
Mns of Trsp.Costs l
Choose Generate Proposal
i
Select Copy and Close
j
Choose Save
k
Choose Exit
.
.
.
3-1-3 Add your means of transports (FTL##, LTL##) to the transportation lane DED000070000 to DE-D000060000.
© SAP AG
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data→ Transportation Lane → Transportation Lane
b
Enter the following: Model Name
000
Start Location
DE-D000070000
Dest. Location
DE-D000060000
b
Select the
button.
c
In the Means of Transport section, select Creation of a new entry
SCM612
.
8-142
d
Enter the following in the Means of Transport screen on the right side: Validity: Means of Trans.
FTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .300
Mns of Trsp.Costs h
Choose Generate Proposal
.
i
Select Copy
j
Enter the second Means of Transport from the table below:
.
Validity: Means of Trans.
LTL##
Start Date
Today’s Date
End Date
12/31/9999
Control Indicators: Valid for All Products
Checked
Aggr. Planning
Not checked
Detld Planning
Checked
Parameters: .150
Mns of Trsp.Costs
© SAP AG
l
Choose Generate Proposal
i
Select Copy and Close
j
Choose Save
k
Choose Exit
.
.
.
SCM612
8-143
3-1-4 Create a new optimization profile, OPPOOL-## by copying the profile, OPOUT-##. In this process you will assign the Rule condition, GR##-RUSH so that only the rush orders you enter will be selected for optimization a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Environment → Current Settings → Transportation Optimization → Define Optimization Profile
b
Enter OPOUT-## in the Optimization Profile field.
c
Select Edit optimization profile
d
Select Copy settings to new profile
e
In the Copy Optimization Profile dialog, enter ‘OPPOOL-##’ in the To profile field.
f
Select Copy settings to new profile
g
Enter ‘Pool Distribution Gr. ##’ in the Description field.
h
Select the Advanced Order Selection tab.
i
Enter ‘GR##-RUSH’ in the Cond Name field.
j
Choose Save
.
k
Choose Exit
.
l
Choose Exit
.
. .
.
3-1-5 Create sales orders using the data in the table below. 1. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11B##
PO Number
08-5-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 1 week
Material
T-ATC1-##
Order Quantity
50 PC
Shipping Condition
01
Document Number:
© SAP AG
SCM612
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
_______________________
8-144
2. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11A##
PO Number
08-6-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 1 week
Material
T-ATD2-##
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
55 PC
Order Quantity
01
Shipping Condition
Document Number:
_______________________
3. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S22A##
PO Number
08-7-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 1 week
Material
T-ATD2-##
(Sales Area 1000/10/00)
50 PC
Order Quantity
01
Shipping Condition
Document Number:
_______________________
4. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S33A##
PO Number
08-8-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 1 week
Material
T-ATD2-## 50 PC
Order Quantity
01
Shipping Condition Document Number:
© SAP AG
(Sales Area 1000/10/00)
_______________________
SCM612
8-145
a
Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → VA01- Create
b
Enter the sales order data from the table except for the Shipping Condition.
c
After entering the Material and Quantity, select Enter
d
Select the Display doc. header details
e
On the Header Data screen, select the Shipping tab.
f
In the Shipping cond. Field, select ’01 – As soon as possible’.
g
Choose Enter
h
When the ‘Redetermine routes and shipping for all items?’ dialog appears,
.
icon.
. .
select Redetermine i
Choose Save
.
j
Record the Sales Order Number.
k
Repeat steps b. thru j. for the remaining orders.
3-1-6 Run interactive vehicle scheduling using the OPPOOL-## profile you created.
© SAP AG
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Planning → Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
b
Enter ‘OPPOOL-##’ in the Optimization Profile field.
c
Choose Enter . The system will display the demand horizon in the Selection Periods area, the Source and destination locations and the resources as specified in the optimization profile.
d
Select Execute
e
Select Start Optimization
f
When the Optimizer Settings dialog appears, select Cont.
g
The VSR Optimization screen will appear. Select Start Optimization Run .
h
You should get a message that the optimization process completed successfully.
i
Select the Accept Shipments icon
j
You will get two messages that “Planned shipment nnnnnnnnn was created” in the messages area on the screen.
k
Choose Back
. . .
.
. This will return you to the Vehicle Scheduling screen.
SCM612
8-146
l
Select the Shipment View in the shuffler area. The planned shipments will be displayed in the column.
m Select Save
.
3-1-7 Review the planned shipments that were created.
© SAP AG
a
Review each of the planned shipments by selecting the shipment in the shuffler area, then look at the shipment data in the Transportation Activities/Itinerary section. Observe the Source and Destination locations for each of the planned shipments. Also note the freight units in the Assigned freight Units section. You should see that one of the planned shipments moves the orders together in one shipment to the Frankfurt Hub, 13##, except that on order is dropped off to customer T-S11B## on the way to the hub (a stop-off). The remaining orders are delivered via the second shipment from the Frankfurt pool distribution hub (13##) to their respective destinations.
b
How many shipments were created? ______2________
SCM612
8-147
Solutions Unit: Vehicle Scheduling (VS) Topic: Multi-Modal Transportation Planning with Order Splitting
4-1
In previous exercises you have established the means of transports (RAIL##, SHIP## and TRK##), the resources (G##-RAIL01, G##,SHIP01, and G##-TRK01), and the transshipment hierarchy in TSP_HIER. Before you can test your multi-modal scenario, however, you must create a new optimization profile (OPMM-##) because you will be using different resources and location data. In addition you want to assign your split profile to the optimization profile because the splitting rule is to apply only to your export shipments. 4-1-1 Create the new optimization profile, OPMM-## by copying OPOUT-##. Use the same parameters except for the following location and resource settings: Source Location 35## Resources G##-RAIL01 G##-SHIP01 G##-TRK01
© SAP AG
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Environment → Current Settings → Transportation Optimization → Define Optimization Profile
b
Enter OPOUT-## in the Optimization Profile field.
c
Select Edit optimization profile
d
Select Copy settings to new profile
e
In the Copy Optimization Profile dialog, enter ‘OPMM-##’ in the To profile field.
f
Select Copy settings to new profile
g
Enter ‘Multi-Modal Gr. ##’ in the Description field.
h
Select the ATP Categories tab. Select the checkboxes for the BM and BR ATP categories in the table below. Deselect all others.
SCM612
. .
.
8-148
i
Select the Locations tab. 1. Select the Selection options for locations
icon.
2. In the Source area, select the Multiple selections icon Location Number line. 3. Select the Delete entire selection line
on the
.
4. Enter 35## in the Select Single Values tab 5. Select Copy
.
6. In the Target area, select the Multiple selections icon Location Number line. 7. Select the Delete entire selection line 8. Select Copy
.
.
5. Select Execute j
on the
.
Select the Resources tab: 1. Select the Selection options for vehicles
icon.
2. On the Means of Transport line select the Multiple selections
icon.
3. Enter your the means of transport, RAIL##, SHIP##, and TRK## under the Select Single Values tab. .
4. Select Copy
5. Select Execute . There should be a check mark in the Sel column for each selected resource. The selected resources should match the resources in the table above.
© SAP AG
k
Choose Save
.
l
Choose Exit
.
m Choose Exit
.
SCM612
8-149
4-1-2 Your product, T-ATC1-## is palletized eight PC’s per pallet. You want the split to be based on the maximum number of pallets that will fit in a standard 40’ container. You have determined that 16 pallets is the limit for one container or truck load. Therefore, you want the split rule to cause an automatic split for each group of 16 pallets, which is 128 PC’s. Create a Split Rule to be identified by the number (20 + ##). The parameters for the split rule are shown in the table below. Rule ID
20 + ##
Rule Description
Split RuleGr. ##
ATP Categories
BM, BR
Area
All
Opt. Profile
OPMM-##
Condition
Leave blank
Priority
Leave blank
Apply Manually
Not selected
Consolidation/Split Control
Use default settings
(ex: 20 + Gr 05 = 25) (sales orders, deliveries)
Dimension/Split Values:
© SAP AG
Unit
PAL
Dimension
No Dimension
Split Quantity
16
Rounding Quantity
0
Use Veh. Cap.
Not selected
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment Current Settings Transportation Optimization Define Split Rules
b
Select Switch to Change Mode
c
Select New Entries
d
Enter the new Rule ID in the Copy Condition dialog.
e
Select Continue
f
Enter the Split Rule description from the table above.
g
Select the Multiple Selection
. .
SCM612
button on the ATP Categories line.
8-150
h
In the ATP Categories dialog that appears, move the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the dialog screen to the left until you see the Select column with the check boxes. Select the ATP categories listed in the table above.
i
Select Continue . You should now see a description of the selected ATP categories next to the ‘ATP Categories’.
j
Set the Area and Opt. Profile values as listed in the table above.
k
Now you will set up the pallet dimension that will trigger the freight unit split. At the bottom of the Dimension/Split Values area, select Insert Row .
l
Enter ‘PAL’ in the Unit field.
m Enter 16 in the Split Quantity field. n
Choose Save
.
o
Choose Exit
.
4-1-3 Test your multi-modal scenario with order splitting by entering the following order and then plan it using interactive vehicle scheduling. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S44A##
PO Number
08-9-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Material
T-ATC1-##
Order Quantity
(Sales Area 3000/10/00)
256 PC
Document Number:
_______________________
a
Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → VA01- Create
b
Enter and save the sales order. Record the document number.
4-1-4 Run interactive vehicle scheduling using the OPMM-## profile you created.
© SAP AG
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Planning → Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
b
Enter ‘OPMM-##’ in the Optimization Profile field. SCM612
8-151
c
Choose Enter . The system will display the demand horizon in the Selection Periods area, the Source and destination locations and the resources as specified in the optimization profile.
d
Select Execute
e
In the Non-Assigned Freight Units area there should be two freight units. This is because the split profile was set up, by default, to be applied automatically.
f
To see the freight unit split information AND to create the delivery documents that will be used in planning and execution of ERP processes
.
like warehouse management, select the Change Freight Units g
Get acquainted with the general layout of the screen and the information it contains.
h
Select both freight units lines that have the quantities of 128. The line must be highlighted.
i
Select the Create Deliveries
j
The Change Freight Unit screen will appear with your two freight units
icon.
shown. Select the Transfer Orders
button.
k
You will get a Log that indicates that your delivery data has been transferred to the ERP System.
l.
Choose Back
m Choose Back
© SAP AG
icon.
. to return to the Vehicle Scheduling screen.
n
In another session, go to the ERP System and use transaction VA03 to view the sales order and from there choose Document flow to see the two deliveries that were created.
o
Return back to your Vehicle Scheduling screen.
p
Select the Refresh icon. The deliveries that were created in ERP should replace the sales order freight units in the Non-Assigned Freight Units area.
q
Select Start Optimization
r
When the Optimizer Settings dialog appears, select Cont.
s
The VSR Optimization screen will appear. Select Start Optimization Run .
t
You should get a message that the optimization process completed successfully.
u
Select the Accept Shipments icon
v
You will get three messages that “Planned shipment nnnnnnnnn was created” in the messages area on the screen. SCM612
. .
.
8-152
w
Choose Back
. This will return you to the Vehicle Scheduling screen.
x
Select the Shipment View in the shuffler area. The planned shipments will be displayed in the column.
y
Select Save
z
Select each shipment and review the information in the Transportation Activities/Itinerary area. You should notice that one shipment has been created for each leg/mode of transportation.
.
How may freight units were created? ________________ How many planned shipments were created? __________
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-153
© SAP AG
SCM612
8-154
Contents: TSP Selection Basics TSP Optimization Setup Continuous Moves Transportation Allocation and Business Shares TSP Selection Collaboration/Tendering
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-1
After completing this unit, you will be able to: Describe the TSP selection process Make the necessary master data and configuration settings to perform automatic TSP selection. Explain continuous move processing and the required configuration and master data settings. Perform the necessary configuration settings and master data requirements to enable transportation allocations and business share processing. Perform manual and automatic TSP selection. Outline the TSP collaboration and tendering process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-2
Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection Lesson 1: TSP Selection Basics Lesson 2: TSP Optimization Setup Lesson 3: Continuous Moves Lesson 4: Transportation Allocation and Business Shares Lesson 5: TSP Selection Lesson 6: Collaboration/Tendering
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-3
After completing the shipment planning process the PC manufacturer wants to use the TP/VS Transportation Service Provider selection process to automatically assign freight TSP’s to the planned shipments.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-4
Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection Lesson 1: TSP Selection Basics Lesson 2: TSP Optimization Setup Lesson 3: Continuous Moves Lesson 4: Transportation Allocation and Business Shares Lesson 5: TSP Selection Lesson 6: Collaboration/Tendering
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-5
!
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the characteristics of the TSP selection process in TP/VS.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-6
For the project implementation team of the PC manufacturer it is important to understand the underlying concepts and data related to TSP selection.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-7
"#
$
Configuration
Master Data
Modeling
Plan Shipments Manually Optimizer Dynamic Route Determination Create/Transfer Shipments
Transportation Service Provider Selection
Create/Transfer Deliveries
Releasing Shipments and TSP Tendering
SAP AG 2008
After the basic TP/VS customizing, establishment of the appropriate master data and creation of the planning and cost profiles, the optimization of transportation demands may be performed. This is called the “optimization” process. It may be performed interactively or in background. Backorder processing carried out in the global ATP component can affect the vehicle scheduling determination in TP/VS. Upon completion of the planning for one or more shipments, automatic carrier selection may be performed. Based on the carrier selection profile a carrier will be assigned to each shipment selected. To transfer planned shipments and their corresponding delivery documents to the OLTP or ERP system for execution, the process of “publishing” must be performed first. An optional process that is part of the collaborative planning strategy of supply chain management is carrier tendering. The carrier tendering process, available in different scenarios, gives the shipper the ability to notify potential carriers of the availability of a shipment and its characteristics. The carrier, in turn, can accept or decline the tender offer and report that decision back to the shipper using various automated techniques. After shipments are published, they and their related delivery documents can be transferred to the OLTP or ERP System for execution. This step represents the final process in the process flow.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-8
TSP selection can be made… Manually Automatically using the TSP Optimizer Optimization options: Strategies (only relevant to automatic TSP selection) TSP Priority (highest priority first) Costs Continuous move Business share (only relevant to automatic TSP selection) Check against transportation allocations Goal: Find the TSP with the lowest costs respecting restrictions like transportation allocations, business share, etc.
SAP AG 2008
You can use the transportation service provider selection (TSP selection) to assign a suitable transportation service provider (TSP) to your shipments either manually or automatically. Priority: The system determines the TSP on the basis of a priority which has been defined on the transportation lane. This means that the system chooses the TSP with the highest priority first, taking into account the various restrictions. Costs: The system determines the TSP on the basis of the lowest total costs. You can take into account either internal or external costs (Cost Origin): • Internal costs: - Transportation costs and TSP costs that you define for your TSPs: - You can define transportation costs per shipment (EA), weight, or volume. - You define TSP costs per kilometer. • External costs (ERP): - Freight costs that you define in the ERP system. For more information, see the SAP Library for the ERP system under Logistics → Logistics Execution → Transportation → Shipment Cost Processing. • External costs (BAdI): - You can use method GET_EXTERNAL_COSTS of Business Add-In /SAPAPO/VS_CS_SELECT to deactivate the freight cost calculation in the ERP system and to connect another system. Continuous Move: As part of the automatic TSP selection process, the TSP optimizer tries to combine shipments by forming continuous moves. The goal is to reduce the costs of shipping by assigning additional shipments to a TSP. The TSP gives a discount on all shipments that are linked via continuous move assignment. © SAP AG
SCM612
9-9
% History of the carrier/TSP selection optimizer: Original TP/VS carrier selection was written in ABAP Customer specific carrier selection optimizer retro-fitted into SCM 5.0 (with enhanced functionality), replaces previously used heuristic TSP selection optimizer written in C++ Separate executable, called from ABAP (TSP in TP/VS) The carrier selection problem is solved by: problem formulation as mixed integer linear program (MILP)
SAP AG 2008
Optimization as part of the transportation service provider selection (TSP selection) determines the assignment of transportation service providers (TSP’s) with the lowest costs to shipments. It aims to achieve the following goals: •
Reduction in total costs
•
Consideration of all capacity restrictions for means of transport and TSP’s (from the transportation lane; maximum capacity is a hard constraint, minimum capacity is a soft constraint)
•
Consideration of business shares (soft constraints; from the transportation lane)
The total costs represent the weighted total of the following individual costs: •
Non-delivery costs for shipments that the optimizer cannot assign
•
Costs for the assignment of TSP’s to shipments
•
Penalty costs for violating business shares
•
The total of all the discounts for continuous moves is subtracted from these total costs.
The optimizer takes into account transportation zone hierarchies and hierarchical relationships between means of transport. You define hierarchies between means of transport by specifying higher-level means of transport when defining means of transport. The optimization problem is solved by mixed-integer linear programming.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-10
!
&
SAP AG 2008
There must be a Location Master created for each TSP that will be used in the TSP selection process. These location masters are normally copied from the Vendor Master in the ERP system using the APO Core Interface (CIF). However, with the exception of the SCAC code, all parameters in the TSP tab of the TSP location master must be entered manually. The ‘TSP’ tab and the data fields contained therein will appear for all Location Type 1020 (TSP) records. In the TSP tab, you can enter the SCAC code. The Standard Carrier Alpha Code (SCAC) is a unique two-to-four-letter code used to identify transportation companies. This field is copied from the ERP system. If a TSP is to be considered for continuous moves, the ‘Continuous Move’ box should be checked. It is also necessary to enter a continuous move discount percentage for the TSP in all transportation lanes in which the TSP can be assigned to a continuous move. Also assigned in the TSP location record is the allocation determination procedure to be used if the TSP is subject to allocations for any shipment assignment. The ‘Performance (%)’ field contains the on-time performance percentage for the TSP. The performance percentage is used is determining the TSP costs in the TSP selection process.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-11
'
(
For TSP selection, a shipment is defined by: Source location Destination location Means of transport A Time Non-delivery penalty
(Truck, June 23)
B
(BigTruck, June 24)
For each shipment and TSP, it is determined whether the TSP can be assigned to the shipment, and if yes, what is the cost. The TSP performance is included in the costs passed on to the optimizer. That is, the worse the TSP' s performance, the higher the associated costs.
SAP AG 2008
The automatic TSP selection process is based on data related to the transportation lane to which a shipment is assigned. In the vehicle scheduling process, a vehicle resource is assigned to each shipment. The vehicle resource is assigned to a means of transport that has been defined within the transportation lane. One of prerequisites for automatic TSP selection is that each TSP must be assigned to each means of transport that represents its “mode” of transportation. For example trucking TSP’s will be assigned to means of transport that represents truck-related shipping; whereas, rail carriers will be assigned to means of transport that have been created to represent rail-related shipping. Within the Means of Transport records assigned to a transportation lane there are TSP selection related data parameters. Within each TSP record assigned to a means of transport there are also TSP selection related parameters. In fact, TSP records are only created if automatic TSP selection will be performed for shipments assigned to a transportation lane. The TSP performance percentage is entered in the TSP’s location master record. The TSP Performance is included via the following formula: Costs = Costs / (TSP performance * 100).
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-12
!
)
You should now be able to: Make the necessary basic master data and configuration setting for automatic TSP selection.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-13
%
Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection Lesson 1: TSP Selection Basics Lesson 2: TSP Optimization Setup Lesson 3: Continuous Moves Lesson 4: Transportation Allocation and Business Shares Lesson 5: TSP Selection Lesson 6: Collaboration/Tendering
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-14
%
!
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Make the necessary basic master data and configuration setting for automatic TSP selection.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-15
%
A decision has been by the PC manufacturer to perform automatic TSP selection after planned shipments have been created. It is necessary to understand the basic master data and customizing activities required to establish the selection environment.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-16
#
%
*
SAP AG 2008
The basic control of automatic TSP selection is made in the TSP Selection tab in the VS Optimization profile. There are four groups of settings in the TSP Selection tab in the VS Optimization profile. The settings in the TSP Selection Control section are used to control the basic TSP selection process. The settings here indicate the status level a shipment must have before automatic TSP determination can be performed, what costs are to be considered in the selection process, whether business shares and transportation allocations are to be used and the maximum time that the TSP Optimizer is to run when a TSP selection is being performed. In the TSP Selection settings there are three sections that contain control parameters used in continuous move determination. The first two sections contain settings used to direct the system when shipments assigned to continuous moves are deleted and whether costs determined externally are to be recalculated and whether the costs are to be distributed to the shipments. The third section, Extended Checks contains check boxes that indicate what types, if any, of compatibility checks are to be made in continuous move determination.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-17
%
&
'
!
'
!
SAP AG 2008
There are three groups of settings related to TSP selection that exist in the Means of Transport record that is assigned to a transportation lane. The Strategy settings are use to indicate whether the means of transport is relevant for automatic TSP selection. Within the Strategy settings the Priority/Cost setting is used to indicate the basis for TSP selection (Priority, Costs, or a combination of Priority and costs). If costs will be used as a basis of TSP selection, the Cost Origin is used to indicate whether internal (planning) or external (actual) freight costs will be used in the TSP selection process. If the system is to consider continuous moves, the Contin.Move Type setting is used to indicate whether a simple or a round trip continuous move will be considered. If automatic TSP selection is to consider and update TSP’s based on their share of the transportation business, then the Share of Business parameters must be updated. In these settings a +/- tolerance can be specified to give the TSP optimizer leeway in assigning a TSP based on business share. Used in concert with the +/- tolerances are penalty costs that can be applied for over-allocating or under-allocating shipments for a TSP. If TSP selection is to consider and update allocation data, the planning period must be specified that corresponds to the period configured in the planning book data. The allocation
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-18
%
'
'
!
SAP AG 2008
If automatic TSP selection is to be performed on TP/VS created shipments, TSP records must be created for each TSP that can carry shipments in the transportation lane. The TSP records are used to record the various data parameters needed in the automatics TSP selection process, such as the internal costs. If the Priority is used in TSP selection, the priority of each TSP available in the transportation lane is recorded in the TSP record. Continuous Move determination data such as the arrival and departure windows to be considered during TSP processing is set up in the TSP record along with the Maximum Distance. The Discount % allowed by the TSP for continuous move shipments is also entered in the TSP record. This discount percentage is applied to the shipment costs that are calculated for each shipment. For TSP assignment and shipment processing that involves transportation allocation and/or business shares, the required data parameters are also recorded in the TSP record. The Share of Business percentage indicates to TSP processing the percentage of shipments assigned to TSP’s in the lane that the TSP is to received. In the Transportation Allocation settings in the TSP record, you enter the minimum and maximum number of shipments the TSP is to receive based on the configured time period (day, week, month, year, etc.).
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-19
+ Basis for the cost calculation can be: Internal costs: Maintained at the transportation lane at TSP level transportation costs per shipment (EA), weight or volume Transportation costs per kilometer
ERP Costs calling the function module: LE_TRA_MAP_APO_TO_LES_COST External Costs BAdI to deactivate ERP cost calculation and connect another system
SAP AG 2008
Costs: The system determines the TSP on the basis of the lowest total costs. The following costs can be taken into account: •
Internal costs: You can define transportation costs per shipment (EA), weight, volume or kilometer.
•
External costs (ERP): For more information, see the SAP Library for the ERP system under Logistics → Logistics Execution → Transportation → Shipment Cost Processing.
•
External costs (BAdI): You can use method GET_EXTERNAL_COSTS of Business Add-In /SAPAPO/VS_CS_SELECT to deactivate the freight cost calculation in the ERP system and to connect another system.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-20
%
!
)
You should now be able to: Make the necessary basic master data and configuration setting for automatic TSP selection.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-21
+
&
Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection Lesson 1: TSP Selection Basics Lesson 2: TSP Optimization Setup Lesson 3: Continuous Moves Lesson 4: Transportation Allocation and Business Shares Lesson 5: TSP Selection Lesson 6: Collaboration/Tendering
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-22
+
&
!
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the process and function of continuous move processing. Make the necessary data and configuration settings to use continuous move processing.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-23
+
&
In the PC manufacturer’s supply chain there are times when a TSP can make deliveries of outbound shipments and also make pickups and subsequent delivery shipments to other customers. TSPs offer a freight discount when they can participate in a continuous move.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-24
+
& Case when the TSP agrees to take on a completely new shipment straight after the completion of a shipment. Aim: Reduce shipment costs by assigning additional shipments to the same TSP Continuous move types:
A
Simple
B
C
D Shipment 2
Shipment 1
TSP 1
Round trip
Shipment 2
C
A
B
TSP 1
Shipment 1 SAP AG 2008
As part of the automatic TSP selection, the system tries to combine shipments by forming continuous moves. The aim is to reduce the costs of the shipment by assigning additional shipments to a TSP. The following types of continuous moves are available: •
Simple continuous move: the transportation service provider (TSP) accepts one or more additional shipments directly after executing the first shipment.
•
Round trip: the start location of the first shipment and the destination location of the second shipment are identical.
The system cannot take into account complex round trips where multiple source locations (pickup) or destination locations (delivery) are served.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-25
+
&
Prerequisites: TSP is available for both shipments Arrival date/time of first shipment lies in the departure window of the second shipment
In the transportation lane on TSP level
Departure date/time of the second shipment lies in the arrival window of the first shipment Distance between destination location 1 and start location 2 < max. distance defined in transportation lane Compatibility Checks in Optimization Profile Means of transport Transportation zones Locations Allow continuous move in TSP location master data
SAP AG 2008
The system can combine two shipments in a continuous move if the conditions are met: The relevant TSP is available for both shipments. The arrival date/time of the first shipment lies in the departure window of the second shipment. The departure date/time of the second shipment lies in the arrival window of the first shipment. Then the system performs a number of additional checks in accordance with your settings in the optimization profile. For example, the system checks whether the following objects are compatible with one another: Means of transport Transportation zones Locations (in other words, the destination location of the first shipment and the start location of the second shipment) The distance between the destination location of the first shipment and the start location of the second shipment must not exceed the maximum distance that you have defined for the TSPs for both shipments. Then the system checks the type of continuous move. In the case of a round trip, the system checks if the destination location of the first shipment and the start location of the second shipment are identical, for example. In the case of a simple continuous move, the system can combine multiple shipments without the vehicle having to return to the start location.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-26
+
&
,
+'
-
Continuous Move: basic checks Shipment A
Shipment B
12/17/2007 15:30:00 12/18/2007 8:00:00
W Schenker Nagel Koehnlein
12/18/2007 17:00:00
Z arrival time Shmt A: 8:00:00 + duration X Y: 2h
12/18/2007 12:00:00
= 10:00:00 (shifted arrival time)
Y
X
Schenker Koehnlein
[shifted arrival time] 8:00
8:30
9:30
9:00
10:00 10:30 11:00 11:30 12:00 12:30 13:00 t
start time window -3h00 +0h30
-1h00
arrival time window
+4h30
SAP AG 2008
Identify continuous move opportunities based on •
Durations
•
Compatibilities (Zones, Locations, ..)
•
Re-Considerations on ongoing basis – streaming
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-27
+
&
,
&
Continuous Move: extended checks Shipment A
Shipment B
12/18/2007 17:00:00
12/17/2007 15:30:00 12/18/2007 8:00:00
W Schenker Nagel Koehnlein
X
Z
Reachability based on geography Max. Distance
12/18/2007 12:00:00
Y
Schenker Koehnlein
SAP AG 2008
Identify continuous move opportunities based on: •
Distances
•
Reachability
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-28
+
&
,
'
+ Continuous Move Calculation
Cost distribution
SAP AG 2008
Cost Origin: Internal Costs (from Transportation Lane): •
In this case, the system first determines the costs per shipment. When doing so, it takes into account the costs that you have defined in the transportation lane for the transportation service provider (TSP) and the means of transport. The system then determines the discount per shipment. When doing so, it takes into account the settings that you have made in the transportation lane for the TSP and the means of transport. The system deducts this discount from the costs determined previously for each shipment.
Cost Origin: External Costs (from ERP System) •
In this case, the costs for the shipments come from the ERP system (freight cost calculation). The subsequent determination of discounts occurs as described above.
•
If you have specified in the Freight Costs area in the optimization profile that the system is to perform a recalculation and a distribution, it automatically performs a freight cost simulation in the ERP system for shipments that are suitable for a continuous move after the optimization run. When doing so, the system acts as if it were dealing with one single shipment. The system then distributes the total costs calculated for this shipment among the individual shipments, for example, in accordance with weight or distance. The system then transfers the costs per shipment to the ERP system as the planned freight costs.
•
For more information about reusing these costs in the ERP system, see the consulting note 944365.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-29
+
&
,+
Internal costs (from the lane): The costs for all shipments of a
continuous move are calculated internally. Then the discount defined for CM is calculated and the total costs are reduced by this discount within the optimization process. The discount is determined per MOT and lane and carrier. The Discount is then calculated per shipment, based on the first lane.
External costs (from ERP): The ERP costs are calculated for every SINGLE shipment. These costs are then handled the same way by the optimizer as described before, the only difference is, that the costs of 1000 would come from ERP. After the optimization, the identified continuous move shipments are sent to ERP to get the costs as if it would be one shipment. In the example below, SHP1 and SHP2 would be sent to ERP as one theoretical shipment. The calculated total costs are then split (e.g. by weight or distance) between the two shipments. The calculated cost per shipment are transferred to ERP as planned freight costs.
SAP AG 2008
Example for internal costs: •
TSP A has a discount of 10% on the lane from A
B for MOT 0001
•
TSP A has a discount of 20 % on the lane from B
C.
•
We have 2 shipments (SHP1 A B and SHP2 B C). SHP1 cost 1000, SHP2 2000. Both shipments are identified as potential continuous move by the optimizer.
•
Now the optimizer calculates costs of 900 (1000 - 10%) for SHP1 and 1600 (2000 - 20%) for SHP2. The total costs if this shipment is given to TSP A would be 2500. This is compared e.g. with TSP B, which is cheaper per shipment (say 950 for SHP1 and 1800 for SHP2). The costs for TSP B would be 2750. Hence, the best solution is to give both shipments as one continuous move to TSP A.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-30
+
&
,#
)
.
SAP AG 2008
New Transaction in LES “VTCM” to check continuous moves (obsolete in ERP 2005 and higher. In these releases this information is included in the transaction VT02n in the new tab ‘Continuous Move’. Data is available for Freight Costing & Analytics. Connects inbound and outbound shipments. Freight Costs of the shipment in the field ‘Maximum Costs” in the ‘Tender’ tab. To use the CM cost for the freight costing the cost must be copied into the field ‘Actual Costs’ (see also the notes) Note: To make use of the costs that has been calculated for the shipment as a part of the continuous move the following steps must be performed: •
The CM costs must be copied into the field ‘Actual costs’ in the tendering tab. This can be done in the BAdI BADI_LE_SHIPMENT Method ‚At Save‘. In the deep structure CHA_SHIPMENTS_AT_SAVE in the table NEW_VTTK the field TNDR_MAXP must be copied into the field TNDR_ACTP.
•
The currency for the actual price must be determined (Field TNDR_ACTC) of the table NEW_VTTK. The currency must be the one defined for the company code the Transportation Planning point is assigned to.
•
A condition must be defined and assigned to the pricing procedure that considerers the actual costs field.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-31
+
&
!
)
You should now be able to: Explain the process and function of continuous move processing. Make the necessary data and configuration settings to use continuous move processing.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-32
/
'
Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection Lesson 1: TSP Selection Basics Lesson 2: TSP Optimization Setup Lesson 3: Continuous Moves Lesson 4: Transportation Allocation and Business Shares Lesson 5: TSP Selection Lesson 6: Collaboration/Tendering
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-33
/
'
!
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand the concepts related to transportation allocation and business shares in TSP processing. Perform the required configuration and data setup activities to use transportation allocations and/or business shares.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-34
/
'
To achieve the best freight rates from TSPs and insure that the best performing TSPs get a certain minimum share of the freight business, the PC manufacturer wants to establish transportation allocations and business share arrangements within certain transportation lanes.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-35
!
0%
0
0
'
Allocations can be defined for transportation zones, individual locations and will be simultaneously considered in the optimizer run
Zones Locations
Hierarchy (“assigned to”) Shipments Capacity constraints (defined per carrier, MOT, time validity) Business shares (defined per carrier and MOT, time validity) SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-36
' Tolerances for each business share
In the transportation lane on MoT level
Penalty costs, excess or shortfall of Tolerances Shipments considered in TSP Selection: Not yet send to ERP Have no TSP assigned Selected for TSP Optimization
Considers Means of transport hierarchy Example: TSP is assigned to the Refrigerated MoT, Business share is maintained on Refrigerated MoT. In the transportation lane on TSP level
+
Refrigerated Means of transport
Cooled MoT Chilled MoT
SAP AG 2008
The system takes into account business shares during the automatic TSP selection. Business shares are optimization options for the transportation service provider selection. The business share (%) indicates to the TSP optimizer what percentage of the total number of shipments assigned to the transportation lane that the TSP is to receive. It makes sense to use business shares if you have defined penalty costs. SAP also recommends that you define tolerances to give the optimizer a certain amount of leeway in assigning TSP’s to shipments. Tolerances can be defined for each business share as well as penalty costs that the optimizer calculates when an excess or shortfall of these tolerances occurs. However, the penalty costs are not real costs, but instead are used for weighting purposes only. Means of transport hierarchies can be defined in order to group means of transport and assign Business Shares on the top level of the hierarchy. The means of transport hierarchy will be used in combination with the geographical hierarchy.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-37
/ Using transportation allocations, transportation capacities are assigned to TSP’s for a certain period Possible constraints: Max. number of shipments for TSP per Transportation lane Period (day, week, month, business year) Means of transport Min. number of shipments per period Optimization option can be used in… Manual assignment Automatic assignment Dynamic route determination
SAP AG 2008
The check against transportation allocations is an optimization option that you can use as part of both the manual and automatic transportation service provider selection. It can also be used in dynamic route determination. In the check against transportation allocations, transportation capacities (transportation allocations) are assigned to transportation service providers (TSPs) for a certain period. The following can be defined: •
The maximum number of shipments for a TSP per transportation lane, period (day, week, or month), and means of transport.
•
The minimum number of shipments that defines the number of agreed shipments per period (day, week, month or business year).
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-38
1
') *&
*
Hierarchy of means of transport is supported for allocation Example: Min / Max value for shipments can be assigned for Truck and for small trucks Optimizer will consider all restrictions simultaneously
Ship
Truck
Small truck
Big truck
Big truck, cooled
Big Ship
Big truck, non-cooled
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-39
/ Create planning area & planning book in DP Set the ‘Use Transp. Allocations’ indicator Specify a planning period for the means of transport
In the transportation lane on MoT level
Note: It must agree with the planning period in the planning book Define the transportation capacities for the TSP’s in the Min. Shipment Quantity and Max. Shipment Quantity fields. These are used for the initial data supply of the relevant key figures in the planning book
In the transportation lane on TSP level
Customizing TP/VS: Create a product allocation object, group and procedure Assign the product allocation procedure to the planning area Assignment of transportation allocation procedure to TSP Location SAP AG 2008
Settings in Demand Planning needed: •
Definition of storage buckets profile with the required periodicities
•
Creation of planning area using the template for the delivered planning area 9ATPVS
•
Assignment of storage buckets profile to this planning area
•
Definition of a time series object
•
Definition of a planning buckets profile per periodicity
•
Definition of a planning book per periodicity, and assignment of planning area and the relevant planning buckets profile to it.
Customizing Settings in TP/VS •
Definition of an allocation object
•
Definition of a transportation allocation group per planning period
•
Definition of an allocation determination procedure and assignment of transportation allocation groups
•
Connection of the planning area and assignment to to the characteristics and key figures
Master data settings •
Assignment of transportation allocation procedure to TSP in its master data
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-40
/
'
!
)
You should now be able to: Understand the concepts related to transportation allocation and business shares in TSP processing. Perform the required configuration and data setup activities to use transportation allocations and/or business shares.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-41
Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection Lesson 1: TSP Selection Basics Lesson 2: TSP Optimization Setup Lesson 3: Continuous Moves Lesson 4: Transportation Allocation and Business Shares Lesson 5: TSP Selection Lesson 6: Collaboration/Tendering
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-42
!
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the manual and automatic TSP selection processes. Perform manual and automatic TSP selection.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-43
To integrate TSP selection within the TP/VS planning environment, the PC manufacturer must understand the various alternatives available to assign TSP’s to planned shipments.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-44
& 2. TSP Selection
1. Selection
3. Enter TSP
SAP AG 2008
In manual carrier selection, the following steps apply: •
Select the planned shipment (s).
•
Select the “Carrier Selection” button.
•
Enter the Carrier in the dialog box.
If a carrier is selected manually, one or more shipments have to be selected using the ‘Shipment’ view. Another method that can be used to perform carrier selection is to click the right mouse button and choose 'Carrier selection'. You can assign a carrier directly without checking or, after selecting a carrier selection profile, you can select according to the strategy defined in the profile. A carrier can be removed from a shipment by selecting the shipment and then clicking the right mouse button and selecting “Remove TSP”.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-45
/ 2. TSP Selection
3. Select Automatic Assignment
1. Select Shipments
4. Select Log
SAP AG 2008
With automatic carrier selection, the settings in the Optimization Profile in the Tab ‘TSP Selection’ and the data maintained in the lane master data are used to direct the system in determining the TSP to be assigned to the shipment. When automatic carrier selection is used it is advisable to select the “log” option. Automatic TSP Selection can be run in Background
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-46
'
'&
TSP 4
Point A Plant
TSP 4
TSP 3
TSP 3
TSP 2
TSP 2
TSP 2
TSP 1
TSP 1
TSP 1
Point B Customer
Point C Customer
Point D Customer
TSP 5 TSP 2 TSP 1
SAP AG 2008
Shipments with multiple stops: A shipment goes from A via B and C to D. The system first checks which TSPs can cover all stages of the shipment (A to B, B to C, C to D). The system then uses the strategy of the direct transportation lane (A to D) for the TSPs found in the first step. This means that the system chooses the TSP from those selected in the first step who has a direct transportation lane between A and D.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-47
2
,%
!
A transportation service provider can be assigned to a intra-zone transportation lane and intra location transportation lane. Intra-zone lanes are only taken into account during the TSP selection and transportation allocations
Intra-zone lane
SAP AG 2008
Allocations are taken into consideration if the shipment remains within this transportation zone but also when a shipment starts from inside the zone / location (outbound scenario)
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-48
!
)
You should now be able to: Describe the manual and automatic TSP selection processes. Perform manual and automatic TSP selection.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-49
+
"
Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection Lesson 1: TSP Selection Basics Lesson 2: TSP Optimization Setup Lesson 3: Continuous Moves Lesson 4: Transportation Allocation and Business Shares Lesson 5: TSP Selection Lesson 6: Collaboration/Tendering
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-50
+
"
!
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Explain the use of TSP collaboration and the tendering process. Describe the required customizing settings to set up and EDI or internet-based tendering environment. Display tendering exceptions and create responses to tendering situations.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-51
+
"
After TSP selection has been performed and the corresponding shipments released, the PC manufacturer wants to send tendering offers to the selected TSP’s. In addition, the PC manufacturer’s transportation planners want the ability to monitor the tendering environment and be able to respond to the TSP’s exception situations.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-52
"#
$
Configuration
Master Data
Modeling
Plan Shipments Manually Optimizer Dynamic Route Determination Create/Transfer Shipments
Transportation Service Provider Selection
Create/Transfer Deliveries
Releasing Shipments and TSP Tendering
SAP AG 2008
After the basic TP/VS customizing, establishment of the appropriate master data and creation of the planning and cost profiles, the optimization of transportation demands may be performed. This is called the “optimization” process. It may be performed interactively or in background. Backorder processing carried out in the global ATP component can affect the vehicle scheduling determination in TP/VS. Upon completion of the planning for one or more shipments, automatic carrier selection may be performed. Based on the carrier selection profile a carrier will be assigned to each shipment selected. To transfer planned shipments and their corresponding delivery documents to the OLTP or ERP system for execution, the process of “publishing” must be performed first. An optional process that is part of the collaborative planning strategy of supply chain management is carrier tendering. The carrier tendering process, available in different scenarios, gives the shipper the ability to notify potential carriers of the availability of a shipment and its characteristics. The carrier, in turn, can accept or decline the tender offer and report that decision back to the shipper using various automated techniques. After shipments are published, they and their related delivery documents can be transferred to the OLTP or ERP System for execution. This step represents the final process in the process flow.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-53
"#
EDI Business Scenario: Internet Tendering
Create Shipment Publish
Transportation Planner Release for Execution
Business Scenario: Internet Tendering XML
Front end
View
Front end
HTML
Service Agent
Accept / Decline
SAP AG 2008
Collaborative Transportation Planning between shippers and their carriers allows both partners to streamline their work processes and ultimately benefit from reduced handling costs, greater transparency and efficiency. Shippers can inform their carriers about their shipment plans, and the carriers can accept, reject or change shipment requests. For example, the carrier could suggest an alternate pickup or delivery date. This process begins after all the prerequisites have been fulfilled. Tendering is possible via EDI, fax, Internet or similar method of communication. Once planned shipments are “released” in TP/VS, a tendering announcement can be created.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-54
3
*
+
With EDI: 1.
Define partner profiles for an EDI partner
2.
Assign EDI partner to TSP
3.
Create the VS Alert Profile
4.
Carry out the transport planning
With the Internet: 1.
Define collaboration partner for the TSP
2.
Assign collaboration partner to TSP
3.
Maintain Email address for the planner
4.
Create the VS Alert Profile
5.
Carry out the transport planning
SAP AG 2008
EDI: Define the partner profiles for an EDI partner of type CR (Tools → Business Communication → IDoc Basis → Administration → Partner profile). Depending on the scenario, maintain message type PLNSHP here for the outbound and inbound parameters. Assign this EDI partner to the transportation service provider. Create the VS Alert Profile. Carry out the planning in the SAP APO Transportation Planning / Vehicle Scheduling component to create planned shipments. Internet: Assign collaboration partners for your transportation service providers in the Transportation planning collaboration scenario (Supply Chain Collaboration → Environment → Current Settings → Collaboration Partners). Assign a collaboration partner to the transportation service provider (in master data). Maintain e-mail address of the planner in his user parameters Tools → Administration → User Maintenance → Users. Create the VS Alert Profile. Carry out the planning in the SAP APO Transportation Planning and Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component to create planned shipments. © SAP AG
SCM612
9-55
'
,
*
)
To view the XML file with the shipment details in the transportation collaboration scenario the following customizing settings are relevant: Maintain a collaboration partner and assign the user of the external transportation partner to this partner (transaction /SAPAPO/CLP_SETTINGS). Maintain the collaboration scenario ' Transportation Planning'for this partner. Make sure, that you have selected the ' XML Displayed Activated'indicator. As the XML file is based on shipment information that derives from the IDOC PLNSHP you have to complete your customizing with the necessary settings for the EDI scenario for Collaborative Transportation Planning.
SAP AG 2008
Note: The IDOC generation is only required for the XML display. In the IDOC partner profile (transaction /WE20) you therefore should define a receiver port with a physical directory located on your own application server. There is a default XSLT style sheet that can be modified by the customer. In the directory ../MIMES/CLPGLOBAL/99/STYLE/plnshp.xsl. The URL for the XML style sheet is: http://
:/sap/ist/mimes/clpglobal/99/style/plnshp.xsl
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-56
+'
'
)
Carrier (TSP) has the possibility to change shipment dates in APO in collaboration scenario Shipment dates can be adjusted according to TSP dates (automatically, or manually in /sapapo/vs01 depending on customizing) and finally transferred to ERP Shipment is rescheduled taking TSP dates as fixed Planner has also possibility to restore original planned dates from /sapapo/vs01 or adjust shipment dates once again. Alert is written for such situations with exact details of changed dates
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-57
/
/*
)
SAP AG 2008
This is the display from the Alert Monitor display within Vehicle Scheduling. After declination of a shipment you can get an alert. By right clicking on the generated alert you can offer this shipment manually to a new TSP or to the same TSP who was chosen before.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-58
/ Transport order rejected by TSP Proposed date changed by TSP Transferred shipment: proposed date changed by TSP Transferred shipment: transport order rejected by TSP No response from TSP
SAP AG 2008
Tendering Alerts are generated during the tendering process between TP/VS and external TSP’s. After the TSP selection in TP/VS, the shipment proposals are transmitted to external carriers. Sometimes they are transmitted to the ERP system before confirmation from the external TSP arrives. In this case, if there is a change or a rejection, the system also triggers an execution system alert. Tendering Alerts are configured using the Alert Monitor. They are configured in the VS Alert Profile.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-59
&
SAP AG 2008
Transaction /SAPAPO/VS61 Monitor Tenderings can be found at menu path: SCM SAP Menu Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning / Vehicle Scheduling Planning Collaborative Transportation Planning Monitor Tenderings. This report can be used to select Tendering exceptions for selected transportation service providers. The following are the options: •
Select tenderings fro which there has been no response within a selected time.
•
Select rejected tenderings.
An action can be selected that you want to use for the selected tendering exceptions. The possible actions are: •
Tendering the next TSP
•
Re-tendering the same TSP
•
Cancel the tender offer
•
Generate an Alert
This report can also be run in simulation mode.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-60
+
"
!
)
You should now be able to: Explain the use of TSP collaboration and the tendering process. Describe the required customizing settings to set up and EDI or internet-based tendering environment. Display tendering exceptions and create responses to tendering situations.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-61
)
You are now able to: Describe the TSP selection process Make the necessary master data and configuration settings to perform automatic TSP selection. Explain continuous move processing and the required configuration and master data settings. Perform the necessary configuration settings and master data requirements to enable transportation allocations and business share processing. Perform manual and automatic TSP selection. Outline the TSP collaboration and tendering process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-62
Exercises Unit: Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection Topic: Transportation Service Provider Set-up At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Update an optimization profile with the Transportation Service Provider (TSP) selection settings and use it to perform TSP selection during interactive vehicle scheduling. • Make the TSP selection-relevant settings in the means of transport records assigned in the transportation lanes. • Create and assign TSP records to means of transports in transportation lanes. After the planning of one or more shipments, Transportation Service Provider selection can be performed either manually or automatically to assign a TSP to each shipment. In our project role, we must test this function.
1-1
You will update the transportation lanes with TSP selection-relevant settings and master data. There are TSP-relevant fields in the location master records of Transportation Service Providers. To aid in testing your TSP selection process, three TSP’s have already been created in APO for your use: 0000001058 0000001925 0000001930 1-1-1 Review the TSP related settings in one of the location master records. 1-1-2 For the Means of Transport specified for the two transportation lanes listed below, set the following TSP Strategy selection parameters as you are creating the TSP records for each means of transport: Transportation Lanes to Update
© SAP AG
Means of Transport
12##
T-S11C##
FTL##, LTL##
12##
DE-D000070000
FTL##
SCM612
9-63
TSP Strategy Parameters Priority/Costs
A - Costs
Cost Origin
I - Internal costs
Continuous Move
No Continuous Move
1-1-3 Assign the TSP’s to your means of transport: FTL## and LTL## in the following transportation lanes and enter the internal planning rates from the tables below: 12## → DE-D000070000 (Only Mns of Trnspt FTL## exists in this lane) 12## → T-S11C## FTL## TSP
Rate per KM
0000001058
.750
0000001925
.800
0000001930
.850
LTL## TSP
Rate per KM
0000001058
.900
0000001925
.850
0000001930
.800
1-1-4 Update the TSP Selection parameters in your OPOUT-## Profile: In TSP Selection Control:
© SAP AG
Rule for TSP Selection
R2 – Shipments with Status ‘planned’ or ‘Published’
Compatibilities Btw TSP and Cust
(Default)
TSP Cost Determ.
(Default)
Use of Transp. Allocs
(Default)
Use of Business Share
(Default) SCM612
9-64
In Continuous Move: Use default settings. No continuous move will be used 1-2
To test your TSP selection enter the following sales orders. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11B##
PO Number
09-1-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Material
T-ATD2-## 100 PC
Order Quantity Document Number:
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
_______________________
Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11C## 1000/12/00)
PO Number
09-2-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Material
T-ATD3-##
Order Quantity Document Number:
(Sales Area
100 PC _______________________
1-2-1 Run the Interactive Vehicle Scheduling for the sales orders. How many shipments were created?_______________________ 1-2-2 Select the shipments created and perform Transportation Service Provider Selection. Review the TSP selection log. What TSP was assigned to the order for T-S11B##? ___________________________________________
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-65
What TSP was assigned to the order for T-S11C##? ___________________________________________ 1-3
Freight rates have been set up in the ERP System for the three TSP’s. Change your means of transport settings in the two transportation lanes to select the TSP’s based on "External" costs.: 1-3-1 For the Means of Transport in the two transportation lanes listed below, set the TSP Strategy selection parameters as you are creating the TSP records for each means of transport: Transportation Lanes to Update
Means of Transport
12##
T-S11C##
FTL##, LTL##
12##
DE-D000070000
FTL##
TSP Strategy Parameters Priority/Costs
A - Costs
Cost Origin
E - External Costs (ERP)
Continuous Move
No Continuous Move
1-3-2 Return to Interactive Vehicle Scheduling and select the planned shipments that were created in 1-2 and perform Transportation Service Provider Selection. Did the results of the TSP selection change? ____________
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-66
Exercises Unit: Transportation Service Provider (TSP) Selection Topic: TSP Tendering and Collaboration At the conclusion of this exercise, you will be able to: • Understand the process of carrier/TSP tendering. • Carry a basic tendering process and use the tendering tools provided in TP/VS. After the TSP selection process has been completed, carrier/TSP tendering will be performed when the planned shipments are released. You will test tendering response by logging into the system as a carrier a making a tendering decision. After the decision, you will access the shipment and respond to the tendering response by the TSP. 2-1
To prepare for your tendering test, you will add carriers to each transportation lane used in the multi-modal scenario. Assign the TSP’s to the transportation lanes based on the information in the following table. Transportation Lane
Means of Transport
TSP
35##
30##
RAIL##
TP-MMCARA
30##
25##
SHIP##
TP-MMCARB
TRK##
TP-MMCARC
25## --> T-S55A##
Note: the second TSP for the lane ----
0000001058
During the assignment of the TSP’s to the means of transport within the transportation lanes, set the TSP selection strategies to the following values: TSP Strategy Parameters Priority/Costs
A - Costs
Cost Origin
I - Internal Costs
Continuous Move
No Continuous Move
2-1-1 Return to Interactive Vehicle Scheduling using your multi-modal profile, OPMM-##.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-67
2-1-2 Perform TSP selection. Review the TSP assignments for each of the three shipments. In the remainder of the exercise you will be using the shipment from the Rotterdam Port, 25##, to the Customer, T-S44A##. Shipment number : _____________________________ 2-1-3 Release the shipment. 2-1-4 In a separate session, logon to the internet collaboration screen as carrier TPMMCARC using the login information below. Reject your shipment. MAKE SURE YOU REJECT ONLY YOUR SHIPMENT. Exit the internet collaboration transaction. User-Id
TP-MMCARC
Password:
welcome
2-1-5 Return to Interactive Vehicle Scheduling. Refresh your screen and review the tendering status for your shipment. 2-1-6 Perform manual TSP Selection for the shipment. Assign TSP 0000001058 to the shipment. Return to the Detail tab and review the tendering status. 2-1-7 In the second session, login to the internet collaboration screen as carrier 0000001058 using the login information below: User-Id
NORDSPEED
Password:
welcome
Find, accept and confirm your shipment. MAKE SURE YOU ACCEPT ONLY YOUR SHIPMENT. Exit the transaction. 2-1-8 Return to the session with Interactive Vehicle Scheduling. Refresh your screen and review the tendering status for your shipment.
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-68
Solutions Unit: Transportation Service Provider Selection Topic: Transportation Service Provider Set-up
1-1
You will update the transportation lanes with TSP selection-relevant settings and master data. There are TSP-relevant fields in the location master records of Transportation Service Providers. To aid in testing your TSP selection process, three TSP’s have already been created in APO for your use: 0000001058 0000001925 0000001930 1-1-1 Review the TSP related settings in one of the location master records. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Location Location.
b
Enter ‘0000001058’ in the Location field.
c
Choose Display Location
d
Review the TSP-relevant settings in the General and TSP tabs.
e
Choose Exit
.
f
Choose Exit
.
.
1-1-2 For the Means of Transports in the two transportation lanes listed below, set the TSP Strategy selection parameters as you are creating the TSP records for each means of transport: Transportation Lanes to Update
© SAP AG
Means of Transport
12##
T-S11C##
FTL##, LTL##
12##
DE-D000070000
FTL##
SCM612
9-69
TSP Strategy Parameters Priority/Costs
A - Costs
Cost Origin
I - Internal costs
Continuous Move
No Continuous Move
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Transportation Lane → Transportation Lane
b
Enter the data from the table below: Model Name
000
Start Location
12##
Dest Location
T-S11C##
c
Select Change
d
Select the FTL## Means of Transport line.
e
Choose the Detail Scr
f
Move the vertical scroll bar on the right side of the screen down until you see the Strategy box. Use the table in 1-1-2 above to make the required settings.
g
Choose Copy and Close
h
Select the Assignment of TSP
i
In the TSP for Means of Trans.section at bottom of the screen, select the
. icon.
.
Creation of New Entry icon
icon in the selected Mtr. .
j
The Transportation Servide Provider (TSP) dialog screen will open on the right side of the screen.
k
Enter the TSP number from the table in 1-1-3 below in the Trsp. Service Provider field.
l
Enter the corresponding rate in the Internal Costs area in the TSP Costs per KM field.
m If the last TSP record is being created, select Copy and Close otherwise, select Copy
© SAP AG
,
.
n
Repeat steps k. thru m. to complete the entry of the internal TSP rates the two remaining TSP’s for the FTL## Mtr.
o
Select Save
p
Select means of transport LTL##.
.
SCM612
9-70
q
Repeat steps e. thru o. for LTL##.
r
Upon completing the update of the means of transport and creation of the TSP records, repeat this process (Steps b. thru o.) for the second transportation lane: 12## DE-D000070000.
1-1-3 Assign the TSP’s to your means of transport: FTL## and LTL## in the transportation lanes and enter the internal planning rates from the tables below: FTL## TSP
Rate per KM
0000001058
.750
0000001925
.800
0000001930
.850
LTL## TSP
Rate per KM
0000001058
.900
0000001925
.850
0000001930
.800
1-1-4 Update the TSP Selection parameters in your OPOUT-## Profile: In TSP Selection Control:
© SAP AG
Rule for TSP Selection
R2 – Shipments with Status ‘planned’ or ‘Published’
Compatibilities Btw TSP and Cust
(Default)
TSP Cost Determ.
(Default)
Use of Transp. Allocs
(Default)
Use of Business Share
(Default)
SCM612
9-71
In Continuous Move: Use default settings. No continuous move will be used
1-2
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Environment → Current Settings → Transportation Optimization → Define Optimization Profile
b
Enter OPOUT-## in the Optimization Profile field.
c
Select Edit optimization profile
d
Select the TSP Selection tab.
e
Update the TSP Selection Control parameters from the table above.
f
Select Save
g
Choose Exit
.
h
Choose Exit
.
.
To test your TSP selection enter the following sales orders. Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11B##
PO Number
09-1-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Material
T-ATD2-##
Order Quantity
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
100 PC
Document Number:
_______________________
Order Type
OR
Sold-to Party
T-S11C##
PO Number
09-2-##
Req. deliv. date
Today’s Date + 3 weeks
Material
T-ATD3-##
Order Quantity
(Sales Area 1000/12/00)
100 PC
Document Number: © SAP AG
.
SCM612
_______________________ 9-72
a
Navigate to ERP SAP Menu: Logistics → Sales and Distribution → Sales → Order → VA01- Create
b
Enter and save the sales orders. Record the document numbers.
1-2-1 Run the Interactive Vehicle Scheduling for the sales orders. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Planning → Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
b
Enter ‘OPOUT-##’ in the Optimization Profile field.
c
Choose Enter . The system will display the demand horizon in the Selection Periods area, the Source and destination locations and the resources as specified in the optimization profile.
d
Select Execute
e
In the Non-Assigned Freight Units area there should be the two freight units; the sales orders you just created. There may be other orders in the Non-Assigned Freight Units area. You do not want them to be part of the optimization process, so select all of the orders except the orders created
.
above and select the Lock
icon.
f
Select Start Optimization
.
g
When the Optimizer Settings dialog appears, select Cont.
h
The VSR Optimization screen will appear. Select Start Optimization Run .
i
You should get a message that the optimization process completed successfully.
j
Select the Accept Shipments icon
k
You will get two messages that “Planned shipment nnnnnnnnn was created” in the messages area on the screen.
l
Choose Back
.
.
. This will return you to the Vehicle Scheduling screen.
m Select the Shipment View in the shuffler area. The planned shipments will be displayed in the column. n
Select Save
.
How many shipments were created?_______________________ 1-2-2 Select the shipments created and perform Transportation Service Provider Selection. Review the TSP selection log. a © SAP AG
Select both planned shipments in the shuffler area. SCM612
9-73
b
Select TSP Selection
.
c
In the TSP Profile dialog box, the radio button indicating automatic TSP selection should be set. Choose Execute .
d
The Results of TSP Selection dialog should be displayed. This dialog shows the results of the automatic TSP selection process. In the upper left quadrant of the screen the assigned TSP’s will be listed with the planning costs. Review the contents of the screen to familiarize yourself with its contents. What TSP was assigned to the order for T-S11B##? ___________________________________________ What TSP was assigned to the order for T-S11C##? ___________________________________________
1-3
e
Select the Save
f
Select one of your planned shipments in the shuffler area and then select the Details tab on the right side of the screen. In the Details tab are the TSP-related fields as well as the Tendering Status.
g
Select Exit
.
h
Select Exit
.
button.
Freight rates have been set up in the ERP System for the three TSP’s. Change your means of transport settings in the two transportation lanes to select the TSP’s based on "External" costs. 1-3-1 For the Means of Transport in the two transportation lanes listed below, set the TSP Strategy selection parameters as you are creating the TSP records for each means of transport: Transportation Lanes to Update
Means of Transport
12##
T-S11C##
FTL##, LTL##
12##
DE-D000070000
FTL##
TSP Strategy Parameters
© SAP AG
Priority/Costs
A - Costs
Cost Origin
E - External Costs (ERP)
Continuous Move
No Continuous Move
SCM612
9-74
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Transportation Lane → Transportation Lane
b
Enter the data from the table below: Model Name
000
Start Location
12##
Dest Location
T-S11C##
c
Select Change
.
d
Select the FTL## Means of Transport line.
e
Choose the Detail Scr
f
Move the vertical scroll bar on the right side of the screen down until you see the Stategy box. Use the table in 1-3-1 above to make the required settings.
g
Choose Copy and Close
h
Repeat steps d. thru g.for the LTL## Means of transport.
i
Repeat steps b. thru g. for lane 12##
icon.
. DE-D000070000.
1-3-2 In interactive vehicle scheduling, re-run your transportation service provider selection and review the results. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Planning → Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
b
Enter ‘OPOUT-##’ in the Optimization Profile field.
c
Choose Enter . The system will display the demand horizon in the Selection Periods area, the Source and destination locations and the resources as specified in the optimization profile.
d
Select Execute
e
Select the Shipment View in the shuffler area. The planned shipments will be displayed in the column.
.
f Select both planned shipments in the shuffler area. g Select TSP Selection
.
h In the TSP Profile dialog box, the radio button indicating automatic TSP selection should be set. Choose Execute . i
© SAP AG
The Results of TSP Selection dialog should be displayed. This dialog shows the results of the automatic TSP selection process. In the upper left quadrant of the screen the assigned TSP’s will be listed with the planning SCM612
9-75
costs. Review the contents of the screen to familiarize yourself with its contents. What TSP was assigned to the order for T-S11B##? ___________________________________________ What TSP was assigned to the order for T-S11C##? ___________________________________________ j
Select the Save
button.
k Select one of your planned shipments in the shuffler area and then select the Details tab on the right side of the screen. In the Details tab are the TSPrelated fields as well as the Tendering Status. l
© SAP AG
Select Exit
.
m Select Exit
.
SCM612
9-76
Solutions Unit: Transportation Service Provider Selection Topic: TSP Tendering and Collaboration 2-1
To prepare for your tendering test, you will add carriers to each transportation lane used in the multi-modal scenario. Assign the TSP’s to the transportation lanes based on the information in the following table.
Transportation Lane
Means of Transport
35##
30##
RAIL##
TP-MMCARA
.500
30##
25##
SHIP##
TP-MMCARB
.500
25##
T-S44A##
TRK##
TP-MMCARC
.500
0000001058
.600
Note: the second TSP for the lane ----
TSP
Cost per KM
During the assignment of the TSP’s to the means of transport within the transportation lanes, set the TSP selection strategies to the following values:
TSP Strategy Parameters
© SAP AG
Priority/Costs
A - Costs
Cost Origin
I - Internal Costs
Continuous Move
No Continuous Move
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Master Data → Transportation Lane → Transportation Lane
b
Enter the data from the table below: Model Name
000
Start Location
35##
Dest Location
30##
c
Select Change
d
Select the means of transport corresponding to the transportation lane in the table above in the Means of Transport line.
e
Select the Detail Screen
.
SCM612
. 9-77
f
In the Means of Transport dialog screen on the right side, enter the TSP Stategy parameters from the table above.
g
Choose Copy and Close
h
Choose the Assignment of Transportation Service Provider
i
In the TSP for Means of Trans. Section, select Create New Entry
j
In the Transportation Service Provider (TSP) dialog that opens on the right side of the screen, enter the TSP from the table above and the corresponding TSP Cost per KM. NOTE: There are two TSP’s for the 25## T-S44A## lane!
k
Select Copy and Close
l
Select Save
. icon. .
.
.
m Choose Exit
.
n
Repeat steps b. thru m.for the remaining transportation lanes Note: There are two TSP’s for the 25## T-S44A## lane.
o
Select Exit
.
2-1-1 Return to Interactive Vehicle Scheduling using your multi-modal profile, OPMM-##. a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization → Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling → Planning → Interactive Vehicle Scheduling
b
Enter ‘OPMM-##’ in the Optimization Profile field.
c
Choose Enter . The system will display the demand horizon in the Selection Periods area, the Source and destination locations and the resources as specified in the optimization profile.
d
Select Execute
e
Select the Shipment View in the shuffler area. The planned shipments will be displayed in the column.
.
2-1-2 Perform TSP selection. Review the TSP assignments for each of the three shipments. In the remainder of the exercise you will be using the shipment from the Rotterdam Port, 25##, to the Customer, T-S44A##.
© SAP AG
a
Select the three planned shipments from the previous multi-modal exercise in the shuffler area.
b
Select TSP Selection
SCM612
.
9-78
c
In the TSP Profile dialog box, the radio button indicating automatic TSP selection should be set. Choose Execute .
d
The Results of TSP Selection dialog should be displayed. This dialog shows the results of the automatic TSP selection process. In the upper left quadrant of the screen the assigned TSP’s will be listed with the planning costs. Review the contents of the screen to familiarize yourself with its contents. Note the shipment number for the Port of Rotterdam (25##) to the customer (T-S44A##).
Shipment number : _____________________________ 2-1-3 Release the three shipments. a
Select the three ‘planned’ shipments.
b
Select Release Shipment
c
Select Save
d
Document the new ‘permanent’ shipment numbers.
.
.
Shipment document no.(35## Shipment document no. (30## User-Id Shipment document no.(25## Password:
30##):
_________________
25##): _________________ TP-MMCARC T-S44A##): _________________ welcome
2-1-4 Open a new session, logon to the internet collaboration screen as carrier TPMMCARC using the login information below:
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Supply Chain Collaboration Collaborative Transportation Planning
b
Enter the User-id and Password for the TSP from the table above.
c
Select Logon
d
In the Search screen that appears, select Start Search
. .
Reject your shipment. MAKE SURE YOU REJECT ONLY YOUR SHIPMENT.
© SAP AG
e
Find your shipment and select the Reject
f
Select Confirm
radio button.
. SCM612
9-79
g
Select Exit
.
2-1-5 Return to the session with Interactive Vehicle Scheduling. Refresh your screen and review the tendering status for your shipment. a
Choose Refresh
.
b
Select the shipment corresponding to the 25##
c
Choose the Details tab. Check the tendering status. You should see that the tendering has been rejected by the carrier.
T-S44A## leg.
2-1-6 Perform manual TSP Selection for the shipment. Assign TSP 0000001058 to the shipment. Return to the Details tab and review the tendering status. a
Select the shipment corresponding to the 25##
T-S44A## leg.
b
Insure that the shipment corresponding to the 25## selected.
c
Select
d
Select the Manual Assignment radio button and enter TSP 0000001058 in the input field to the right of the button.
e
Choose Execute
f
Choose Save
T-S44A## leg is
. .
2-1-7 In the second session, login to the internet collaboration screen as carrier 0000001058 using the login information below: User-Id
NORDSPEED
Password:
welcome
a
Navigate to SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Supply Chain Collaboration Collaborative Transportation Planning
b
Enter the User-id and Password for the TSP from the table above.
c
Select Logon
d
In the Search screen that appears, select Start Search
. .
Find, accept and confirm your shipment. MAKE SURE YOU ACCEPT ONLY YOUR SHIPMENT. e © SAP AG
Find your shipment and select the Accept SCM612
radio button. 9-80
f
Select Confirm
.
Exit the transaction and return to your Interactive Vehicle Scheduling session.
g
.
Select Exit
2-1-8 Return to the session with Interactive Vehicle Scheduling. Refresh your screen and review the tendering status for your shipment.
© SAP AG
a
Choose Refresh
b
Select the shipment corresponding to the 25##
c
tab. Check the tendering status. You Choose the Details should see that the tendering has been accepted by the carrier 0000001058.
.
SCM612
T-S44A## leg.
9-81
© SAP AG
SCM612
9-82
Contents: Control Rules Schedules/Itineraries Trailers and Compartments Dynamic Route Determination
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-1
After completing this unit, you will be able to: Describe and configure the use of control rules in TP/VS. Explain the use of itinerary scheduling and the basic customizing and master data activities. Use multi-compartmental vehicles as resources in a TP/VS planning environment. Understand the Dynamic Route Determination application and how it can be used within the TP/VS planning environment.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-2
Additional Functions in TP/VS Lesson 1: Control Rules Lesson 2: Itinerary Scheduling Lesson 3: Trailers and Compartments Lesson 4: Dynamic Route Determination
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-3
!
"
While not required in TP/VS planning, there are a number of additional functions the PC manufacturer might need to meet certain planning requirements.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-4
#
$
Additional Functions in TP/VS Lesson 1: Control Rules Lesson 2: Itinerary Scheduling Lesson 3: Trailers and Compartments Lesson 4: Dynamic Route Determination
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-5
#
$
%
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Configure and use control rules to update planned shipments, or cause re-planning of shipments when identified changes are made to the source transportation demand documents.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-6
#
$
!
"
When certain changes are made to the source transportation demand (orders, deliveries, etc.), it is important that the transportation planners are notified and the changes can be reflected in the shipments.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-7
#
$ What should be done if planned order is changed in ERP? Planned shipments: De-allocate order Invalidate Adjust BAdI Write alert Define alert type Maintain selection conditions for planned orders Maintain change conditions for shipments If no rule is found, shipment is always adjusted and kept consistent
SAP AG 2008
A Control Rule is a rule that determines which actions are to be performed for planned shipments when the corresponding orders are changed in the ERP system. You use control rules to determine changes to orders (for example, sales orders or purchase orders) and deliveries in the ERP system, and to automatically adjust the corresponding planned shipments in the Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component using suitable actions. However, in TP/VS you can only adjust planned shipments that have not yet been transferred to the ERP system. If you do not define any control rules, the planned shipment remains unchanged in TP/VS. The system can automatically adjust planned shipments for the following types of changes in the ERP system (dependent on the settings in the control rule: •
Change an order or a delivery
•
Delete an order or a delivery
•
Create a delivery for an order
•
Post goods issue or goods receipts for a delivery
You can specify that the system is to write an alert when an order has been changed in the ERP system for which a planned shipment was already created in TP/VS. You can then check your planning situation in TP/VS and make any necessary changes.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-8
#
$
#
#&
SAP AG 2008
Maintenance with Transaction /SAPAPO/VS80, or menu path SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Environment OLTP Interface Define Control Rules. In the Action to be Performed area, the Shipments field indicates what changes are to be performed on planned shipments: • • • • • • •
•
Adjust shipment - If you have not changed the order quantity, the planned shipment remains unchanged. If you have changed the order quantity, the system updates the total weight and total volume of the planned shipment only. Deallocate order - The system removes the order from the planned shipment. Deallocate order (only for capacity overload) - If you have increased the order quantity so that the resource is overloaded, the system removes the order from the shipment. Invalidate (retain order) - The system invalidates the planned shipment. The assignment between the planned shipment and the order remains intact. Invalidate (retain order) (only for capacity overload) - The system invalidates the planned shipment. The assignment between the planned shipment and the order remains intact.This only happens if you have increased the order quantity in such a way that the resource is overloaded. Invalidate (deallocate order) - The system invalidates the planned shipment and deallocates the order. Invalidate (removes order) (only for capacity overload) - The system invalidates the planned shipment and removes the order. This only happens if you have increased the order quantity in such a way that the resource is overloaded. BAdI - You can use the Business Add-In (BAdI): /SAPAPO/VS_INB_PROC, method PROCESS_EXT_CHANGES to define your own actions.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-9
#
$
%
'
You should now be able to: Configure and use control rules to update planned shipments, or cause re-planning of shipments when identified changes are made to the source transportation demand documents.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-10
(
'
&
Additional Functions in TP/VS Lesson 1: Control Rules Lesson 2: Itinerary Scheduling Lesson 3: Trailers and Compartments Lesson 4: Dynamic Route Determination
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-11
(
'
&
%
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Configure and set up the master data necessary to use itinerary scheduling in shipment planning.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-12
(
'
&
!
"
The PC manufacturer has a chain of retail stores and merchandise deliveries are made to these stores according to a fixed schedule by the manufacturer’s own fleet of trucks.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-13
& Create a Means of Transport (flag for Schedule has to be set) Create a Vehicle Resource Assign Vehicle Resource to Model/Planning Version Assign Means of Transport to Transportation Lane Maintain Vehicle Scheduling Costs for Means of Transport Maintain Itinerary Maintenance from here on for Scenario 1 or Scenario 2 Scenario 1: Scenario 2:
Departure at a fixed day of the week (e.g. every Monday) Departure in a predefined frequency (e.g. every 10 days)
SAP AG 2008
SCM SAP Menu:: Advanced Planning and Optimization Maintain Means of Transport
Master Data
Transportation Lane
Relevant fields for maintenance of schedules are: Means of Transport, Transportation Mode and Schedule. SAP SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Master Data Resource; Vehicle tab. The flag 'Schedule' has to be set for the Means of Transport you have maintained at no. 1. SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization
Master Data
Transportation Lane.
The whole transport duration should be maintained here. To calculate the time of arrival the transport duration is added up to departure time. SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Master Data -> Application-Specific Master Data Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling -> Maintain Vehicle Scheduling Costs SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Master Data Application-Specific Master Data Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Schedules Maintain Itinerary SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Master Data Application-Specific Master Data Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Schedules Maintain Schedule Validity Period SCM SAP Menu: Advanced Planning and Optimization Master Data Application-Specific Master Data Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Schedules Maintain Schedule
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-14
&
)
*+
Maintain Calendar Maintain Schedule Validity Period Maintain Schedule
SAP AG 2008
IMG: General Settings Maintain Calendar - Radio-Button "Factory Calendar" - Press Change-Button - Create a new calendar - Enter Factory calendarID, name of calendar, Validity, ... - Choose workdays which are relevant for departure - Save SAP Menu: Master Data Master Data of Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Maintain Schedule Validity Period - Press "New Entries" - Enter a name - Identify the calendar by enter the CalendarID - Maintain Validity
Schedules
SAP Menu: Master Data Master Data of Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Schedules Maintain Schedule - Enter a name - Press Create-Button - Enter Validity, Itinerary, Transportation Method and name of Schedule Vehicle Resource - Enter time of departure and departure day - Press Generate-Button to create departure times and days on the basis of the maintained factory calendar - To change departure times the respective calendar has to be maintained.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-15
&
)
,+
Maintain Calendar Maintain Schedule Validity Period Maintain Schedule; departure times have to be maintained manually Generate
SAP AG 2008
SCM IMG: General Settings Maintain Calendar - Radio-Button Factory Calendar - Select Change - Create a new calendar - Enter Factory calendarID, name of calendar, Validity, ... - Choose workdays which are relevant for departure - Save SAP Menu: Master Data Master Data of Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Maintain Schedule Validity Period - Select New Entries - Enter a name - Assign a calendarID - Maintain Validity Period
Schedules
SAP Menu: Master Data Master Data of Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling Maintain Schedule - Enter a name - Select Create - Enter Validity, Itinerary, Means of Transport and name of Schedule, Vehicle Resource - Enter departure times manually. - To change departure times the respective calendar has to be maintained. - Select Generate
Schedules
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-16
& Note the following, when using Schedules in the Optimization: Loading/Unloading schedule vehicles is always estimated at 0. Do not maintain any work breaks for schedule resources. Maintain calendars with 7 working days/week for schedule resources. Opening hours maintained for schedule-relevant locations can result in you not being able to use the schedule resource if the opening hours do not correspond to the arrival/departure times.
SAP AG 2008
The travel time maintained in the schedule and the transport connections apply to the resource that is assigned to the schedule. Schedule A
B
C: Departure from location A at 10:00
Duration A
B: 3 hours, duration B
C: 2 hours
Arrival at B at 13:00, at C at 15:00
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-17
(
'
&
%
'
You should now be able to: Configure and set up the master data necessary to use itinerary scheduling in shipment planning.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-18
#
$
Additional Functions in TP/VS Lesson 1: Control Rules Lesson 2: Itinerary Scheduling Lesson 3: Trailers and Compartments Lesson 4: Dynamic Route Determination
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-19
#
"
%
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Describe the use and configuration of trailer resources, multi-compartmental vehicles and decreasing capacities of compartmental vehicles.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-20
#
"
!
"
In stock transport order processing, the PC manufacturer has a fleet of trucks and trailers. The trailers are use to physically contain the merchandise moved between the PC manufacturer’s DC’s. However, the PC manufacturer has more trailers than the trucks used to move the trailers. Therefore, it is necessary to plan with the trucks as a separate resource from the trailers.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-21
Separate independent planning possible for trucks and trailers Coupling and un-coupling of truck and trailers Flexible assignment of truck and trailer supported No limit on number of trailers Drop and hook scenarios are supported Support of automatic planning (with the optimizer) and manual planning
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-22
& Vehicle 1
Trailer
Vehicle 2
Couple (Trailer is secondary resource)
Plant A
GI 4711
GI 4712
GI 4713
GI 4714
Coupling Trailer & Vehicle 1
Goods Issue for customers B&C
Transport (Trailer is secondary resource) GR 4713
Customer B
GR 4712
GR 4711 Uncouple (Trailer is secondary resource)
Goods Receipt at customer B
Uncoupling Trailer & Vehicle 1
Shipment 1
Couple (Trailer is secondary resource)
Coupling Trailer & Vehicle 2
Transport (Trailer is secondary resource) Uncouple (Trailer is secondary resource)
Customer C
GR 4714 Shipment 2
Uncoupling Trailer & Vehicle 2
Goods Receipt at customer C
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-23
.
-/
Truck
Trailer
Means of Transport combination = 1 truck + n trailers
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-24
.
-/ Means of transport definition is extended by two attributes: Flag “PASSIVE”: Vehicles resources belonging to this means of transport cannot move on their own. They need to be coupled to a non-passive vehicle to move.
Flag “NO_CAPACITY”: Vehicle resources belonging to this means of transport have no own capacity. They can be used to move passive vehicles (trailers). This flag overrides the capacity definition of the resource.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-25
.
-/
Means of Transport (MTr) combination describes the following attributes: The MTr the combination consists of Number of the objects of each MTr within the combination, e.g. 1 truck and 2 trailers Capacities (several UoM): Maximum capacities of the combination Additional (free definable) attributes: Can be used for in/compatibilities; based on a customizable attribute definition (Code + Text) Trailer Couple and Uncouple Times: Defined per trailer (“passive” MTr)
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-26
0
0
0
"
Which and how many of this MTr belong to the MTr combination
Max. capacity for the MTr combination
Additional attributes for compatibilities
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-27
0
0
"
"
Coupling and uncoupling durations are defined per trailer (passive means of transport). The definition is independent of the means of transport combination the trailer is used in. Coupling and uncoupling duration in hours
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-28
.
"
# "
Capacities can be defined on different levels: MTr combination
Resource Compartment type
Means of transport combination
Vehicle C1
C2
C3
Trailer C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-29
.
"
)( 1+#
"
(In-)Compatibilities can be modeled between Freight unit and vehicle Freight unit and trailer (New) Freight unit and freight unit in same vehicle Freight unit and freight unit in same trailer (New) Freight unit and freight unit in means-of-Transport combination (New) Vehicle and trailer (New) Trailer and trailer (New) Trailer and location (cannot load/unload there) (New) Means-of-Transport combination and location (New) The maintenance of compatibility rules has been extended, so that new objects and new relations can be maintained.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-30
.
"
)( 1+#
"
The following new object types have been introduced: Compartment Means of transport combination
The following new relation settings have been introduced: Object combination Order-Order Compartment Level Vehicle Level MTr Combination Level Object combination Vehicle – Location Stay Loading/Unloading
SAP AG 2008
The compatibility level indicates on which level compatibility or incompatibility is defined. Compatibility levels other than Default may only be used for certain pairs of object types: •
Object types: Order/Freight Unit – Order/Freight Unit
•
Means of transport combination
•
Vehicle (Default)
•
Compartment
•
The interpretation is as follows: If compartment level is chosen, two incompatible freight units must not be transported in the same compartment, but they may be transported on one vehicle resource. If vehicle level is chosen, two incompatible freight units must not be transported in the same vehicle, but they may be transported on one MTr combination (e.g. one in the truck and one in the trailer. If MTr combination level is chosen, two incompatible freight units must not be transported on one vehicle combination.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-31
.
"
)( 1+#
"
The compatibility level indicates on which level compatibility or incompatibility is defined. Compatibility levels other than “Default” may only be used for certain pairs of object types: Object types: Vehicle – Location Stay (Default) Loading/Unloading The interpretation is as follows: If stay is chosen and an incompatibility is defined between the vehicle and the location, than this vehicle must not visit this location. If loading/unloading is chosen and an incompatibility is defined between the vehicle and the location, than this vehicle must not load or unload at this location.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-32
.
"
&
System will support coupling/uncoupling activities Other constraints: Maximum total distance Maximum duration (time between start of first activity (e.g. loading, coupling) and end of last activity (e.g. unloading, uncoupling)) Maximum number of stops (only those stops count as stops for the trailer at which there is a loading or unloading activity) Objectives (minimize): Distance traveled by the trailer Duration traveled by the trailer Number of used trailers Number of stops
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-33
& &
"
2
SCM TP/VS will support the automatic planning of truck and trailer using the TP/VS optimizer as well as manual planning
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-34
(
0
.
For manual planning of the truck => For each stage a node for each MTr of the MTr combination is shown => Freight units are dropped on the lowest level, which may be (depending on your scenario) Stage (if only non-passive MTr are used) MTr (if non-passive and passive MTr are used) Compartment (if each MTr is divided into smaller units)
Trailer Node
Compartment Node
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-35
(
$ The shipments are created according to the moving vehicles, e.g. trucks. All freight units which are on the truck and the used trailer will be placed in one ERP shipment. It is possible to model the assignment of freight units to trailers by using the packaging information. Therefore the mapping between the relevant means of transport (in standard truck, now also for trailer MTr' s) and the packing material in ERP has to be maintained.
SAP AG 2008
For the integration of truck and trailer the note 952667 should be implemented in ERP.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-36
(
$ Vehicle 1
Trailer
Vehicle 2
Couple (Trailer is secondary resource)
Plant A
GI 4711
GI 4712
GI 4713
GI 4714
Transport (Trailer is secondary resource) GR 4713
Customer B
ERP Shipment One
GR 4712
GR 4711 Uncouple (Trailer is secondary resource) Shipment 1
Couple (Trailer is secondary resource) Transport (Trailer is secondary resource) Uncouple (Trailer is secondary resource)
Customer C
ERP Shipment Two
GR 4714 Shipment 2
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-37
0# "
Means-of-Transport combination
Decreasing Capacity
Vehicle C1
C2
C3
Trailer C4
C5
C6
C7
C8
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-38
# " Delivering to different customers on same vehicle requires using separators, which reduces the total capacity of the vehicle Each additional stop (customer) causes a further reduction of total capacity of the vehicle This only reduces the vehicle’s capacity It does not reduce the compartments’ capacities in the vehicle Since both capacities (vehicle, compartment) are valid, the reduction of the vehicle’s capacity implicitly reduces the feasible load in all compartments of the vehicle Maintenance alternatives: Maintenance of a fixed percentage value by which the capacity is decreased at each stop off Maintenance of a fixed value by which the capacity is decreased at each stop off Maintenance of single values for different stop off numbers SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-39
# " Maintained in the cost profile Example Capacity is reduced by 10 % After the ninth stop the capacity is not reduced anymore
After the first stop the capacity is reduced
Definition Max. No. Stop-Offs:
Visiting a location with at least one load / unload-activity on the vehicle.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-40
0# " Scenario with two stop-offs (I) Creation of two Sales Orders for different customers with 4,5 m3 for each order The result will be that both orders do not fit into one truck (II) Creation of two Sales Orders for two different customers with 4 m3 for each order The result will be that both orders fit onto the truck Total capacity = 10 m3
Per stop-off the capacity is decreased by 10 %. SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-41
# " Scenario (I):
Scenario (II):
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-42
.
#
"
)(+
Means of Transport (assign the Compartment profile to MoTr) Compartment Profile (ties together compartment types) Compartment Types (can be flexible or fix)
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-43
#
" Compartments divide the truck and also the trailer into smaller units
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-44
#
"
&
-
Vehicle Combination Truck
Trailer
m possible trailers per vehicle
Compartment
n possible compartments per transport unit
k possible meters per compartment
Compartment concept valid for vehicles and trailers
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-45
.
#
"
)(+
Means of Transport (assign the Compartment profile to MoTr) Compartment Profile (ties together compartment types) Compartment Types (can be flexible or fix)
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-46
.
#
"
)((+
Compartment Type (CT) classifies a compartment into: Unique Order (yes/no): Only the freight units from one order can be delivered in one compartment (“sealed/meter” scenario)
Capacities (several UoM’s): Maximum capacity
Steps for (vehicle) capacity consumption (per UoM): Models intervals for the vehicle capacity consumption according to the actual load of the compartment (without steps: actual load = consumed capacity)
Additional (free definable) attributes regarding the compartment can be defined: Can be used for in-/compatibilities; based on a customizable attribute definition (Code + Text) SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-47
.
#
"
)(((+
Compartment Profile defines the number and types of compartments a vehicle comprises of: Sequence Number (counter) Compartment Type Free definable text (could be used in order to define a more detailed position for a compartment within a profile; not taken into account in standard)
Compartment Profile finally is assigned to a Means of Transport
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-48
#
" Fixed number of compartments per vehicle Flexible number of compartments per vehicle The following models will be offered per compartment: Fixed capacity per compartment, for example 4 tons Flexible capacity, continuous case, for example a truck with 2 compartments which are completely flexible. Each compartment can be used between zero tons and 2 tons. Flexible capacity, discrete case, for example if you use the compartment you always have to use at least 1 tons, then 2 tons, etc, until 5 tons. Flexible capacity, combinations of above, for example you have to use at least 2 tons if you use the compartment, then it is flexible until 5 tons.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-49
!
#
"
'"
“Fixed” compartments Vehicle capacity: 20 m3 1: CT A
2: CT A
3: CT B
Max. Cap.: 5 m3
Max. Cap.: 5 m3
Max. Cap.: 10 m3
Definition: The definition whether a compartment is flexible or fix is dependent on the whole vehicle. If a vehicle has fixed compartments then the sum of the capacities of all assigned compartments is equal to the capacity of the vehicle. SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-50
!
#
"
'"
“Flexible” compartments (“continuous position”) Flexible compartment with minimum capacity
Continuous compartment with partially fixed position
Definition: If a vehicle has flexible compartments this means, that the sum of the capacities of all assigned compartments is greater than the capacity of the vehicle.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-51
#
"
(
"
'
Additional incompatibility constraints can be modeled between freight units in the same compartment (New) Therefore, the object “Compartment” has been added to the compatibility rules:
two freight units (originating from different orders) in the same compartment (= “sealed” compartment) (New) freight units for one customer resulting out of two different sales orders can not be transported in the same compartment
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-52
(#&
(
Trailer Node
Compartment Node
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-53
(#&
(
)((+
Right mouse click on the Compartment Node in order to display the compartment info
Here you can see the capacity and maintained steps for the compartments
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-54
(#&
(
)(((+
The system can show you the total, minimum, maximum or average weight / volume of the compartments as well as of the resource.
Right mouse click onto volume and weight to see for example the current total volume of the compartment as well as truck.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-55
#
"
%
'
You should now be able to: Describe the use and configuration of trailer resources, multi-compartmental vehicles and decreasing capacities of compartmental vehicles.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-56
'
$
Additional Functions in TP/VS Lesson 1: Control Rules Lesson 2: Itinerary Scheduling Lesson 3: Trailers and Compartments Lesson 4: Dynamic Route Determination
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-57
'
$
%
After completing this lesson, you will be able to: Understand the application of dynamic route determination in the TP/VS environment.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-58
'
$
!
"
For certain orders the PC manufacturer wants to be able to display from the sales order and in TP/VS planning shipment proposals without having to run the optimization process.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-59
#.
'
$
3
&
4
Can be performed: During sales order entry In a simulation mode without orders Out of the interactive vehicle scheduling for any kind of orders Inactive and / or automatic powerful decision support tool To carry out TP/VS based order scheduling, resource allocation, carrier selection and shipment creation Available for sales orders and quotations only!
SAP AG 2008
This function performs automatic transportation planning and scheduling without calling the optimizer. As a result, shipment proposals will be generated and the relevant dates/times. The ERP system automatically triggers dynamic route determination when a sales order (or quotation) is created or changed. Dynamic route determination can also be performed interactively out of TP/VS for any type of order (sales orders, purchase orders, and so on) and deliveries from the planning view of the Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component. Simulation mode is available with transaction /SAPAPO/VS18. Dynamic route determination can also be executed in background mode. 3 types of scheduling are possible •
Resource capacity and availability (as in old releases)
•
only resource capacity (external resources)
•
Without capacity and availability constraints
New scheduling is crucial for TPVS-RG functionality
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-60
&
5 '
& &
'
$
Rule based approach to find the best way through the network Allow to show several / all possible routes and select interactively
SAP AG 2008
SAP delivers these steps, in the sequence specified, in the default strategy 50_DEFAULT with the following methods: •
50_DND Dynamic network determination
•
50_RSEL Resource selection
•
50_SCHD Scheduling
•
50_CAPA TSP capacity check
•
50_CCAL Cost calculation
New strategies can be defined in accordance with customers requirements, for example, by deleting steps, adding additional steps, or ordering the steps differently. Strategies are defined in Customizing for TP/VS under Dynamic Route Determination. Various BAdIs can be used for incorporating customerspecific solutions in Customizing for TP/VS. The result of the dynamic route determination are shipment proposals.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-61
# Multiple hub- decisions (max. 2 hubs included)
Resources: own fleet, external vessels, scheduled resources
Inter-modal shipments
Freight cost calculation on tariffs for carriers
Capacity checks on resources Carrier availability and determination based on costs
Including order split
SAP AG 2008
Dynamic route determination performs the following steps with strategy 50_DEFAULT: 50_DND Geographical determination 50_RSE Assignment of vehicle resources 50_SCHD Scheduling 50_CAPA Check of transportation allocations of transportation service providers (TSPs) 50_CCAL Determination of transportation and penalty costs
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-62
0 $ mySAP ERP Customer Order Entry
gATP
mySAP SCM TP/VS Strategy determination and execution of methods Interactive / automatic route selection / DRD ATP Availability Check, requested MAD = Start of DRD proposal
MAD = Material Availability Date
Determined MAD = Start of selected DRD proposal?
No
Perform DRD with forward scheduling from determined MAD
Yes
Creation of temporary shipment with reservation of resource and carrier capacities Create Order
Confirm planned shipment
SAP AG 2008
Dynamic route determination requires the usage of global ATP. Dynamic route determination with the SAP delivered strategy 50_DEFAULT. New strategies with different methods and order of the methods can be defined. The process starts if called out of ERP at the sales order creation.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-63
#
0
$
'
)*+
At the Creation of a sales order in ERP the following screen can appear in SCM :
Select appropriate shipment according to specified criteria, e.g. cost
Note: If the DRD shows the screen or not depends on the DRD profile settings
SAP AG 2008
This function performs automatic transportation planning and scheduling without calling the optimizer. As a result, you get shipment proposals and the relevant dates/times. The ERP system automatically triggers dynamic route determination when you create or change sales orders. For more information, see Dynamic Route Determination from the ERP System. You can also perform dynamic route determination interactively for your orders (sales orders, purchase orders, and so on) and deliveries from the planning view of the Transportation Planning/Vehicle Scheduling (TP/VS) component. Simulation and background modes are also available.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-64
#
0
$
'
),+
After having selected the appropriate shipment, start performance of ATP check
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-65
#
0
$
'
)6+
ATP screen appears with delivery proposal
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-66
#
0
(
&
&
)*+
Choose button Dynamic Route Determination in /SAPAPO/VS01
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-67
#
0
(
&
&
),+
The Screen with appropriate shipment proposals appears
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-68
#
0
(
&
&
)6+
Change the freight units in the freight unit builder for example define appointments with your customers Original requested delivery dates of order in ERP are not changed
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-69
#
0
(
&
&
)7+
Press button “Accept” Planned shipments are created
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-70
#
. Transaction /SAPAPO/VS18
SAP AG 2008
Dynamic route determination can be called in simulation mode, with no reference to an order.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-71
$
0
)*+
In the my SAP SCM system: Define route determination profile
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-72
$
0
),+
Transaction /SAPAPO/VS16 Maintain general settings for dynamic route determination
SAP AG 2008
Control data: •
Strategy: Which methods will be used for the route determination
•
Sorting: Selection criteria for the evaluated route
•
No. Shpt. Proposals: How many route options are displayed
•
Do not save: Shipment creating yes / no
•
Interactive selection: Display the DRD result screen with the chance to select a proposal different from the best one according to sorting or hide the screen and choose the best proposal automatically.
Order filtering: •
Filter which determines based on all available fields of the freight unit if this profile should be used.
•
If several profile apply to the same freight unit the one with the highest priority (lowest value) is used.
Planning Horizon •
In which horizon can the system create shipments
Fixed Transportation Duration •
If maintained all proposals will use this fixed duration. The shipment will always be a direct delivery.
•
Using the fixed transportation duration the DND method would not evaluate the geography but return for all means of transport direct shipments with the fixed duration.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-73
$
0
)8+
Maintain resources and transportation service provider information
SAP AG 2008
Shipments can be created without resource. The manual pool planning the resource can then be later assigned. Flag: Del. Shpts W/o TSP: All possible shipments for which no carrier could be determinated will be deleted.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-74
'9.
&
In TP/VS customizing Define methods, strategies and parameters for dynamic route determination Assign methods to strategies and method parameters to strategies Define order of methods within a strategy
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-75
( Most important: Activate dynamic route determination for logical system and order type in the SCM System!
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-76
(( Most important: Activate dynamic route determination in the ERP system by using the report ATP_BASIC_SETTING Group Check w/o Delivery Group must be active to allow the constructions of cross-item freight units and to consider delivery groups / complete delivery indicator Retransfer of ATP Desired Dates must be active to allow ERP to make use of the DRD results
SAP AG 2008
See also note 861394
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-77
$
& Rush orders are supported in DRD during order entry in ERP Deliveries which were created for rush orders are automatically assigned to shipments created in DRD during order entry Quantity split in TP/VS is not allowed for rush orders. Freight units are created with the same split criteria as deliveries in ERP
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-78
% Works only out of ERP, during shipment creation in TP/VS and on simulation mode CRM and external OLTP Systems are not supported Can only be used together with global ATP, so only requirements and ATP relevant items are checked Works correctly for delivery scheduling only when done for rush orders or if delivery is generated in TP/VS Does not work for MATP (Multi-level ATP), but it works for RBA (Rule based ATP) See note 307611 for further details
SAP AG 2008
If the delivery is created in ERP from the sales order the scheduling is not done via the DRD but with normal Configurable Process Scheduling.
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-79
'
$
%
'
You should now be able to: Understand the application of dynamic route determination in the TP/VS environment.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-80
'
You should now be able to: Describe and configure the use of control rules in TP/VS. Explain the use of itinerary scheduling and the basic customizing and master data activities. Use multi-compartmental vehicles as resources in a TP/VS planning environment. Understand the Dynamic Route Determination application and how it can be used within the TP/VS planning environment.
SAP AG 2008
© SAP AG
SCM612
10-81
